diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'docs/manpages')
37 files changed, 0 insertions, 14022 deletions
diff --git a/docs/manpages/.cvsignore b/docs/manpages/.cvsignore deleted file mode 100644 index aa705081338..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/.cvsignore +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2 +0,0 @@ -manpage.links -manpage.refs diff --git a/docs/manpages/editreg.1 b/docs/manpages/editreg.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 6f418a28dc4..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/editreg.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,71 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "EDITREG" 1 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -editreg \- A utility to report and change SIDs in registry files -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBeditreg\fR [-v] [-c file] {file} -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -\fBeditreg\fR is a utility that can visualize windows registry files (currently only NT4) and apply so-called commandfiles to them\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP -registry_file -Registry file to view or edit\&. - - -.TP --v,--verbose -Increases verbosity of messages\&. - - -.TP --c commandfile -Read commands to execute on \fIregistry_file\fR from \fIcommandfile\fR\&. Currently not yet supported! - - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The editreg man page was written by Jelmer Vernooij\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/findsmb.1 b/docs/manpages/findsmb.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4da2c12a08e..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/findsmb.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,95 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "FINDSMB" 1 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -findsmb \- list info about machines that respond to SMB name queries on a subnet -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBfindsmb\fR [subnet broadcast address] -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This Perl script is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -\fBfindsmb\fR is a Perl script that prints out several pieces of information about machines on a subnet that respond to SMB name query requests\&. It uses \fBnmblookup\fR(1) and \fBsmbclient\fR(1) to obtain this information\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP --r -Controls whether \fBfindsmb\fR takes bugs in Windows95 into account when trying to find a NetBIOS name registered of the remote machine\&. This option is disabled by default because it is specific to Windows 95 and Windows 95 machines only\&. If set, \fBnmblookup\fR(1) will be called with \fB-B\fR option\&. - - -.TP -subnet broadcast address -Without this option, \fBfindsmb \fR will probe the subnet of the machine where \fBfindsmb\fR(1) is run\&. This value is passed to \fBnmblookup\fR(1) as part of the \fB-B\fR option\&. - - -.SH "EXAMPLES" - -.PP -The output of \fBfindsmb\fR lists the following information for all machines that respond to the initial\fBnmblookup\fR for any name: IP address, NetBIOS name, Workgroup name, operating system, and SMB server version\&. - -.PP -There will be a '+' in front of the workgroup name for machines that are local master browsers for that workgroup\&. There will be an '*' in front of the workgroup name for machines that are the domain master browser for that workgroup\&. Machines that are running Windows, Windows 95 or Windows 98 will not show any information about the operating system or server version\&. - -.PP -The command with \fB-r\fR option must be run on a system without \fBnmbd\fR(8)running\&. If \fBnmbd\fR is running on the system, you will only get the IP address and the DNS name of the machine\&. To get proper responses from Windows 95 and Windows 98 machines, the command must be run as root and with \fB-r\fR option on a machine without \fBnmbd\fR running\&. - -.PP -For example, running \fBfindsmb\fR without \fB-r\fR option set would yield output similar to the following -.nf - -IP ADDR NETBIOS NAME WORKGROUP/OS/VERSION ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -192\&.168\&.35\&.10 MINESET-TEST1 [DMVENGR] -192\&.168\&.35\&.55 LINUXBOX *[MYGROUP] [Unix] [Samba 2\&.0\&.6] -192\&.168\&.35\&.56 HERBNT2 [HERB-NT] -192\&.168\&.35\&.63 GANDALF [MVENGR] [Unix] [Samba 2\&.0\&.5a for IRIX] -192\&.168\&.35\&.65 SAUNA [WORKGROUP] [Unix] [Samba 1\&.9\&.18p10] -192\&.168\&.35\&.71 FROGSTAR [ENGR] [Unix] [Samba 2\&.0\&.0 for IRIX] -192\&.168\&.35\&.78 HERBDHCP1 +[HERB] -192\&.168\&.35\&.88 SCNT2 +[MVENGR] [Windows NT 4\&.0] [NT LAN Manager 4\&.0] -192\&.168\&.35\&.93 FROGSTAR-PC [MVENGR] [Windows 5\&.0] [Windows 2000 LAN Manager] -192\&.168\&.35\&.97 HERBNT1 *[HERB-NT] [Windows NT 4\&.0] [NT LAN Manager 4\&.0] -.fi - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -\fBnmbd\fR(8),\fBsmbclient\fR(1), and \fBnmblookup\fR(1) - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/lmhosts.5 b/docs/manpages/lmhosts.5 deleted file mode 100644 index 47bedda12a1..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/lmhosts.5 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,92 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "LMHOSTS" 5 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -lmhosts \- The Samba NetBIOS hosts file -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.PP -\fIlmhosts\fR is the \fBSamba\fR(7) NetBIOS name to IP address mapping file\&. - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This file is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -\fIlmhosts\fR is the \fBSamba \fR NetBIOS name to IP address mapping file\&. It is very similar to the \fI/etc/hosts\fR file format, except that the hostname component must correspond to the NetBIOS naming format\&. - -.SH "FILE FORMAT" - -.PP -It is an ASCII file containing one line for NetBIOS name\&. The two fields on each line are separated from each other by white space\&. Any entry beginning with '#' is ignored\&. Each line in the lmhosts file contains the following information: - -.TP 3 -\(bu -IP Address - in dotted decimal format\&. - -.TP -\(bu -NetBIOS Name - This name format is a maximum fifteen character host name, with an optional trailing '#' character followed by the NetBIOS name type as two hexadecimal digits\&. - - -If the trailing '#' is omitted then the given IP address will be returned for all names that match the given name, whatever the NetBIOS name type in the lookup\&. - -.LP - -.PP -An example follows: -.nf - -# -# Sample Samba lmhosts file\&. -# -192\&.9\&.200\&.1 TESTPC -192\&.9\&.200\&.20 NTSERVER#20 -192\&.9\&.200\&.21 SAMBASERVER - .fi - -.PP -Contains three IP to NetBIOS name mappings\&. The first and third will be returned for any queries for the names "TESTPC" and "SAMBASERVER" respectively, whatever the type component of the NetBIOS name requested\&. - -.PP -The second mapping will be returned only when the "0x20" name type for a name "NTSERVER" is queried\&. Any other name type will not be resolved\&. - -.PP -The default location of the \fIlmhosts\fR file is in the same directory as the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file\&. - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -\fBsmbclient\fR(1), \fBsmb.conf\fR(5), and \fBsmbpasswd\fR(8) - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available atftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/log2pcap.1 b/docs/manpages/log2pcap.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 60df0662600..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/log2pcap.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,116 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "LOG2PCAP" 1 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -log2pcap \- Extract network traces from Samba log files -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBlog2pcap\fR [-h] [-q] [logfile] [pcap_file] -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -\fBlog2pcap\fR reads in a samba log file and generates a pcap file (readable by most sniffers, such as ethereal or tcpdump) based on the packet dumps in the log file\&. - -.PP -The log file must have a \fIlog level\fR of at least \fB5\fR to get the SMB header/parameters right, \fB10\fR to get the first 512 data bytes of the packet and \fB50\fR to get the whole packet\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP --h -If this parameter is specified the output file will be a hex dump, in a format that is readable by the text2pcap utility\&. - - -.TP --q -Be quiet\&. No warning messages about missing or incomplete data will be given\&. - - -.TP -logfile -Samba log file\&. log2pcap will try to read the log from stdin if the log file is not specified\&. - - -.TP -pcap_file -Name of the output file to write the pcap (or hexdump) data to\&. If this argument is not specified, output data will be written to stdout\&. - - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.SH "EXAMPLES" - -.PP -Extract all network traffic from all samba log files: - -.PP - -.nf - - $ cat /var/log/* | log2pcap > trace\&.pcap - .fi - - -.PP -Convert to pcap using text2pcap: - -.PP - -.nf - - $ log2pcap -h samba\&.log | text2pcap -T 139,139 - trace\&.pcap - .fi - - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "BUGS" - -.PP -Only SMB data is extracted from the samba logs, no LDAP, NetBIOS lookup or other data\&. - -.PP -The generated TCP and IP headers don't contain a valid checksum\&. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -\fBtext2pcap\fR(1), \fBethereal\fR(1) - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -This manpage was written by Jelmer Vernooij\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/mount.cifs.8 b/docs/manpages/mount.cifs.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 9fcabf38a7d..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/mount.cifs.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,186 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "MOUNT.CIFS" 8 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -mount.cifs \- mount using the Common Internet File System (CIFS) -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBmount.cifs\fR {service} {mount-point} [-o options] -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -mount\&.cifs mounts a Linux CIFS filesystem\&. It is usually invoked indirectly by the \fBmount\fR(8) command when using the "-t cifs" option\&. This command only works in Linux, and the kernel must support the cifs filesystem\&. The CIFS protocol is the successor to the SMB protocol and is supported by most Windows servers and many other commercial servers and Network Attached Storage appliances as well as by the popular Open Source server Samba\&. - -.PP -The mount\&.cifs utility attaches the UNC name (exported network resource) to the local directory \fBmount-point\fR\&. It is possible to set the mode for mount\&.cifs to setuid root to allow non-root users to mount shares to directories for which they have write permission\&. - -.PP -Options to \fBmount\&.cifs\fR are specified as a comma-separated list of key=value pairs\&. It is possible to send options other than those listed here, assuming that cifs supports them\&. If you get mount failures, check your kernel log for errors on unknown options\&. - -.PP -\fBmount\&.cifs\fR is a daemon\&. After mounting it keeps running until the mounted resource is unmounted (usually via the umount utility) - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP -username=\fIarg\fR -specifies the username to connect as\&. If this is not given, then the environment variable \fBUSER\fR is used\&. This option can also take the form "user%password" or "user/workgroup" or "user/workgroup%password" to allow the password and workgroup to be specified as part of the username\&. - - -.TP -password=\fIarg\fR -specifies the CIFS password\&. If this option is not given then the environment variable \fBPASSWD\fR is used\&. If it can find no password \fBmount\&.cifs\fR will prompt for a passeword, unless the guest option is given\&. - - -Note that password which contain the arguement delimiter character (i\&.e\&. a comma ',') will failed to be parsed correctly on the command line\&. However, the same password defined in the PASSWD environment variable or a credentials file (see below) will be read correctly\&. - - -.TP -credentials=\fIfilename\fR -specifies a file that contains a username and/or password\&. The format of the file is: - - - -.nf - username = value - password = value -.fi -This is preferred over having passwords in plaintext in a shared file, such as \fI/etc/fstab\fR\&. Be sure to protect any credentials file properly\&. - - -.TP -uid=\fIarg\fR -sets the uid that will own all files on the mounted filesystem\&. It may be specified as either a username or a numeric uid\&. This parameter is ignored when the target server supports the CIFS Unix extensions\&. - - -.TP -gid=\fIarg\fR -sets the gid that will own all files on the mounted filesystem\&. It may be specified as either a groupname or a numeric gid\&. This parameter is ignored when the target server supports the CIFS Unix extensions\&. - - -.TP -port=\fIarg\fR -sets the port number on the server to attempt to contact to negotiate CIFS support\&. If the CIFS server is not listening on this port or if it is not specified, the default ports will be tried i\&.e\&. port 445 is tried and if no response then port 139 is tried\&. - - -.TP -file_mode=\fIarg\fR -If the server does not support the CIFS Unix extensions this overrides default file mode which will be used locally\&. - - -.TP -dir_mode=\fIarg\fR -If the server does not support the CIFS Unix extensions this overrides the default mode for directories\&. - - -.TP -ip=\fIarg\fR -sets the destination host or IP address\&. - - -.TP -domain=\fIarg\fR -sets the domain (workgroup) of the user - - -.TP -guest -don't prompt for a password - - -.TP -ro -mount read-only - - -.TP -rw -mount read-write - - -.TP -rsize -default network read size - - -.TP -wsize -default network write size - - -.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES" - -.PP -The variable \fBUSER\fR may contain the username of the person using the client\&. This information is used only if the protocol level is high enough to support session-level passwords\&. The variable can be used to set both username and password by using the format username%password\&. - -.PP -The variable \fBPASSWD\fR may contain the password of the person using the client\&. This information is used only if the protocol level is high enough to support session-level passwords\&. - -.PP -The variable \fBPASSWD_FILE\fR may contain the pathname of a file to read the password from\&. A single line of input is read and used as the password\&. - -.SH "NOTES" - -.PP -This command may be used only by root\&. - -.SH "CONFIGURATION" - -.PP -The primary mechanism for making configuration changes and for reading debug information for the cifs vfs is via the Linux /proc filesystem\&. In the directory /proc/fs/cifs are various configuration files and pseudo files which can display debug information\&. For more information see the kernel file fs/cifs/README - -.SH "BUGS" - -.PP -Passwords and other options containing , can not be handled\&. For passwords an alternative way of passing them is in a credentials file or in the PASSWD environment\&. - -.PP -The credentials file does not handle usernames or passwords with leading space\&. - -.PP -Note that the typical response to a bug report is suggestion to try the latest version first\&. So please try doing that first, and always include which versions you use of relevant software when reporting bugs (minimum: samba, kernel, distribution) - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -Documentation/filesystems/cifs\&.txt and fs/cifs/README in the linux kernel source tree may contain additional options and information\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -Steve French - -.PP -The syntax and manpage were loosely based on that of smbmount\&. It was converted to Docbook/XML by Jelmer Vernooij\&. - -.PP -The current maintainer of the Linux cifs vfs and the userspace tool \fBmount\&.cifs\fR is Steve French\&. The SAMBA Mailing list is the preferred place to ask questions regarding these programs\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/net.8 b/docs/manpages/net.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 2051804504d..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/net.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,554 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "NET" 8 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -net \- Tool for administration of Samba and remote CIFS servers. -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBnet\fR {<ads|rap|rpc>} [-h] [-w workgroup] [-W myworkgroup] [-U user] [-I ip-address] - [-p port] [-n myname] [-s conffile] [-S server] [-l] [-P] [-D debuglevel] - -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -The samba net utility is meant to work just like the net utility available for windows and DOS\&. The first argument should be used to specify the protocol to use when executing a certain command\&. ADS is used for ActiveDirectory, RAP is using for old (Win9x/NT3) clients and RPC can be used for NT4 and Windows 2000\&. If this argument is omitted, net will try to determine it automatically\&. Not all commands are available on all protocols\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.TP --w target-workgroup -Sets target workgroup or domain\&. You have to specify either this option or the IP address or the name of a server\&. - - -.TP --W workgroup -Sets client workgroup or domain - - -.TP --U user -User name to use - - -.TP --I ip-address -IP address of target server to use\&. You have to specify either this option or a target workgroup or a target server\&. - - -.TP --p port -Port on the target server to connect to (usually 139 or 445)\&. Defaults to trying 445 first, then 139\&. - - -.TP --n <primary NetBIOS name> -This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself\&. This is identical to setting the \fInetbios name\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in \fIsmb\&.conf\fR\&. - - -.TP --s <configuration file> -The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&. - - -.TP --S server -Name of target server\&. You should specify either this option or a target workgroup or a target IP address\&. - - -.TP --l -When listing data, give more information on each item\&. - - -.TP --P -Make queries to the external server using the machine account of the local server\&. - - -.TP --d|--debug=debuglevel -\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&. - - -The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day-to-day running - it generates a small amount of information about operations carried out\&. - - -Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&. - - -Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. - - -.SH "COMMANDS" - -.SS "CHANGESECRETPW" - -.PP -This command allows the Samba machine account password to be set from an external application to a machine account password that has already been stored in Active Directory\&. DO NOT USE this command unless you know exactly what you are doing\&. The use of this command requires that the force flag (-f) be used also\&. There will be NO command prompt\&. Whatever information is piped into stdin, either by typing at the command line or otherwise, will be stored as the literal machine password\&. Do NOT use this without care and attention as it will overwrite a legitimate machine password without warning\&. YOU HAVE BEEN WARNED\&. - -.SS "TIME" - -.PP -The \fBNET TIME\fR command allows you to view the time on a remote server or synchronise the time on the local server with the time on the remote server\&. - -.PP -Without any options, the \fBNET TIME\fR command displays the time on the remote server\&. - -.PP -Displays the time on the remote server in a format ready for \fB/bin/date\fR - -.PP -Tries to set the date and time of the local server to that on the remote server using \fB/bin/date\fR\&. - -.PP -Displays the timezone in hours from GMT on the remote computer\&. - -.SS "[RPC|ADS] JOIN [TYPE] [-U username[%password]] [options]" - -.PP -Join a domain\&. If the account already exists on the server, and [TYPE] is MEMBER, the machine will attempt to join automatically\&. (Assuming that the machine has been created in server manager) Otherwise, a password will be prompted for, and a new account may be created\&. - -.PP -[TYPE] may be PDC, BDC or MEMBER to specify the type of server joining the domain\&. - -.SS "[RPC] OLDJOIN [options]" - -.PP -Join a domain\&. Use the OLDJOIN option to join the domain using the old style of domain joining - you need to create a trust account in server manager first\&. - -.SS "[RPC|ADS] USER" - -.PP -Delete specified user - -.PP -List all users - -.PP -List the domain groups of a the specified user\&. - -.PP -Add specified user\&. - -.SS "[RPC|ADS] GROUP" - -.PP -List user groups\&. - -.PP -Delete specified group\&. - -.PP -Create specified group\&. - -.SS "[RAP|RPC] SHARE" - -.PP -Enumerates all exported resources (network shares) on target server\&. - -.PP -Adds a share from a server (makes the export active)\&. Maxusers specifies the number of users that can be connected to the share simultaneously\&. - -.PP -Delete specified share\&. - -.SS "[RPC|RAP] FILE" - -.PP -List all open files on remote server\&. - -.PP -Close file with specified \fIfileid\fR on remote server\&. - -.PP -Print information on specified \fIfileid\fR\&. Currently listed are: file-id, username, locks, path, permissions\&. - -.RS -.Sh "Note" - -.PP -Currently NOT implemented\&. - -.RE - -.SS "SESSION" - -.PP -Without any other options, SESSION enumerates all active SMB/CIFS sessions on the target server\&. - -.PP -Close the specified sessions\&. - -.PP -Give a list with all the open files in specified session\&. - -.SS "RAP SERVER DOMAIN" - -.PP -List all servers in specified domain or workgroup\&. Defaults to local domain\&. - -.SS "RAP DOMAIN" - -.PP -Lists all domains and workgroups visible on the current network\&. - -.SS "RAP PRINTQ" - -.PP -Lists the specified print queue and print jobs on the server\&. If the \fIQUEUE_NAME\fR is omitted, all queues are listed\&. - -.PP -Delete job with specified id\&. - -.SS "RAP VALIDATE user [password]" - -.PP -Validate whether the specified user can log in to the remote server\&. If the password is not specified on the commandline, it will be prompted\&. - -.RS -.Sh "Note" - -.PP -Currently NOT implemented\&. - -.RE - -.SS "RAP GROUPMEMBER" - -.PP -List all members of the specified group\&. - -.PP -Delete member from group\&. - -.PP -Add member to group\&. - -.SS "RAP ADMIN command" - -.PP -Execute the specified \fIcommand\fR on the remote server\&. Only works with OS/2 servers\&. - -.RS -.Sh "Note" - -.PP -Currently NOT implemented\&. - -.RE - -.SS "RAP SERVICE" - -.PP -Start the specified service on the remote server\&. Not implemented yet\&. - -.RS -.Sh "Note" - -.PP -Currently NOT implemented\&. - -.RE - -.PP -Stop the specified service on the remote server\&. - -.RS -.Sh "Note" - -.PP -Currently NOT implemented\&. - -.RE - -.SS "RAP PASSWORD USER OLDPASS NEWPASS" - -.PP -Change password of \fIUSER\fR from \fIOLDPASS\fR to \fINEWPASS\fR\&. - -.SS "LOOKUP" - -.PP -Lookup the IP address of the given host with the specified type (netbios suffix)\&. The type defaults to 0x20 (workstation)\&. - -.PP -Give IP address of LDAP server of specified \fIDOMAIN\fR\&. Defaults to local domain\&. - -.PP -Give IP address of KDC for the specified \fIREALM\fR\&. Defaults to local realm\&. - -.PP -Give IP's of Domain Controllers for specified \fI DOMAIN\fR\&. Defaults to local domain\&. - -.PP -Give IP of master browser for specified \fIDOMAIN\fR or workgroup\&. Defaults to local domain\&. - -.SS "CACHE" - -.PP -Samba uses a general caching interface called 'gencache'\&. It can be controlled using 'NET CACHE'\&. - -.PP -All the timeout parameters support the suffixes: s - Secondsm - Minutesh - Hoursd - Daysw - Weeks - -.PP -Add specified key+data to the cache with the given timeout\&. - -.PP -Delete key from the cache\&. - -.PP -Update data of existing cache entry\&. - -.PP -Search for the specified pattern in the cache data\&. - -.PP -List all current items in the cache\&. - -.PP -Remove all the current items from the cache\&. - -.SS "GETLOCALSID [DOMAIN]" - -.PP -Print the SID of the specified domain, or if the parameter is omitted, the SID of the domain the local server is in\&. - -.SS "SETLOCALSID S-1-5-21-x-y-z" - -.PP -Sets domain sid for the local server to the specified SID\&. - -.SS "GROUPMAP" - -.PP -Manage the mappings between Windows group SIDs and UNIX groups\&. Parameters take the for "parameter=value"\&. Common options include: - -.TP 3 -\(bu -unixgroup - Name of the UNIX group - -.TP -\(bu -ntgroup - Name of the Windows NT group (must be resolvable to a SID - -.TP -\(bu -rid - Unsigned 32-bit integer - -.TP -\(bu -sid - Full SID in the form of "S-1-\&.\&.\&." - -.TP -\(bu -type - Type of the group; either 'domain', 'local', or 'builtin' - -.TP -\(bu -comment - Freeform text description of the group - -.LP - -.PP -Add a new group mapping entry - -.PP -net groupmap add {rid=int|sid=string} unixgroup=string [type={domain|local|builtin}] [ntgroup=string] [comment=string] - -.PP -Delete a group mapping entry - -.PP -net groupmap delete {ntgroup=string|sid=SID} - -.PP -Update en existing group entry - -.PP -net groupmap modify {ntgroup=string|sid=SID} [unixgroup=string] [comment=string] [type={domain|local} - -.PP -List existing group mapping entries - -.PP -net groupmap list [verbose] [ntgroup=string] [sid=SID] - -.SS "MAXRID" - -.PP -Prints out the highest RID currently in use on the local server (by the active 'passdb backend')\&. - -.SS "RPC INFO" - -.PP -Print information about the domain of the remote server, such as domain name, domain sid and number of users and groups\&. - -.SS "[RPC|ADS] TESTJOIN" - -.PP -Check whether participation in a domain is still valid\&. - -.SS "[RPC|ADS] CHANGETRUSTPW" - -.PP -Force change of domain trust password\&. - -.SS "RPC TRUSTDOM" - -.PP -Add a interdomain trust account for \fIDOMAIN\fR to the remote server\&. - -.PP -Remove interdomain trust account for \fIDOMAIN\fR from the remote server\&. - -.RS -.Sh "Note" - -.PP -Currently NOT implemented\&. - -.RE - -.PP -Establish a trust relationship to a trusting domain\&. Interdomain account must already be created on the remote PDC\&. - -.PP -Abandon relationship to trusted domain - -.PP -List all current interdomain trust relationships\&. - -.SS "RPC ABORTSHUTDOWN" - -.PP -Abort the shutdown of a remote server\&. - -.SS "SHUTDOWN [-t timeout] [-r] [-f] [-C message]" - -.PP -Shut down the remote server\&. - -.TP --r -Reboot after shutdown\&. - - -.TP --f -Force shutting down all applications\&. - - -.TP --t timeout -Timeout before system will be shut down\&. An interactive user of the system can use this time to cancel the shutdown\&. - - -.TP --C message -Display the specified message on the screen to announce the shutdown\&. - - -.SS "SAMDUMP" - -.PP -Print out sam database of remote server\&. You need to run this on either a BDC\&. - -.SS "VAMPIRE" - -.PP -Export users, aliases and groups from remote server to local server\&. Can only be run an a BDC\&. - -.SS "GETSID" - -.PP -Fetch domain SID and store it in the local \fIsecrets\&.tdb\fR\&. - -.SS "ADS LEAVE" - -.PP -Make the remote host leave the domain it is part of\&. - -.SS "ADS STATUS" - -.PP -Print out status of machine account of the local machine in ADS\&. Prints out quite some debug info\&. Aimed at developers, regular users should use \fBNET ADS TESTJOIN\fR\&. - -.SS "ADS PRINTER" - -.PP -Lookup info for \fIPRINTER\fR on \fISERVER\fR\&. The printer name defaults to "*", the server name defaults to the local host\&. - -.PP -Publish specified printer using ADS\&. - -.PP -Remove specified printer from ADS directory\&. - -.SS "ADS SEARCH EXPRESSION ATTRIBUTES..." - -.PP -Perform a raw LDAP search on a ADS server and dump the results\&. The expression is a standard LDAP search expression, and the attributes are a list of LDAP fields to show in the results\&. - -.PP -Example: \fBnet ads search '(objectCategory=group)' sAMAccountName\fR - -.SS "ADS DN DN (attributes)" - -.PP -Perform a raw LDAP search on a ADS server and dump the results\&. The DN standard LDAP DN, and the attributes are a list of LDAP fields to show in the result\&. - -.PP -Example: \fBnet ads dn 'CN=administrator,CN=Users,DC=my,DC=domain' SAMAccountName\fR - -.SS "WORKGROUP" - -.PP -Print out workgroup name for specified kerberos realm\&. - -.SS "HELP [COMMAND]" - -.PP -Gives usage information for the specified command\&. - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is complete for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The net manpage was written by Jelmer Vernooij\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/nmbd.8 b/docs/manpages/nmbd.8 deleted file mode 100644 index dbf6593d91d..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/nmbd.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,178 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "NMBD" 8 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -nmbd \- NetBIOS name server to provide NetBIOS over IP naming services to clients -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBnmbd\fR [-D] [-F] [-S] [-a] [-i] [-o] [-h] [-V] [-d <debug level>] [-H <lmhosts file>] [-l <log directory>] [-n <primary netbios name>] [-p <port number>] [-s <configuration file>] - -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This program is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -\fBnmbd\fR is a server that understands and can reply to NetBIOS over IP name service requests, like those produced by SMB/CIFS clients such as Windows 95/98/ME, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP and LanManager clients\&. It also participates in the browsing protocols which make up the Windows "Network Neighborhood" view\&. - -.PP -SMB/CIFS clients, when they start up, may wish to locate an SMB/CIFS server\&. That is, they wish to know what IP number a specified host is using\&. - -.PP -Amongst other services, \fBnmbd\fR will listen for such requests, and if its own NetBIOS name is specified it will respond with the IP number of the host it is running on\&. Its "own NetBIOS name" is by default the primary DNS name of the host it is running on, but this can be overridden with the \fB-n\fR option (see OPTIONS below)\&. Thus \fBnmbd\fR will reply to broadcast queries for its own name(s)\&. Additional names for \fBnmbd\fR to respond on can be set via parameters in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) configuration file\&. - -.PP -\fBnmbd\fR can also be used as a WINS (Windows Internet Name Server) server\&. What this basically means is that it will act as a WINS database server, creating a database from name registration requests that it receives and replying to queries from clients for these names\&. - -.PP -In addition, \fBnmbd\fR can act as a WINS proxy, relaying broadcast queries from clients that do not understand how to talk the WINS protocol to a WINS server\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP --D -If specified, this parameter causes \fBnmbd\fR to operate as a daemon\&. That is, it detaches itself and runs in the background, fielding requests on the appropriate port\&. By default, \fBnmbd\fR will operate as a daemon if launched from a command shell\&. nmbd can also be operated from the \fBinetd\fR meta-daemon, although this is not recommended\&. - - -.TP --F -If specified, this parameter causes the main \fBnmbd\fR process to not daemonize, i\&.e\&. double-fork and disassociate with the terminal\&. Child processes are still created as normal to service each connection request, but the main process does not exit\&. This operation mode is suitable for running \fBnmbd\fR under process supervisors such as \fBsupervise\fR and \fBsvscan\fR from Daniel J\&. Bernstein's \fBdaemontools\fR package, or the AIX process monitor\&. - - -.TP --S -If specified, this parameter causes \fBnmbd\fR to log to standard output rather than a file\&. - - -.TP --i -If this parameter is specified it causes the server to run "interactively", not as a daemon, even if the server is executed on the command line of a shell\&. Setting this parameter negates the implicit daemon mode when run from the command line\&. \fBnmbd\fR also logs to standard output, as if the \fB-S\fR parameter had been given\&. - - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.TP --H <filename> -NetBIOS lmhosts file\&. The lmhosts file is a list of NetBIOS names to IP addresses that is loaded by the nmbd server and used via the name resolution mechanism \fIname resolve order\fR described in \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) to resolve any NetBIOS name queries needed by the server\&. Note that the contents of this file are \fBNOT\fR used by \fBnmbd\fR to answer any name queries\&. Adding a line to this file affects name NetBIOS resolution from this host \fBONLY\fR\&. - - -The default path to this file is compiled into Samba as part of the build process\&. Common defaults are \fI/usr/local/samba/lib/lmhosts\fR, \fI/usr/samba/lib/lmhosts\fR or \fI/etc/samba/lmhosts\fR\&. See the \fBlmhosts\fR(5) man page for details on the contents of this file\&. - - -.TP --V -Prints the program version number\&. - - -.TP --s <configuration file> -The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&. - - -.TP --d|--debug=debuglevel -\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&. - - -The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day-to-day running - it generates a small amount of information about operations carried out\&. - - -Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&. - - -Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. - - -.TP --l|--logfile=logbasename -File name for log/debug files\&. The extension \fB"\&.client"\fR will be appended\&. The log file is never removed by the client\&. - - -.TP --p <UDP port number> -UDP port number is a positive integer value\&. This option changes the default UDP port number (normally 137) that \fBnmbd\fR responds to name queries on\&. Don't use this option unless you are an expert, in which case you won't need help! - - -.SH "FILES" - -.TP -\fI/etc/inetd\&.conf\fR -If the server is to be run by the \fBinetd\fR meta-daemon, this file must contain suitable startup information for the meta-daemon\&. - - -.TP -\fI/etc/rc\fR -or whatever initialization script your system uses)\&. - - -If running the server as a daemon at startup, this file will need to contain an appropriate startup sequence for the server\&. - - -.TP -\fI/etc/services\fR -If running the server via the meta-daemon \fBinetd\fR, this file must contain a mapping of service name (e\&.g\&., netbios-ssn) to service port (e\&.g\&., 139) and protocol type (e\&.g\&., tcp)\&. - - -.TP -\fI/usr/local/samba/lib/smb\&.conf\fR -This is the default location of the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) server configuration file\&. Other common places that systems install this file are \fI/usr/samba/lib/smb\&.conf\fR and \fI/etc/samba/smb\&.conf\fR\&. - - -When run as a WINS server (see the \fIwins support\fR parameter in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) man page), \fBnmbd\fR will store the WINS database in the file \fIwins\&.dat\fR in the \fIvar/locks\fR directory configured under wherever Samba was configured to install itself\&. - - -If \fBnmbd\fR is acting as a \fB browse master\fR (see the \fIlocal master\fR parameter in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) man page, \fBnmbd\fR will store the browsing database in the file \fIbrowse\&.dat \fR in the \fIvar/locks\fR directory configured under wherever Samba was configured to install itself\&. - - -.SH "SIGNALS" - -.PP -To shut down an \fBnmbd\fR process it is recommended that SIGKILL (-9) \fBNOT\fR be used, except as a last resort, as this may leave the name database in an inconsistent state\&. The correct way to terminate \fBnmbd\fR is to send it a SIGTERM (-15) signal and wait for it to die on its own\&. - -.PP -\fBnmbd\fR will accept SIGHUP, which will cause it to dump out its namelists into the file \fInamelist\&.debug \fR in the \fI/usr/local/samba/var/locks\fR directory (or the \fIvar/locks\fR directory configured under wherever Samba was configured to install itself)\&. This will also cause \fBnmbd\fR to dump out its server database in the \fIlog\&.nmb\fR file\&. - -.PP -The debug log level of nmbd may be raised or lowered using \fBsmbcontrol\fR(1) (SIGUSR[1|2] signals are no longer used since Samba 2\&.2)\&. This is to allow transient problems to be diagnosed, whilst still running at a normally low log level\&. - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -\fBinetd\fR(8), \fBsmbd\fR(8), \fBsmb.conf\fR(5), \fBsmbclient\fR(1), \fBtestparm\fR(1), \fBtestprns\fR(1), and the Internet RFC's \fIrfc1001\&.txt\fR, \fIrfc1002\&.txt\fR\&. In addition the CIFS (formerly SMB) specification is available as a link from the Web page http://samba\&.org/cifs/\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/nmblookup.1 b/docs/manpages/nmblookup.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 8dc68a366b2..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/nmblookup.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,185 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "NMBLOOKUP" 1 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -nmblookup \- NetBIOS over TCP/IP client used to lookup NetBIOS names -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBnmblookup\fR [-M] [-R] [-S] [-r] [-A] [-h] [-B <broadcast address>] [-U <unicast - address>] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-i <NetBIOS scope>] - [-T] [-f] {name} -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -\fBnmblookup\fR is used to query NetBIOS names and map them to IP addresses in a network using NetBIOS over TCP/IP queries\&. The options allow the name queries to be directed at a particular IP broadcast area or to a particular machine\&. All queries are done over UDP\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP --M -Searches for a master browser by looking up the NetBIOS name \fIname\fR with a type of \fB0x1d\fR\&. If \fI name\fR is "-" then it does a lookup on the special name \fB__MSBROWSE__\fR\&. Please note that in order to use the name "-", you need to make sure "-" isn't parsed as an argument, e\&.g\&. use : \fBnmblookup -M -- -\fR\&. - - -.TP --R -Set the recursion desired bit in the packet to do a recursive lookup\&. This is used when sending a name query to a machine running a WINS server and the user wishes to query the names in the WINS server\&. If this bit is unset the normal (broadcast responding) NetBIOS processing code on a machine is used instead\&. See RFC1001, RFC1002 for details\&. - - -.TP --S -Once the name query has returned an IP address then do a node status query as well\&. A node status query returns the NetBIOS names registered by a host\&. - - -.TP --r -Try and bind to UDP port 137 to send and receive UDP datagrams\&. The reason for this option is a bug in Windows 95 where it ignores the source port of the requesting packet and only replies to UDP port 137\&. Unfortunately, on most UNIX systems root privilege is needed to bind to this port, and in addition, if the \fBnmbd\fR(8) daemon is running on this machine it also binds to this port\&. - - -.TP --A -Interpret \fIname\fR as an IP Address and do a node status query on this address\&. - - -.TP --n <primary NetBIOS name> -This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself\&. This is identical to setting the \fInetbios name\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in \fIsmb\&.conf\fR\&. - - -.TP --i <scope> -This specifies a NetBIOS scope that \fBnmblookup\fR will use to communicate with when generating NetBIOS names\&. For details on the use of NetBIOS scopes, see rfc1001\&.txt and rfc1002\&.txt\&. NetBIOS scopes are \fBvery\fR rarely used, only set this parameter if you are the system administrator in charge of all the NetBIOS systems you communicate with\&. - - -.TP --W|--workgroup=domain -Set the SMB domain of the username\&. This overrides the default domain which is the domain defined in smb\&.conf\&. If the domain specified is the same as the servers NetBIOS name, it causes the client to log on using the servers local SAM (as opposed to the Domain SAM)\&. - - -.TP --O socket options -TCP socket options to set on the client socket\&. See the socket options parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR manual page for the list of valid options\&. - - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.TP --B <broadcast address> -Send the query to the given broadcast address\&. Without this option the default behavior of nmblookup is to send the query to the broadcast address of the network interfaces as either auto-detected or defined in the \fIinterfaces\fR parameter of the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file\&. - - -.TP --U <unicast address> -Do a unicast query to the specified address or host \fIunicast address\fR\&. This option (along with the \fI-R\fR option) is needed to query a WINS server\&. - - -.TP --V -Prints the program version number\&. - - -.TP --s <configuration file> -The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&. - - -.TP --d|--debug=debuglevel -\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&. - - -The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day-to-day running - it generates a small amount of information about operations carried out\&. - - -Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&. - - -Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. - - -.TP --l|--logfile=logbasename -File name for log/debug files\&. The extension \fB"\&.client"\fR will be appended\&. The log file is never removed by the client\&. - - -.TP --T -This causes any IP addresses found in the lookup to be looked up via a reverse DNS lookup into a DNS name, and printed out before each - - -\fBIP address \&.\&.\&.\&. NetBIOS name\fR - - -pair that is the normal output\&. - - -.TP --f -Show which flags apply to the name that has been looked up\&. Possible answers are zero or more of: Response, Authoritative, Truncated, Recursion_Desired, Recursion_Available, Broadcast\&. - - -.TP -name -This is the NetBIOS name being queried\&. Depending upon the previous options this may be a NetBIOS name or IP address\&. If a NetBIOS name then the different name types may be specified by appending '#<type>' to the name\&. This name may also be '*', which will return all registered names within a broadcast area\&. - - -.SH "EXAMPLES" - -.PP -\fBnmblookup\fR can be used to query a WINS server (in the same way \fBnslookup\fR is used to query DNS servers)\&. To query a WINS server, \fBnmblookup\fR must be called like this: - -.PP -\fBnmblookup -U server -R 'name'\fR - -.PP -For example, running : - -.PP -\fBnmblookup -U samba.org -R 'IRIX#1B'\fR - -.PP -would query the WINS server samba\&.org for the domain master browser (1B name type) for the IRIX workgroup\&. - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -\fBnmbd\fR(8), \fBsamba\fR(7), and \fBsmb.conf\fR(5)\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/ntlm_auth.1 b/docs/manpages/ntlm_auth.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e889634bf04..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/ntlm_auth.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,135 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "NTLM_AUTH" 1 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -ntlm_auth \- tool to allow external access to Winbind's NTLM authentication function -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBntlm_auth\fR [-d debuglevel] [-l logfile] [-s <smb config file>] -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -\fBntlm_auth\fR is a helper utility that authenticates users using NT/LM authentication\&. It returns 0 if the users is authenticated successfully and 1 if access was denied\&. ntlm_auth uses winbind to access the user and authentication data for a domain\&. This utility is only to be used by other programs (currently squid)\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP ---helper-protocol=PROTO -Operate as a stdio-based helper - - -.TP ---username=USERNAME -Specify username of user to authenticate - - -.TP ---domain=DOMAIN -Specify domain of user to authenticate - - -.TP ---workstation=WORKSTATION -Specify the workstation the user authenticated from - - -.TP ---challenge=STRING -challenge (HEX encoded) - - -.TP ---lm-response=RESPONSE -LM Response to the challenge (HEX encoded) - - -.TP ---nt-response=RESPONSE -NT or NTLMv2 Response to the challenge (HEX encoded) - - -.TP ---password=PASSWORD -User's plaintext password - - -.TP ---request-lm-key -Retreive LM session key - - -.TP ---request-nt-key -Request NT key - - -.TP --V -Prints the program version number\&. - - -.TP --s <configuration file> -The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&. - - -.TP --d|--debug=debuglevel -\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&. - - -The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day-to-day running - it generates a small amount of information about operations carried out\&. - - -Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&. - - -Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. - - -.TP --l|--logfile=logbasename -File name for log/debug files\&. The extension \fB"\&.client"\fR will be appended\&. The log file is never removed by the client\&. - - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The ntlm_auth manpage was written by Jelmer Vernooij\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/pdbedit.8 b/docs/manpages/pdbedit.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 13113cd3bb1..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/pdbedit.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,331 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "PDBEDIT" 8 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -pdbedit \- manage the SAM database -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBpdbedit\fR [-L] [-v] [-w] [-u username] [-f fullname] [-h homedir] [-D drive] [-S - script] [-p profile] [-a] [-m] [-r] [-x] [-i passdb-backend] [-e passdb-backend] - [-b passdb-backend] [-g] [-d debuglevel] [-s configfile] [-P account-policy] - [-C value] [-c account-control] -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -The pdbedit program is used to manage the users accounts stored in the sam database and can only be run by root\&. - -.PP -The pdbedit tool uses the passdb modular interface and is independent from the kind of users database used (currently there are smbpasswd, ldap, nis+ and tdb based and more can be added without changing the tool)\&. - -.PP -There are five main ways to use pdbedit: adding a user account, removing a user account, modifing a user account, listing user accounts, importing users accounts\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP --L -This option lists all the user accounts present in the users database\&. This option prints a list of user/uid pairs separated by the ':' character\&. - - -Example: \fBpdbedit -L\fR - - -.nf - -sorce:500:Simo Sorce -samba:45:Test User -.fi - - -.TP --v -This option enables the verbose listing format\&. It causes pdbedit to list the users in the database, printing out the account fields in a descriptive format\&. - - -Example: \fBpdbedit -L -v\fR - - -.nf - ---------------- -username: sorce -user ID/Group: 500/500 -user RID/GRID: 2000/2001 -Full Name: Simo Sorce -Home Directory: \\\\BERSERKER\\sorce -HomeDir Drive: H: -Logon Script: \\\\BERSERKER\\netlogon\\sorce\&.bat -Profile Path: \\\\BERSERKER\\profile ---------------- -username: samba -user ID/Group: 45/45 -user RID/GRID: 1090/1091 -Full Name: Test User -Home Directory: \\\\BERSERKER\\samba -HomeDir Drive: -Logon Script: -Profile Path: \\\\BERSERKER\\profile -.fi - - -.TP --w -This option sets the "smbpasswd" listing format\&. It will make pdbedit list the users in the database, printing out the account fields in a format compatible with the \fIsmbpasswd\fR file format\&. (see the \fBsmbpasswd\fR(5) for details) - - -Example: \fBpdbedit -L -w\fR - - -sorce:500:508818B733CE64BEAAD3B435B51404EE:D2A2418EFC466A8A0F6B1DBB5C3DB80C:[UX ]:LCT-00000000: -samba:45:0F2B255F7B67A7A9AAD3B435B51404EE:BC281CE3F53B6A5146629CD4751D3490:[UX ]:LCT-3BFA1E8D: - -.TP --u username -This option specifies the username to be used for the operation requested (listing, adding, removing)\&. It is \fBrequired\fR in add, remove and modify operations and \fBoptional\fR in list operations\&. - - -.TP --f fullname -This option can be used while adding or modifing a user account\&. It will specify the user's full name\&. - - -Example: \fB-f "Simo Sorce"\fR - - -.TP --h homedir -This option can be used while adding or modifing a user account\&. It will specify the user's home directory network path\&. - - -Example: \fB-h "\\\\BERSERKER\\sorce"\fR - - -.TP --D drive -This option can be used while adding or modifing a user account\&. It will specify the windows drive letter to be used to map the home directory\&. - - -Example: \fB-d "H:"\fR - - -.TP --S script -This option can be used while adding or modifing a user account\&. It will specify the user's logon script path\&. - - -Example: \fB-s "\\\\BERSERKER\\netlogon\\sorce.bat"\fR - - -.TP --p profile -This option can be used while adding or modifing a user account\&. It will specify the user's profile directory\&. - - -Example: \fB-p "\\\\BERSERKER\\netlogon"\fR - - -.TP --G SID|rid -This option can be used while adding or modifying a user account\&. It will specify the users' new primary group SID (Security Identifier) or rid\&. - - -Example: \fB-G S-1-5-21-2447931902-1787058256-3961074038-1201\fR - - -.TP --U SID|rid -This option can be used while adding or modifying a user account\&. It will specify the users' new SID (Security Identifier) or rid\&. - - -Example: \fB-U S-1-5-21-2447931902-1787058256-3961074038-5004\fR - - -.TP --c account-control -This option can be used while adding or modifying a user account\&. It will specify the users' account control property\&. Possible flags that can be set are: N, D, H, L, X\&. - - -Example: \fB-c "[X ]"\fR - - -.TP --a -This option is used to add a user into the database\&. This command needs a user name specified with the -u switch\&. When adding a new user, pdbedit will also ask for the password to be used\&. - - -Example: \fBpdbedit -a -u sorce\fR -.nf -new password: -retype new password -.fi - - - -.TP --r -This option is used to modify an existing user in the database\&. This command needs a user name specified with the -u switch\&. Other options can be specified to modify the properties of the specified user\&. This flag is kept for backwards compatibility, but it is no longer necessary to specify it\&. - - -.TP --m -This option may only be used in conjunction with the \fI-a\fR option\&. It will make pdbedit to add a machine trust account instead of a user account (-u username will provide the machine name)\&. - - -Example: \fBpdbedit -a -m -u w2k-wks\fR - - -.TP --x -This option causes pdbedit to delete an account from the database\&. It needs a username specified with the -u switch\&. - - -Example: \fBpdbedit -x -u bob\fR - - -.TP --i passdb-backend -Use a different passdb backend to retrieve users than the one specified in smb\&.conf\&. Can be used to import data into your local user database\&. - - -This option will ease migration from one passdb backend to another\&. - - -Example: \fBpdbedit -i smbpasswd:/etc/smbpasswd.old \fR - - -.TP --e passdb-backend -Exports all currently available users to the specified password database backend\&. - - -This option will ease migration from one passdb backend to another and will ease backing up\&. - - -Example: \fBpdbedit -e smbpasswd:/root/samba-users.backup\fR - - -.TP --g -If you specify \fI-g\fR, then \fI-i in-backend -e out-backend\fR applies to the group mapping instead of the user database\&. - - -This option will ease migration from one passdb backend to another and will ease backing up\&. - - -.TP --b passdb-backend -Use a different default passdb backend\&. - - -Example: \fBpdbedit -b xml:/root/pdb-backup.xml -l\fR - - -.TP --P account-policy -Display an account policy - - -Valid policies are: minimum password age, reset count minutes, disconnect time, user must logon to change password, password history, lockout duration, min password length, maximum password age and bad lockout attempt\&. - - -Example: \fBpdbedit -P "bad lockout attempt"\fR - - -.nf - -account policy value for bad lockout attempt is 0 -.fi - - -.TP --C account-policy-value -Sets an account policy to a specified value\&. This option may only be used in conjunction with the \fI-P\fR option\&. - - -Example: \fBpdbedit -P "bad lockout attempt" -C 3\fR - - -.nf - -account policy value for bad lockout attempt was 0 -account policy value for bad lockout attempt is now 3 -.fi - - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.TP --V -Prints the program version number\&. - - -.TP --s <configuration file> -The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&. - - -.TP --d|--debug=debuglevel -\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&. - - -The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day-to-day running - it generates a small amount of information about operations carried out\&. - - -Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&. - - -Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. - - -.TP --l|--logfile=logbasename -File name for log/debug files\&. The extension \fB"\&.client"\fR will be appended\&. The log file is never removed by the client\&. - - -.SH "NOTES" - -.PP -This command may be used only by root\&. - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -\fBsmbpasswd\fR(5), \fBsamba\fR(7) - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/profiles.1 b/docs/manpages/profiles.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 1c53c74a03a..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/profiles.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,71 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "PROFILES" 1 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -profiles \- A utility to report and change SIDs in registry files -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBprofiles\fR [-v] [-c SID] [-n SID] {file} -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -\fBprofiles\fR is a utility that reports and changes SIDs in windows registry files\&. It currently only supports NT\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP -file -Registry file to view or edit\&. - - -.TP --v,--verbose -Increases verbosity of messages\&. - - -.TP --c SID1 -n SID2 -Change all occurences of SID1 in \fIfile\fR by SID2\&. - - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The profiles man page was written by Jelmer Vernooij\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/rpcclient.1 b/docs/manpages/rpcclient.1 deleted file mode 100644 index fe8b6c2e392..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/rpcclient.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,616 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "RPCCLIENT" 1 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -rpcclient \- tool for executing client side MS-RPC functions -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBrpcclient\fR [-A authfile] [-c <command string>] [-d debuglevel] [-h] [-l logfile] - [-N] [-s <smb config file>] [-U username[%password]] [-W workgroup] - [-N] [-I destinationIP] {server} -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -\fBrpcclient\fR is a utility initially developed to test MS-RPC functionality in Samba itself\&. It has undergone several stages of development and stability\&. Many system administrators have now written scripts around it to manage Windows NT clients from their UNIX workstation\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP -server -NetBIOS name of Server to which to connect\&. The server can be any SMB/CIFS server\&. The name is resolved using the \fIname resolve order\fR line from \fBsmb.conf\fR(5)\&. - - -.TP --c|--command='command string' -execute semicolon separated commands (listed below)) - - -.TP --I IP-address -\fIIP address\fR is the address of the server to connect to\&. It should be specified in standard "a\&.b\&.c\&.d" notation\&. - - -Normally the client would attempt to locate a named SMB/CIFS server by looking it up via the NetBIOS name resolution mechanism described above in the \fIname resolve order\fR parameter above\&. Using this parameter will force the client to assume that the server is on the machine with the specified IP address and the NetBIOS name component of the resource being connected to will be ignored\&. - - -There is no default for this parameter\&. If not supplied, it will be determined automatically by the client as described above\&. - - -.TP --V -Prints the program version number\&. - - -.TP --s <configuration file> -The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&. - - -.TP --d|--debug=debuglevel -\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&. - - -The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day-to-day running - it generates a small amount of information about operations carried out\&. - - -Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&. - - -Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. - - -.TP --l|--logfile=logbasename -File name for log/debug files\&. The extension \fB"\&.client"\fR will be appended\&. The log file is never removed by the client\&. - - -.TP --N -If specified, this parameter suppresses the normal password prompt from the client to the user\&. This is useful when accessing a service that does not require a password\&. - - -Unless a password is specified on the command line or this parameter is specified, the client will request a password\&. - - -.TP --k -Try to authenticate with kerberos\&. Only useful in an Active Directory environment\&. - - -.TP --A|--authfile=filename -This option allows you to specify a file from which to read the username and password used in the connection\&. The format of the file is - - -.nf - -username = <value> -password = <value> -domain = <value> -.fi - - -Make certain that the permissions on the file restrict access from unwanted users\&. - - -.TP --U|--user=username[%password] -Sets the SMB username or username and password\&. - - -If %password is not specified, the user will be prompted\&. The client will first check the \fBUSER\fR environment variable, then the \fBLOGNAME\fR variable and if either exists, the string is uppercased\&. If these environmental variables are not found, the username \fBGUEST\fR is used\&. - - -A third option is to use a credentials file which contains the plaintext of the username and password\&. This option is mainly provided for scripts where the admin does not wish to pass the credentials on the command line or via environment variables\&. If this method is used, make certain that the permissions on the file restrict access from unwanted users\&. See the \fI-A\fR for more details\&. - - -Be cautious about including passwords in scripts\&. Also, on many systems the command line of a running process may be seen via the \fBps\fR command\&. To be safe always allow \fBrpcclient\fR to prompt for a password and type it in directly\&. - - -.TP --n <primary NetBIOS name> -This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself\&. This is identical to setting the \fInetbios name\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in \fIsmb\&.conf\fR\&. - - -.TP --i <scope> -This specifies a NetBIOS scope that \fBnmblookup\fR will use to communicate with when generating NetBIOS names\&. For details on the use of NetBIOS scopes, see rfc1001\&.txt and rfc1002\&.txt\&. NetBIOS scopes are \fBvery\fR rarely used, only set this parameter if you are the system administrator in charge of all the NetBIOS systems you communicate with\&. - - -.TP --W|--workgroup=domain -Set the SMB domain of the username\&. This overrides the default domain which is the domain defined in smb\&.conf\&. If the domain specified is the same as the servers NetBIOS name, it causes the client to log on using the servers local SAM (as opposed to the Domain SAM)\&. - - -.TP --O socket options -TCP socket options to set on the client socket\&. See the socket options parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR manual page for the list of valid options\&. - - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.SH "COMMANDS" - -.SS "LSARPC" - -.TP -lsaquery -Query info policy - - -.TP -lookupsids -Resolve a list of SIDs to usernames\&. - - -.TP -lookupnames -Resolve a list of usernames to SIDs\&. - - -.TP -enumtrusts -Enumerate trusted domains - - -.TP -enumprivs -Enumerate privileges - - -.TP -getdispname -Get the privilege name - - -.TP -lsaenumsid -Enumerate the LSA SIDS - - -.TP -lsaenumprivsaccount -Enumerate the privileges of an SID - - -.TP -lsaenumacctrights -Enumerate the rights of an SID - - -.TP -lsaenumacctwithright -Enumerate accounts with a right - - -.TP -lsaaddacctrights -Add rights to an account - - -.TP -lsaremoveacctrights -Remove rights from an account - - -.TP -lsalookupprivvalue -Get a privilege value given its name - - -.TP -lsaquerysecobj -Query LSA security object - - -.SS "LSARPC-DS" - -.TP -dsroledominfo -Get Primary Domain Information - - -.PP - - -.PP -\fBDFS\fR - -.TP -dfsexist -Query DFS support - - -.TP -dfsadd -Add a DFS share - - -.TP -dfsremove -Remove a DFS share - - -.TP -dfsgetinfo -Query DFS share info - - -.TP -dfsenum -Enumerate dfs shares - - -.SS "REG" - -.TP -shutdown -Remote Shutdown - - -.TP -abortshutdown -Abort Shutdown - - -.SS "SRVSVC" - -.TP -srvinfo -Server query info - - -.TP -netshareenum -Enumerate shares - - -.TP -netfileenum -Enumerate open files - - -.TP -netremotetod -Fetch remote time of day - - -.SS "SAMR" - -.TP -queryuser -Query user info - - -.TP -querygroup -Query group info - - -.TP -queryusergroups -Query user groups - - -.TP -querygroupmem -Query group membership - - -.TP -queryaliasmem -Query alias membership - - -.TP -querydispinfo -Query display info - - -.TP -querydominfo -Query domain info - - -.TP -enumdomusers -Enumerate domain users - - -.TP -enumdomgroups -Enumerate domain groups - - -.TP -enumalsgroups -Enumerate alias groups - - -.TP -createdomuser -Create domain user - - -.TP -samlookupnames -Look up names - - -.TP -samlookuprids -Look up names - - -.TP -deletedomuser -Delete domain user - - -.TP -samquerysecobj -Query SAMR security object - - -.TP -getdompwinfo -Retrieve domain password info - - -.TP -lookupdomain -Look up domain - - -.SS "SPOOLSS" - -.TP -adddriver <arch> <config> -Execute an AddPrinterDriver() RPC to install the printer driver information on the server\&. Note that the driver files should already exist in the directory returned by \fBgetdriverdir\fR\&. Possible values for \fIarch\fR are the same as those for the \fBgetdriverdir\fR command\&. The \fIconfig\fR parameter is defined as follows: - - -.nf - -Long Printer Name:\\ -Driver File Name:\\ -Data File Name:\\ -Config File Name:\\ -Help File Name:\\ -Language Monitor Name:\\ -Default Data Type:\\ -Comma Separated list of Files -.fi - - -Any empty fields should be enter as the string "NULL"\&. - - -Samba does not need to support the concept of Print Monitors since these only apply to local printers whose driver can make use of a bi-directional link for communication\&. This field should be "NULL"\&. On a remote NT print server, the Print Monitor for a driver must already be installed prior to adding the driver or else the RPC will fail\&. - - -.TP -addprinter <printername> <sharename> <drivername> <port> -Add a printer on the remote server\&. This printer will be automatically shared\&. Be aware that the printer driver must already be installed on the server (see \fBadddriver\fR) and the \fIport\fRmust be a valid port name (see \fBenumports\fR\&. - - -.TP -deldriver -Delete the specified printer driver for all architectures\&. This does not delete the actual driver files from the server, only the entry from the server's list of drivers\&. - - -.TP -enumdata -Enumerate all printer setting data stored on the server\&. On Windows NT clients, these values are stored in the registry, while Samba servers store them in the printers TDB\&. This command corresponds to the MS Platform SDK GetPrinterData() function (* This command is currently unimplemented)\&. - - -.TP -enumdataex -Enumerate printer data for a key - - -.TP -enumjobs <printer> -List the jobs and status of a given printer\&. This command corresponds to the MS Platform SDK EnumJobs() function - - -.TP -enumkey -Enumerate printer keys - - -.TP -enumports [level] -Executes an EnumPorts() call using the specified info level\&. Currently only info levels 1 and 2 are supported\&. - - -.TP -enumdrivers [level] -Execute an EnumPrinterDrivers() call\&. This lists the various installed printer drivers for all architectures\&. Refer to the MS Platform SDK documentation for more details of the various flags and calling options\&. Currently supported info levels are 1, 2, and 3\&. - - -.TP -enumprinters [level] -Execute an EnumPrinters() call\&. This lists the various installed and share printers\&. Refer to the MS Platform SDK documentation for more details of the various flags and calling options\&. Currently supported info levels are 1, 2 and 5\&. - - -.TP -getdata <printername> <valuename;> -Retrieve the data for a given printer setting\&. See the \fBenumdata\fR command for more information\&. This command corresponds to the GetPrinterData() MS Platform SDK function\&. - - -.TP -getdataex -Get printer driver data with keyname - - -.TP -getdriver <printername> -Retrieve the printer driver information (such as driver file, config file, dependent files, etc\&.\&.\&.) for the given printer\&. This command corresponds to the GetPrinterDriver() MS Platform SDK function\&. Currently info level 1, 2, and 3 are supported\&. - - -.TP -getdriverdir <arch> -Execute a GetPrinterDriverDirectory() RPC to retrieve the SMB share name and subdirectory for storing printer driver files for a given architecture\&. Possible values for \fIarch\fR are "Windows 4\&.0" (for Windows 95/98), "Windows NT x86", "Windows NT PowerPC", "Windows Alpha_AXP", and "Windows NT R4000"\&. - - -.TP -getprinter <printername> -Retrieve the current printer information\&. This command corresponds to the GetPrinter() MS Platform SDK function\&. - - -.TP -getprintprocdir -Get print processor directory - - -.TP -openprinter <printername> -Execute an OpenPrinterEx() and ClosePrinter() RPC against a given printer\&. - - -.TP -setdriver <printername> <drivername> -Execute a SetPrinter() command to update the printer driver associated with an installed printer\&. The printer driver must already be correctly installed on the print server\&. - - -See also the \fBenumprinters\fR and \fBenumdrivers\fR commands for obtaining a list of of installed printers and drivers\&. - - -.TP -addform -Add form - - -.TP -setform -Set form - - -.TP -getform -Get form - - -.TP -deleteform -Delete form - - -.TP -enumforms -Enumerate form - - -.TP -setprinter -Set printer comment - - -.TP -setprinterdata -Set REG_SZ printer data - - -.TP -rffpcnex -Rffpcnex test - - -.SS "NETLOGON" - -.TP -logonctrl2 -Logon Control 2 - - -.TP -logonctrl -Logon Control - - -.TP -samsync -Sam Synchronisation - - -.TP -samdeltas -Query Sam Deltas - - -.TP -samlogon -Sam Logon - - -.SS "GENERAL COMMANDS" - -.TP -debuglevel -Set the current debug level used to log information\&. - - -.TP -help (?) -Print a listing of all known commands or extended help on a particular command\&. - - -.TP -quit (exit) -Exit \fBrpcclient \fR\&. - - -.SH "BUGS" - -.PP -\fBrpcclient\fR is designed as a developer testing tool and may not be robust in certain areas (such as command line parsing)\&. It has been known to generate a core dump upon failures when invalid parameters where passed to the interpreter\&. - -.PP -From Luke Leighton's original rpcclient man page: - -.PP -\fBWARNING!\fR The MSRPC over SMB code has been developed from examining Network traces\&. No documentation is available from the original creators (Microsoft) on how MSRPC over SMB works, or how the individual MSRPC services work\&. Microsoft's implementation of these services has been demonstrated (and reported) to be\&.\&.\&. a bit flaky in places\&. - -.PP -The development of Samba's implementation is also a bit rough, and as more of the services are understood, it can even result in versions of \fBsmbd\fR(8) and \fBrpcclient\fR(1) that are incompatible for some commands or services\&. Additionally, the developers are sending reports to Microsoft, and problems found or reported to Microsoft are fixed in Service Packs, which may result in incompatibilities\&. - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The original rpcclient man page was written by Matthew Geddes, Luke Kenneth Casson Leighton, and rewritten by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/samba.7 b/docs/manpages/samba.7 deleted file mode 100644 index 3fddca285d2..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/samba.7 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,226 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "SAMBA" 7 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -samba \- A Windows SMB/CIFS fileserver for UNIX -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBSamba\fR -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -The Samba software suite is a collection of programs that implements the Server Message Block (commonly abbreviated as SMB) protocol for UNIX systems\&. This protocol is sometimes also referred to as the Common Internet File System (CIFS)\&. For a more thorough description, see http://www\&.ubiqx\&.org/cifs/\&. Samba also implements the NetBIOS protocol in nmbd\&. - -.TP -\fBsmbd\fR(8) -The \fBsmbd\fR daemon provides the file and print services to SMB clients, such as Windows 95/98, Windows NT, Windows for Workgroups or LanManager\&. The configuration file for this daemon is described in \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) - - -.TP -\fBnmbd\fR(8) -The \fBnmbd\fR daemon provides NetBIOS nameservice and browsing support\&. The configuration file for this daemon is described in \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) - - -.TP -\fBsmbclient\fR(1) -The \fBsmbclient\fR program implements a simple ftp-like client\&. This is useful for accessing SMB shares on other compatible servers (such as Windows NT), and can also be used to allow a UNIX box to print to a printer attached to any SMB server (such as a PC running Windows NT)\&. - - -.TP -\fBtestparm\fR(1) -The \fBtestparm\fR utility is a simple syntax checker for Samba's \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) configuration file\&. - - -.TP -\fBtestprns\fR(1) -The \fBtestprns\fR utility supports testing printer names defined in your \fIprintcap\fR file used by Samba\&. - - -.TP -\fBsmbstatus\fR(1) -The \fBsmbstatus\fR tool provides access to information about the current connections to \fBsmbd\fR\&. - - -.TP -\fBnmblookup\fR(1) -The \fBnmblookup\fR tools allows NetBIOS name queries to be made from a UNIX host\&. - - -.TP -\fBsmbgroupedit\fR(8) -The \fBsmbgroupedit\fR tool allows for mapping unix groups to NT Builtin, Domain, or Local groups\&. Also it allows setting priviledges for that group, such as saAddUser, etc\&. - - -.TP -\fBsmbpasswd\fR(8) -The \fBsmbpasswd\fR command is a tool for changing LanMan and Windows NT password hashes on Samba and Windows NT servers\&. - - -.TP -\fBsmbcacls\fR(1) -The \fBsmbcacls\fR command is a tool to set ACL's on remote CIFS servers\&. - - -.TP -\fBsmbsh\fR(1) -The \fBsmbsh\fR command is a program that allows you to run a unix shell with with an overloaded VFS\&. - - -.TP -\fBsmbtree\fR(1) -The \fBsmbtree\fR command is a text-based network neighborhood tool\&. - - -.TP -\fBsmbtar\fR(1) -The \fBsmbtar\fR can make backups of data on CIFS/SMB servers\&. - - -.TP -\fBsmbspool\fR(8) -\fBsmbspool\fR is a helper utility for printing on printers connected to CIFS servers\&. - - -.TP -\fBsmbcontrol\fR(1) -\fBsmbcontrol\fR is a utility that can change the behaviour of running samba daemons\&. - - -.TP -\fBrpcclient\fR(1) -\fBrpcclient\fR is a utility that can be used to execute RPC commands on remote CIFS servers\&. - - -.TP -\fBpdbedit\fR(8) -The \fBpdbedit\fR command can be used to maintain the local user database on a samba server\&. - - -.TP -\fBfindsmb\fR(1) -The \fBfindsmb\fR command can be used to find SMB servers on the local network\&. - - -.TP -\fBnet\fR(8) -The \fBnet\fR command is supposed to work similar to the DOS/Windows NET\&.EXE command\&. - - -.TP -\fBswat\fR(8) -\fBswat\fR is a web-based interface to configuring \fIsmb\&.conf\fR\&. - - -.TP -\fBwinbindd\fR(8) -\fBwinbindd\fR is a daemon that is used for integrating authentication and the user database into unix\&. - - -.TP -\fBwbinfo\fR(1) -\fBwbinfo\fR is a utility that retrieves and stores information related to winbind\&. - - -.TP -\fBeditreg\fR(1) -\fBeditreg\fR is a command-line utility that can edit windows registry files\&. - - -.TP -\fBprofiles\fR(1) -\fBprofiles\fR is a command-line utility that can be used to replace all occurences of a certain SID with another SID\&. - - -.TP -\fBlog2pcap\fR(1) -\fBlog2pcap\fR is a utility for generating pcap trace files from Samba log files\&. - - -.TP -\fBvfstest\fR(1) -\fBvfstest\fR is a utility that can be used to test vfs modules\&. - - -.TP -\fBntlm_auth\fR(1) -\fBntlm_auth\fR is a helper-utility for external programs wanting to do NTLM-authentication\&. - - -.TP -\fBsmbmount\fR(8), \fBsmbumount\fR(8), \fBsmbmount\fR(8) -\fBsmbmount\fR,\fBsmbmnt\fR and \fBsmbmnt\fR are commands that can be used to mount CIFS/SMB shares on Linux\&. - - -.TP -\fBsmbcquotas\fR(1) -\fBsmbcquotas\fR is a tool that can set remote QUOTA's on server with NTFS 5\&. - - -.SH "COMPONENTS" - -.PP -The Samba suite is made up of several components\&. Each component is described in a separate manual page\&. It is strongly recommended that you read the documentation that comes with Samba and the manual pages of those components that you use\&. If the manual pages and documents aren't clear enough then please visithttp://devel\&.samba\&.org for information on how to file a bug report or submit a patch\&. - -.PP -If you require help, visit the Samba webpage athttp://www\&.samba\&.org/ and explore the many option available to you\&. - -.SH "AVAILABILITY" - -.PP -The Samba software suite is licensed under the GNU Public License(GPL)\&. A copy of that license should have come with the package in the file COPYING\&. You are encouraged to distribute copies of the Samba suite, but please obey the terms of this license\&. - -.PP -The latest version of the Samba suite can be obtained via anonymous ftp from samba\&.org in the directory pub/samba/\&. It is also available on several mirror sites worldwide\&. - -.PP -You may also find useful information about Samba on the newsgroup comp\&.protocol\&.smb and the Samba mailing list\&. Details on how to join the mailing list are given in the README file that comes with Samba\&. - -.PP -If you have access to a WWW viewer (such as Mozilla or Konqueror) then you will also find lots of useful information, including back issues of the Samba mailing list, athttp://lists\&.samba\&.org\&. - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "CONTRIBUTIONS" - -.PP -If you wish to contribute to the Samba project, then I suggest you join the Samba mailing list athttp://lists\&.samba\&.org\&. - -.PP -If you have patches to submit, visithttp://devel\&.samba\&.org/ for information on how to do it properly\&. We prefer patches in \fBdiff -u\fR format\&. - -.SH "CONTRIBUTORS" - -.PP -Contributors to the project are now too numerous to mention here but all deserve the thanks of all Samba users\&. To see a full list, look at the\fIchange-log\fR in the source package for the pre-CVS changes and at http://cvs\&.samba\&.org/ for the contributors to Samba post-CVS\&. CVS is the Open Source source code control system used by the Samba Team to develop Samba\&. The project would have been unmanageable without it\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/smb.conf.5 b/docs/manpages/smb.conf.5 deleted file mode 100644 index 0ed82400aac..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/smb.conf.5 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,6939 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "SMB.CONF" 5 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -smb.conf \- The configuration file for the Samba suite -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.PP -The \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file is a configuration file for the Samba suite\&. \fIsmb\&.conf\fR contains runtime configuration information for the Samba programs\&. The \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file is designed to be configured and administered by the \fBswat\fR(8) program\&. The complete description of the file format and possible parameters held within are here for reference purposes\&. - -.SH "FILE FORMAT" - -.PP -The file consists of sections and parameters\&. A section begins with the name of the section in square brackets and continues until the next section begins\&. Sections contain parameters of the form - -.PP -\fIname\fR = \fIvalue \fR - -.PP -The file is line-based - that is, each newline-terminated line represents either a comment, a section name or a parameter\&. - -.PP -Section and parameter names are not case sensitive\&. - -.PP -Only the first equals sign in a parameter is significant\&. Whitespace before or after the first equals sign is discarded\&. Leading, trailing and internal whitespace in section and parameter names is irrelevant\&. Leading and trailing whitespace in a parameter value is discarded\&. Internal whitespace within a parameter value is retained verbatim\&. - -.PP -Any line beginning with a semicolon (';') or a hash ('#') character is ignored, as are lines containing only whitespace\&. - -.PP -Any line ending in a '\\' is continued on the next line in the customary UNIX fashion\&. - -.PP -The values following the equals sign in parameters are all either a string (no quotes needed) or a boolean, which may be given as yes/no, 0/1 or true/false\&. Case is not significant in boolean values, but is preserved in string values\&. Some items such as create modes are numeric\&. - -.SH "SECTION DESCRIPTIONS" - -.PP -Each section in the configuration file (except for the [global] section) describes a shared resource (known as a "share")\&. The section name is the name of the shared resource and the parameters within the section define the shares attributes\&. - -.PP -There are three special sections, [global], [homes] and [printers], which are described under \fBspecial sections\fR\&. The following notes apply to ordinary section descriptions\&. - -.PP -A share consists of a directory to which access is being given plus a description of the access rights which are granted to the user of the service\&. Some housekeeping options are also specifiable\&. - -.PP -Sections are either file share services (used by the client as an extension of their native file systems) or printable services (used by the client to access print services on the host running the server)\&. - -.PP -Sections may be designated \fBguest\fR services, in which case no password is required to access them\&. A specified UNIX \fBguest account\fR is used to define access privileges in this case\&. - -.PP -Sections other than guest services will require a password to access them\&. The client provides the username\&. As older clients only provide passwords and not usernames, you may specify a list of usernames to check against the password using the "user =" option in the share definition\&. For modern clients such as Windows 95/98/ME/NT/2000, this should not be necessary\&. - -.PP -Note that the access rights granted by the server are masked by the access rights granted to the specified or guest UNIX user by the host system\&. The server does not grant more access than the host system grants\&. - -.PP -The following sample section defines a file space share\&. The user has write access to the path \fI/home/bar\fR\&. The share is accessed via the share name "foo": -.nf - - -[foo] - path = /home/bar - read only = no - -.fi - -.PP -The following sample section defines a printable share\&. The share is readonly, but printable\&. That is, the only write access permitted is via calls to open, write to and close a spool file\&. The \fBguest ok\fR parameter means access will be permitted as the default guest user (specified elsewhere): -.nf - - -[aprinter] - path = /usr/spool/public - read only = yes - printable = yes - guest ok = yes - -.fi - -.SH "SPECIAL SECTIONS" - -.SS "The [global] section" - -.PP -parameters in this section apply to the server as a whole, or are defaults for sections which do not specifically define certain items\&. See the notes under PARAMETERS for more information\&. - -.SS "The [homes] section" - -.PP -If a section called homes is included in the configuration file, services connecting clients to their home directories can be created on the fly by the server\&. - -.PP -When the connection request is made, the existing sections are scanned\&. If a match is found, it is used\&. If no match is found, the requested section name is treated as a user name and looked up in the local password file\&. If the name exists and the correct password has been given, a share is created by cloning the [homes] section\&. - -.PP -Some modifications are then made to the newly created share: - -.TP 3 -\(bu -The share name is changed from homes to the located username\&. - -.TP -\(bu -If no path was given, the path is set to the user's home directory\&. - -.LP - -.PP -If you decide to use a \fBpath =\fR line in your [homes] section then you may find it useful to use the %S macro\&. For example : - -.PP -\fBpath = /data/pchome/%S\fR - -.PP -would be useful if you have different home directories for your PCs than for UNIX access\&. - -.PP -This is a fast and simple way to give a large number of clients access to their home directories with a minimum of fuss\&. - -.PP -A similar process occurs if the requested section name is "homes", except that the share name is not changed to that of the requesting user\&. This method of using the [homes] section works well if different users share a client PC\&. - -.PP -The [homes] section can specify all the parameters a normal service section can specify, though some make more sense than others\&. The following is a typical and suitable [homes] section: -.nf - - -[homes] - read only = no - -.fi - -.PP -An important point is that if guest access is specified in the [homes] section, all home directories will be visible to all clients \fBwithout a password\fR\&. In the very unlikely event that this is actually desirable, it would be wise to also specify \fBread only access\fR\&. - -.PP -Note that the \fBbrowseable\fR flag for auto home directories will be inherited from the global browseable flag, not the [homes] browseable flag\&. This is useful as it means setting \fBbrowseable = no\fR in the [homes] section will hide the [homes] share but make any auto home directories visible\&. - -.SS "The [printers] section" - -.PP -This section works like [homes], but for printers\&. - -.PP -If a [printers] section occurs in the configuration file, users are able to connect to any printer specified in the local host's printcap file\&. - -.PP -When a connection request is made, the existing sections are scanned\&. If a match is found, it is used\&. If no match is found, but a [homes] section exists, it is used as described above\&. Otherwise, the requested section name is treated as a printer name and the appropriate printcap file is scanned to see if the requested section name is a valid printer share name\&. If a match is found, a new printer share is created by cloning the [printers] section\&. - -.PP -A few modifications are then made to the newly created share: - -.TP 3 -\(bu -The share name is set to the located printer name - -.TP -\(bu -If no printer name was given, the printer name is set to the located printer name - -.TP -\(bu -If the share does not permit guest access and no username was given, the username is set to the located printer name\&. - -.LP - -.PP -Note that the [printers] service MUST be printable - if you specify otherwise, the server will refuse to load the configuration file\&. - -.PP -Typically the path specified would be that of a world-writeable spool directory with the sticky bit set on it\&. A typical [printers] entry would look like this: -.nf - -[printers] - path = /usr/spool/public - guest ok = yes - printable = yes -.fi - -.PP -All aliases given for a printer in the printcap file are legitimate printer names as far as the server is concerned\&. If your printing subsystem doesn't work like that, you will have to set up a pseudo-printcap\&. This is a file consisting of one or more lines like this: -.nf - - -alias|alias|alias|alias\&.\&.\&. - -.fi - -.PP -Each alias should be an acceptable printer name for your printing subsystem\&. In the [global] section, specify the new file as your printcap\&. The server will then only recognize names found in your pseudo-printcap, which of course can contain whatever aliases you like\&. The same technique could be used simply to limit access to a subset of your local printers\&. - -.PP -An alias, by the way, is defined as any component of the first entry of a printcap record\&. Records are separated by newlines, components (if there are more than one) are separated by vertical bar symbols ('|')\&. - -.RS -.Sh "Note" - -.PP -On SYSV systems which use lpstat to determine what printers are defined on the system you may be able to use "printcap name = lpstat" to automatically obtain a list of printers\&. See the "printcap name" option for more details\&. - -.RE - -.SH "PARAMETERS" - -.PP -parameters define the specific attributes of sections\&. - -.PP -Some parameters are specific to the [global] section (e\&.g\&., \fBsecurity\fR)\&. Some parameters are usable in all sections (e\&.g\&., \fBcreate mode\fR)\&. All others are permissible only in normal sections\&. For the purposes of the following descriptions the [homes] and [printers] sections will be considered normal\&. The letter \fBG\fR in parentheses indicates that a parameter is specific to the [global] section\&. The letter \fBS\fR indicates that a parameter can be specified in a service specific section\&. Note that all \fBS\fR parameters can also be specified in the [global] section - in which case they will define the default behavior for all services\&. - -.PP -parameters are arranged here in alphabetical order - this may not create best bedfellows, but at least you can find them! Where there are synonyms, the preferred synonym is described, others refer to the preferred synonym\&. - -.SH "VARIABLE SUBSTITUTIONS" - -.PP -Many of the strings that are settable in the config file can take substitutions\&. For example the option "path = /tmp/%u" would be interpreted as "path = /tmp/john" if the user connected with the username john\&. - -.PP -These substitutions are mostly noted in the descriptions below, but there are some general substitutions which apply whenever they might be relevant\&. These are: - -.TP -%U -session user name (the user name that the client wanted, not necessarily the same as the one they got)\&. - - -.TP -%G -primary group name of %U\&. - - -.TP -%h -the Internet hostname that Samba is running on\&. - - -.TP -%m -the NetBIOS name of the client machine (very useful)\&. - - -.TP -%L -the NetBIOS name of the server\&. This allows you to change your config based on what the client calls you\&. Your server can have a "dual personality"\&. - - -Note that this parameter is not available when Samba listens on port 445, as clients no longer send this information - - -.TP -%M -the Internet name of the client machine\&. - - -.TP -%R -the selected protocol level after protocol negotiation\&. It can be one of CORE, COREPLUS, LANMAN1, LANMAN2 or NT1\&. - - -.TP -%d -The process id of the current server process\&. - - -.TP -%a -the architecture of the remote machine\&. Only some are recognized, and those may not be 100% reliable\&. It currently recognizes Samba, WfWg, Win95, WinNT and Win2k\&. Anything else will be known as "UNKNOWN"\&. If it gets it wrong then sending a level 3 log to samba@samba\&.org should allow it to be fixed\&. - - -.TP -%I -The IP address of the client machine\&. - - -.TP -%T -the current date and time\&. - - -.TP -%D -Name of the domain or workgroup of the current user\&. - - -.TP -%$(\fIenvvar\fR) -The value of the environment variable \fIenvar\fR\&. - - -.PP -The following substitutes apply only to some configuration options(only those that are used when a connection has been established): - -.TP -%S -the name of the current service, if any\&. - - -.TP -%P -the root directory of the current service, if any\&. - - -.TP -%u -user name of the current service, if any\&. - - -.TP -%g -primary group name of %u\&. - - -.TP -%H -the home directory of the user given by %u\&. - - -.TP -%N -the name of your NIS home directory server\&. This is obtained from your NIS auto\&.map entry\&. If you have not compiled Samba with the \fB--with-automount\fR option then this value will be the same as %L\&. - - -.TP -%p -the path of the service's home directory, obtained from your NIS auto\&.map entry\&. The NIS auto\&.map entry is split up as "%N:%p"\&. - - -.PP -There are some quite creative things that can be done with these substitutions and other smb\&.conf options\&. - -.SH "NAME MANGLING" - -.PP -Samba supports "name mangling" so that DOS and Windows clients can use files that don't conform to the 8\&.3 format\&. It can also be set to adjust the case of 8\&.3 format filenames\&. - -.PP -There are several options that control the way mangling is performed, and they are grouped here rather than listed separately\&. For the defaults look at the output of the testparm program\&. - -.PP -All of these options can be set separately for each service (or globally, of course)\&. - -.PP -The options are: - -.TP -mangle case = yes/no -controls if names that have characters that aren't of the "default" case are mangled\&. For example, if this is yes then a name like "Mail" would be mangled\&. Default \fBno\fR\&. - - -.TP -case sensitive = yes/no -controls whether filenames are case sensitive\&. If they aren't then Samba must do a filename search and match on passed names\&. Default \fBno\fR\&. - - -.TP -default case = upper/lower -controls what the default case is for new filenames\&. Default \fBlower\fR\&. - - -.TP -preserve case = yes/no -controls if new files are created with the case that the client passes, or if they are forced to be the "default" case\&. Default \fByes\fR\&. - - -.TP -short preserve case = yes/no -controls if new files which conform to 8\&.3 syntax, that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are created upper case, or if they are forced to be the "default" case\&. This option can be use with "preserve case = yes" to permit long filenames to retain their case, while short names are lowercased\&. Default \fByes\fR\&. - - -.PP -By default, Samba 3\&.0 has the same semantics as a Windows NT server, in that it is case insensitive but case preserving\&. - -.SH "NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION" - -.PP -There are a number of ways in which a user can connect to a service\&. The server uses the following steps in determining if it will allow a connection to a specified service\&. If all the steps fail, then the connection request is rejected\&. However, if one of the steps succeeds, then the following steps are not checked\&. - -.PP -If the service is marked "guest only = yes" and the server is running with share-level security ("security = share") then steps 1 to 5 are skipped\&. - -.TP 3 -1. -If the client has passed a username/password pair and that username/password pair is validated by the UNIX system's password programs then the connection is made as that username\&. Note that this includes the \\\\server\\service%\fIusername\fR method of passing a username\&. - -.TP -2. -If the client has previously registered a username with the system and now supplies a correct password for that username then the connection is allowed\&. - -.TP -3. -The client's NetBIOS name and any previously used user names are checked against the supplied password, if they match then the connection is allowed as the corresponding user\&. - -.TP -4. -If the client has previously validated a username/password pair with the server and the client has passed the validation token then that username is used\&. - -.TP -5. -If a "user = " field is given in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file for the service and the client has supplied a password, and that password matches (according to the UNIX system's password checking) with one of the usernames from the "user =" field then the connection is made as the username in the "user =" line\&. If one of the username in the "user =" list begins with a '@' then that name expands to a list of names in the group of the same name\&. - -.TP -6. -If the service is a guest service then a connection is made as the username given in the "guest account =" for the service, irrespective of the supplied password\&. - -.LP - -.SH "COMPLETE LIST OF GLOBAL PARAMETERS" - -.PP -Here is a list of all global parameters\&. See the section of each parameter for details\&. Note that some are synonyms\&. - -.TP 3 -\(bu -\fIabort shutdown script\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIadd group script\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIadd machine script\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIaddprinter command\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIadd share command\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIadd user script\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIadd user to group script\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIafs username map\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIalgorithmic rid base\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIallow trusted domains\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIannounce as\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIannounce version\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIauth methods\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIauto services\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIbind interfaces only\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIbrowse list\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIchange notify timeout\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIchange share command\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIclient lanman auth\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIclient ntlmv2 auth\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIclient plaintext auth\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIclient schannel\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIclient signing\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIclient use spnego\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIconfig file\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdeadtime\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdebug hires timestamp\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdebuglevel\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdebug pid\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdebug timestamp\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdebug uid\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdefault\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdefault service\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdelete group script\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdeleteprinter command\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdelete share command\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdelete user from group script\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdelete user script\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdfree command\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdisable netbios\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdisable spoolss\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdisplay charset\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdns proxy\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdomain logons\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdomain master\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdos charset\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIenable rid algorithm\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIencrypt passwords\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIenhanced browsing\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIenumports command\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIget quota command\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIgetwd cache\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIguest account\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIhide local users\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIhomedir map\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIhost msdfs\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIhostname lookups\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIhosts equiv\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIidmap backend\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIidmap gid\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIidmap uid\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIinclude\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIinterfaces\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIkeepalive\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIkernel change notify\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIkernel oplocks\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlanman auth\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlarge readwrite\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIldap admin dn\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIldap delete dn\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIldap filter\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIldap group suffix\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIldap idmap suffix\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIldap machine suffix\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIldap passwd sync\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIldap port\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIldap server\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIldap ssl\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIldap suffix\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIldap user suffix\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlm announce\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlm interval\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIload printers\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlocal master\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlock dir\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlock directory\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlock spin count\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlock spin time\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlog file\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlog level\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlogon drive\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlogon home\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlogon path\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlogon script\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlpq cache time\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImachine password timeout\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImangled stack\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImangle prefix\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImangling method\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImap to guest\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImax disk size\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImax log size\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImax mux\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImax open files\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImax protocol\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImax smbd processes\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImax ttl\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImax wins ttl\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImax xmit\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImessage command\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImin passwd length\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImin password length\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImin protocol\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImin wins ttl\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIname cache timeout\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIname resolve order\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fInetbios aliases\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fInetbios name\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fInetbios scope\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fInis homedir\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIntlm auth\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fInt pipe support\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fInt status support\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fInull passwords\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIobey pam restrictions\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIoplock break wait time\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIos2 driver map\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIos level\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIpam password change\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIpanic action\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIparanoid server security\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIpassdb backend\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIpasswd chat\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIpasswd chat debug\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIpasswd program\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIpassword level\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIpassword server\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIpid directory\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIprefered master\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIpreferred master\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIpreload\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIpreload modules\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIprintcap\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIprivate dir\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIprotocol\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIread bmpx\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIread raw\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIread size\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIrealm\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIremote announce\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIremote browse sync\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIrestrict anonymous\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIroot\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIroot dir\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIroot directory\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIsecurity\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIserver schannel\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIserver signing\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIserver string\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIset primary group script\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIset quota command\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIshow add printer wizard\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIshutdown script\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIsmb passwd file\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIsmb ports\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIsocket address\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIsocket options\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIsource environment\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIstat cache\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIsyslog\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIsyslog only\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fItemplate homedir\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fItemplate primary group\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fItemplate shell\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fItime offset\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fItime server\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fItimestamp logs\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIunicode\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIunix charset\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIunix extensions\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIunix password sync\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIupdate encrypted\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIuse mmap\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIusername level\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIusername map\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIuse spnego\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIutmp\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIutmp directory\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwinbind cache time\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwinbind enable local accounts\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwinbind enum groups\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwinbind enum users\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwinbind gid\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwinbind separator\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwinbind trusted domains only\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwinbind uid\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwinbind use default domain\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwins hook\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwins partners\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwins proxy\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwins server\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwins support\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIworkgroup\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwrite raw\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwtmp directory\fR - -.LP - -.SH "COMPLETE LIST OF SERVICE PARAMETERS" - -.PP -Here is a list of all service parameters\&. See the section on each parameter for details\&. Note that some are synonyms\&. - -.TP 3 -\(bu -\fIacl compatibility\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIadmin users\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIafs share\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIallow hosts\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIavailable\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIblocking locks\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIblock size\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIbrowsable\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIbrowseable\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIcase sensitive\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIcasesignames\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIcomment\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIcopy\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIcreate mask\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIcreate mode\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIcsc policy\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdefault case\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdefault devmode\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdelete readonly\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdelete veto files\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdeny hosts\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdirectory\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdirectory mask\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdirectory mode\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdirectory security mask\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdont descend\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdos filemode\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdos filetime resolution\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIdos filetimes\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIexec\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIfake directory create times\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIfake oplocks\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIfollow symlinks\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIforce create mode\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIforce directory mode\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIforce directory security mode\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIforce group\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIforce security mode\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIforce user\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIfstype\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIgroup\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIguest account\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIguest ok\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIguest only\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIhide dot files\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIhide files\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIhide special files\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIhide unreadable\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIhide unwriteable files\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIhosts allow\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIhosts deny\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIinherit acls\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIinherit permissions\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIinvalid users\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlevel2 oplocks\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlocking\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlppause command\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlpq command\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlpresume command\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIlprm command\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImagic output\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImagic script\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImangle case\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImangled map\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImangled names\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImangling char\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImap acl inherit\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImap archive\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImap hidden\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImap system\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImax connections\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImax print jobs\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImax reported print jobs\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImin print space\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImsdfs proxy\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fImsdfs root\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fInt acl support\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIonly guest\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIonly user\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIoplock contention limit\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIoplocks\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIpath\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIposix locking\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIpostexec\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIpreexec\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIpreexec close\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIpreserve case\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIprintable\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIprintcap name\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIprint command\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIprinter\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIprinter admin\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIprinter name\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIprinting\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIprint ok\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIprofile acls\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIpublic\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIqueuepause command\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIqueueresume command\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIread list\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIread only\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIroot postexec\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIroot preexec\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIroot preexec close\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIsecurity mask\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIset directory\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIshare modes\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIshort preserve case\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIstrict allocate\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIstrict locking\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIstrict sync\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIsync always\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIuse client driver\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIuser\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIusername\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIusers\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIuse sendfile\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fI-valid\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIvalid users\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIveto files\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIveto oplock files\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIvfs object\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIvfs objects\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIvolume\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwide links\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwritable\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwriteable\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwrite cache size\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwrite list\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwrite ok\fR - -.LP - -.SH "EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER" - -.TP -abort shutdown script (G) -\fBThis parameter only exists in the HEAD cvs branch\fR This a full path name to a script called by \fBsmbd\fR(8) that should stop a shutdown procedure issued by the \fIshutdown script\fR\&. - - -This command will be run as user\&. - - -Default: \fBNone\fR\&. - - -Example: \fBabort shutdown script = /sbin/shutdown -c\fR - - -.TP -acl compatibility (S) -This parameter specifies what OS ACL semantics should be compatible with\&. Possible values are \fBwinnt\fR for Windows NT 4, \fBwin2k\fR for Windows 2000 and above and \fBauto\fR\&. If you specify \fBauto\fR, the value for this parameter will be based upon the version of the client\&. There should be no reason to change this parameter from the default\&. - - -Default: \fBacl compatibility = Auto\fR - - -Example: \fBacl compatibility = win2k\fR - - -.TP -add group script (G) -This is the full pathname to a script that will be run \fBAS ROOT\fR by \fBsmbd\fR(8) when a new group is requested\&. It will expand any \fI%g\fR to the group name passed\&. This script is only useful for installations using the Windows NT domain administration tools\&. The script is free to create a group with an arbitrary name to circumvent unix group name restrictions\&. In that case the script must print the numeric gid of the created group on stdout\&. - - -.TP -add machine script (G) -This is the full pathname to a script that will be run by \fBsmbd\fR(8) when a machine is added to it's domain using the administrator username and password method\&. - - -This option is only required when using sam back-ends tied to the Unix uid method of RID calculation such as smbpasswd\&. This option is only available in Samba 3\&.0\&. - - -Default: \fBadd machine script = <empty string>\fR - - -Example: \fBadd machine script = /usr/sbin/adduser -n -g machines -c Machine -d /dev/null -s /bin/false %u\fR - - -.TP -addprinter command (G) -With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2\&.2, The MS Add Printer Wizard (APW) icon is now also available in the "Printers\&.\&.\&." folder displayed a share listing\&. The APW allows for printers to be add remotely to a Samba or Windows NT/2000 print server\&. - - -For a Samba host this means that the printer must be physically added to the underlying printing system\&. The \fIadd printer command\fR defines a script to be run which will perform the necessary operations for adding the printer to the print system and to add the appropriate service definition to the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file in order that it can be shared by \fBsmbd\fR(8)\&. - - -The \fIaddprinter command\fR is automatically invoked with the following parameter (in order): - - -\fIprinter name\fR - -\fIshare name\fR - -\fIport name\fR - -\fIdriver name\fR - -\fIlocation\fR - -\fIWindows 9x driver location\fR - -All parameters are filled in from the PRINTER_INFO_2 structure sent by the Windows NT/2000 client with one exception\&. The "Windows 9x driver location" parameter is included for backwards compatibility only\&. The remaining fields in the structure are generated from answers to the APW questions\&. - - -Once the \fIaddprinter command\fR has been executed, \fBsmbd\fR will reparse the \fI smb\&.conf\fR to determine if the share defined by the APW exists\&. If the sharename is still invalid, then \fBsmbd \fR will return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client\&. - - -The "add printer command" program can output a single line of text, which Samba will set as the port the new printer is connected to\&. If this line isn't output, Samba won't reload its printer shares\&. - - -See also \fI deleteprinter command\fR, \fIprinting\fR, \fIshow add printer wizard\fR - - -Default: \fBnone\fR - - -Example: \fBaddprinter command = /usr/bin/addprinter\fR - - -.TP -add share command (G) -Samba 2\&.2\&.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4\&.0 Server Manager\&. The \fIadd share command\fR is used to define an external program or script which will add a new service definition to \fIsmb\&.conf\fR\&. In order to successfully execute the \fIadd share command\fR, \fBsmbd\fR requires that the administrator be connected using a root account (i\&.e\&. uid == 0)\&. - - -When executed, \fBsmbd\fR will automatically invoke the \fIadd share command\fR with four parameters\&. - - -\fIconfigFile\fR - the location of the global \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. - -\fIshareName\fR - the name of the new share\&. - -\fIpathName\fR - path to an **existing** directory on disk\&. - -\fIcomment\fR - comment string to associate with the new share\&. - -This parameter is only used for add file shares\&. To add printer shares, see the \fIaddprinter command\fR\&. - - -See also \fIchange share command\fR, \fIdelete share command\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBnone\fR - - -Example: \fBadd share command = /usr/local/bin/addshare\fR - - -.TP -add user script (G) -This is the full pathname to a script that will be run \fBAS ROOT\fR by \fBsmbd\fR(8) under special circumstances described below\&. - - -Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are created for all users accessing files on this server\&. For sites that use Windows NT account databases as their primary user database creating these users and keeping the user list in sync with the Windows NT PDC is an onerous task\&. This option allows smbd to create the required UNIX users \fBON DEMAND\fR when a user accesses the Samba server\&. - - -In order to use this option, \fBsmbd\fR(8) must \fBNOT\fR be set to \fIsecurity = share\fR and \fIadd user script\fR must be set to a full pathname for a script that will create a UNIX user given one argument of \fI%u\fR, which expands into the UNIX user name to create\&. - - -When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server, at login (session setup in the SMB protocol) time, \fBsmbd\fR(8) contacts the \fIpassword server\fR and attempts to authenticate the given user with the given password\&. If the authentication succeeds then \fBsmbd\fR attempts to find a UNIX user in the UNIX password database to map the Windows user into\&. If this lookup fails, and \fIadd user script \fR is set then \fBsmbd\fR will call the specified script \fBAS ROOT\fR, expanding any \fI%u\fR argument to be the user name to create\&. - - -If this script successfully creates the user then \fBsmbd \fR will continue on as though the UNIX user already existed\&. In this way, UNIX users are dynamically created to match existing Windows NT accounts\&. - - -See also \fI security\fR, \fIpassword server\fR, \fIdelete user script\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBadd user script = <empty string>\fR - - -Example: \fBadd user script = /usr/local/samba/bin/add_user %u\fR - - -.TP -add user to group script (G) -Full path to the script that will be called when a user is added to a group using the Windows NT domain administration tools\&. It will be run by \fBsmbd\fR(8) \fBAS ROOT\fR\&. Any \fI%g\fR will be replaced with the group name and any \fI%u\fR will be replaced with the user name\&. - - -Default: \fBadd user to group script = \fR - - -Example: \fBadd user to group script = /usr/sbin/adduser %u %g\fR - - -.TP -admin users (S) -This is a list of users who will be granted administrative privileges on the share\&. This means that they will do all file operations as the super-user (root)\&. - - -You should use this option very carefully, as any user in this list will be able to do anything they like on the share, irrespective of file permissions\&. - - -Default: \fBno admin users\fR - - -Example: \fBadmin users = jason\fR - - -.TP -afs share (S) -This parameter controls whether special AFS features are enabled for this share\&. If enabled, it assumes that the directory exported via the \fIpath\fR parameter is a local AFS import\&. The special AFS features include the attempt to hand-craft an AFS token if you enabled --with-fake-kaserver in configure\&. - - -Default: \fBafs share = no\fR - - -Example: \fBafs share = yes\fR - - -.TP -afs username map (G) -If you are using the fake kaserver AFS feature, you might want to hand-craft the usernames you are creating tokens for\&. For example this is necessary if you have users from several domain in your AFS Protection Database\&. One possible scheme to code users as DOMAIN+User as it is done by winbind with the + as a separator\&. - - -The mapped user name must contain the cell name to log into, so without setting this parameter there will be no token\&. - - -Default: \fBnone\fR - - -Example: \fBafs username map = %u@afs.samba.org\fR - - -.TP -algorithmic rid base (G) -This determines how Samba will use its algorithmic mapping from uids/gid to the RIDs needed to construct NT Security Identifiers\&. - - -Setting this option to a larger value could be useful to sites transitioning from WinNT and Win2k, as existing user and group rids would otherwise clash with sytem users etc\&. - - -All UIDs and GIDs must be able to be resolved into SIDs for the correct operation of ACLs on the server\&. As such the algorithmic mapping can't be 'turned off', but pushing it 'out of the way' should resolve the issues\&. Users and groups can then be assigned 'low' RIDs in arbitary-rid supporting backends\&. - - -Default: \fBalgorithmic rid base = 1000\fR - - -Example: \fBalgorithmic rid base = 100000\fR - - -.TP -allow hosts (S) -Synonym for \fIhosts allow\fR\&. - - -.TP -allow trusted domains (G) -This option only takes effect when the \fIsecurity\fR option is set to \fBserver\fR or \fBdomain\fR\&. If it is set to no, then attempts to connect to a resource from a domain or workgroup other than the one which smbd is running in will fail, even if that domain is trusted by the remote server doing the authentication\&. - - -This is useful if you only want your Samba server to serve resources to users in the domain it is a member of\&. As an example, suppose that there are two domains DOMA and DOMB\&. DOMB is trusted by DOMA, which contains the Samba server\&. Under normal circumstances, a user with an account in DOMB can then access the resources of a UNIX account with the same account name on the Samba server even if they do not have an account in DOMA\&. This can make implementing a security boundary difficult\&. - - -Default: \fBallow trusted domains = yes\fR - - -.TP -announce as (G) -This specifies what type of server \fBnmbd\fR(8) will announce itself as, to a network neighborhood browse list\&. By default this is set to Windows NT\&. The valid options are : "NT Server" (which can also be written as "NT"), "NT Workstation", "Win95" or "WfW" meaning Windows NT Server, Windows NT Workstation, Windows 95 and Windows for Workgroups respectively\&. Do not change this parameter unless you have a specific need to stop Samba appearing as an NT server as this may prevent Samba servers from participating as browser servers correctly\&. - - -Default: \fBannounce as = NT Server\fR - - -Example: \fBannounce as = Win95\fR - - -.TP -announce version (G) -This specifies the major and minor version numbers that nmbd will use when announcing itself as a server\&. The default is 4\&.9\&. Do not change this parameter unless you have a specific need to set a Samba server to be a downlevel server\&. - - -Default: \fBannounce version = 4.9\fR - - -Example: \fBannounce version = 2.0\fR - - -.TP -auth methods (G) -This option allows the administrator to chose what authentication methods \fBsmbd\fR will use when authenticating a user\&. This option defaults to sensible values based on \fIsecurity\fR\&. This should be considered a developer option and used only in rare circumstances\&. In the majority (if not all) of production servers, the default setting should be adequate\&. - - -Each entry in the list attempts to authenticate the user in turn, until the user authenticates\&. In practice only one method will ever actually be able to complete the authentication\&. - - -Possible options include \fBguest\fR (anonymous access), \fBsam\fR (lookups in local list of accounts based on netbios name or domain name), \fBwinbind\fR (relay authentication requests for remote users through winbindd), \fBntdomain\fR (pre-winbindd method of authentication for remote domain users; deprecated in favour of winbind method), \fBtrustdomain\fR (authenticate trusted users by contacting the remote DC directly from smbd; deprecated in favour of winbind method)\&. - - -Default: \fBauth methods = <empty string>\fR - - -Example: \fBauth methods = guest sam winbind\fR - - -.TP -auto services (G) -This is a synonym for the \fIpreload\fR\&. - - -.TP -available (S) -This parameter lets you "turn off" a service\&. If \fIavailable = no\fR, then \fBALL\fR attempts to connect to the service will fail\&. Such failures are logged\&. - - -Default: \fBavailable = yes\fR - - -.TP -bind interfaces only (G) -This global parameter allows the Samba admin to limit what interfaces on a machine will serve SMB requests\&. It affects file service \fBsmbd\fR(8) and name service \fBnmbd\fR(8) in a slightly different ways\&. - - -For name service it causes \fBnmbd\fR to bind to ports 137 and 138 on the interfaces listed in the interfaces parameter\&. \fBnmbd\fR also binds to the "all addresses" interface (0\&.0\&.0\&.0) on ports 137 and 138 for the purposes of reading broadcast messages\&. If this option is not set then \fBnmbd\fR will service name requests on all of these sockets\&. If \fIbind interfaces only\fR is set then \fBnmbd\fR will check the source address of any packets coming in on the broadcast sockets and discard any that don't match the broadcast addresses of the interfaces in the \fIinterfaces\fR parameter list\&. As unicast packets are received on the other sockets it allows \fBnmbd\fR to refuse to serve names to machines that send packets that arrive through any interfaces not listed in the \fIinterfaces\fR list\&. IP Source address spoofing does defeat this simple check, however, so it must not be used seriously as a security feature for \fBnmbd\fR\&. - - -For file service it causes \fBsmbd\fR(8) to bind only to the interface list given in the interfaces parameter\&. This restricts the networks that \fBsmbd\fR will serve to packets coming in those interfaces\&. Note that you should not use this parameter for machines that are serving PPP or other intermittent or non-broadcast network interfaces as it will not cope with non-permanent interfaces\&. - - -If \fIbind interfaces only\fR is set then unless the network address \fB127\&.0\&.0\&.1\fR is added to the \fIinterfaces\fR parameter list \fBsmbpasswd\fR(8) and \fBswat\fR(8) may not work as expected due to the reasons covered below\&. - - -To change a users SMB password, the \fBsmbpasswd\fR by default connects to the \fBlocalhost - 127\&.0\&.0\&.1\fR address as an SMB client to issue the password change request\&. If \fIbind interfaces only\fR is set then unless the network address \fB127\&.0\&.0\&.1\fR is added to the \fIinterfaces\fR parameter list then \fB smbpasswd\fR will fail to connect in it's default mode\&. \fBsmbpasswd\fR can be forced to use the primary IP interface of the local host by using its \fBsmbpasswd\fR(8) \fI-r remote machine\fR parameter, with \fIremote machine\fR set to the IP name of the primary interface of the local host\&. - - -The \fBswat\fR status page tries to connect with \fBsmbd\fR and \fBnmbd\fR at the address \fB127\&.0\&.0\&.1\fR to determine if they are running\&. Not adding \fB127\&.0\&.0\&.1\fR will cause \fB smbd\fR and \fBnmbd\fR to always show "not running" even if they really are\&. This can prevent \fB swat\fR from starting/stopping/restarting \fBsmbd\fR and \fBnmbd\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBbind interfaces only = no\fR - - -.TP -blocking locks (S) -This parameter controls the behavior of \fBsmbd\fR(8) when given a request by a client to obtain a byte range lock on a region of an open file, and the request has a time limit associated with it\&. - - -If this parameter is set and the lock range requested cannot be immediately satisfied, samba will internally queue the lock request, and periodically attempt to obtain the lock until the timeout period expires\&. - - -If this parameter is set to \fBno\fR, then samba will behave as previous versions of Samba would and will fail the lock request immediately if the lock range cannot be obtained\&. - - -Default: \fBblocking locks = yes\fR - - -.TP -block size (S) -This parameter controls the behavior of \fBsmbd\fR(8) when reporting disk free sizes\&. By default, this reports a disk block size of 1024 bytes\&. - - -Changing this parameter may have some effect on the efficiency of client writes, this is not yet confirmed\&. This parameter was added to allow advanced administrators to change it (usually to a higher value) and test the effect it has on client write performance without re-compiling the code\&. As this is an experimental option it may be removed in a future release\&. - - -Changing this option does not change the disk free reporting size, just the block size unit reported to the client\&. - - -.TP -browsable (S) -See the \fIbrowseable\fR\&. - - -.TP -browseable (S) -This controls whether this share is seen in the list of available shares in a net view and in the browse list\&. - - -Default: \fBbrowseable = yes\fR - - -.TP -browse list (G) -This controls whether \fBsmbd\fR(8) will serve a browse list to a client doing a \fBNetServerEnum\fR call\&. Normally set to \fByes\fR\&. You should never need to change this\&. - - -Default: \fBbrowse list = yes\fR - - -.TP -case sensitive (S) -See the discussion in the section NAME MANGLING\&. - - -Default: \fBcase sensitive = no\fR - - -.TP -casesignames (S) -Synonym for case sensitive\&. - - -.TP -change notify timeout (G) -This SMB allows a client to tell a server to "watch" a particular directory for any changes and only reply to the SMB request when a change has occurred\&. Such constant scanning of a directory is expensive under UNIX, hence an \fBsmbd\fR(8) daemon only performs such a scan on each requested directory once every \fIchange notify timeout\fR seconds\&. - - -Default: \fBchange notify timeout = 60\fR - - -Example: \fBchange notify timeout = 300\fR - - -Would change the scan time to every 5 minutes\&. - - -.TP -change share command (G) -Samba 2\&.2\&.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4\&.0 Server Manager\&. The \fIchange share command\fR is used to define an external program or script which will modify an existing service definition in \fIsmb\&.conf\fR\&. In order to successfully execute the \fIchange share command\fR, \fBsmbd\fR requires that the administrator be connected using a root account (i\&.e\&. uid == 0)\&. - - -When executed, \fBsmbd\fR will automatically invoke the \fIchange share command\fR with four parameters\&. - - -\fIconfigFile\fR - the location of the global \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. - -\fIshareName\fR - the name of the new share\&. - -\fIpathName\fR - path to an **existing** directory on disk\&. - -\fIcomment\fR - comment string to associate with the new share\&. - -This parameter is only used modify existing file shares definitions\&. To modify printer shares, use the "Printers\&.\&.\&." folder as seen when browsing the Samba host\&. - - -See also \fIadd share command\fR, \fIdelete share command\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBnone\fR - - -Example: \fBchange share command = /usr/local/bin/addshare\fR - - -.TP -client lanman auth (G) -This parameter determines whether or not \fBsmbclient\fR(8) and other samba client tools will attempt to authenticate itself to servers using the weaker LANMAN password hash\&. If disabled, only server which support NT password hashes (e\&.g\&. Windows NT/2000, Samba, etc\&.\&.\&. but not Windows 95/98) will be able to be connected from the Samba client\&. - - -The LANMAN encrypted response is easily broken, due to it's case-insensitive nature, and the choice of algorithm\&. Clients without Windows 95/98 servers are advised to disable this option\&. - - -Disabling this option will also disable the \fBclient plaintext auth\fR option - - -Likewise, if the \fBclient ntlmv2 auth\fR parameter is enabled, then only NTLMv2 logins will be attempted\&. Not all servers support NTLMv2, and most will require special configuration to us it\&. - - -Default : \fBclient lanman auth = yes\fR - - -.TP -client ntlmv2 auth (G) -This parameter determines whether or not \fBsmbclient\fR(8) will attempt to authenticate itself to servers using the NTLMv2 encrypted password response\&. - - -If enabled, only an NTLMv2 and LMv2 response (both much more secure than earlier versions) will be sent\&. Many servers (including NT4 < SP4, Win9x and Samba 2\&.2) are not compatible with NTLMv2\&. - - -Similarly, if enabled, NTLMv1, \fBclient lanman auth\fR and \fBclient plaintext auth\fR authentication will be disabled\&. This also disables share-level authentication\&. - - -If disabled, an NTLM response (and possibly a LANMAN response) will be sent by the client, depending on the value of \fBclient lanman auth\fR\&. - - -Note that some sites (particularly those following 'best practice' security polices) only allow NTLMv2 responses, and not the weaker LM or NTLM\&. - - -Default : \fBclient ntlmv2 auth = no\fR - - -.TP -client plaintext auth (G) -Specifies whether a client should send a plaintext password if the server does not support encrypted passwords\&. - - -Default: \fBclient plaintext auth = yes\fR - - -.TP -client schannel (G) -This controls whether the client offers or even demands the use of the netlogon schannel\&. \fIclient schannel = no\fR does not offer the schannel, \fIserver schannel = auto\fR offers the schannel but does not enforce it, and \fIserver schannel = yes\fR denies access if the server is not able to speak netlogon schannel\&. - - -Default: \fBclient schannel = auto\fR - - -Example: \fBclient schannel = yes\fR - - -.TP -client signing (G) -This controls whether the client offers or requires the server it talks to to use SMB signing\&. Possible values are \fBauto\fR, \fBmandatory\fR and \fBdisabled\fR\&. - - -When set to auto, SMB signing is offered, but not enforced\&. When set to mandatory, SMB signing is required and if set to disabled, SMB signing is not offered either\&. - - -Default: \fBclient signing = auto\fR - - -.TP -client use spnego (G) -This variable controls controls whether samba clients will try to use Simple and Protected NEGOciation (as specified by rfc2478) with WindowsXP and Windows2000 servers to agree upon an authentication mechanism\&. SPNEGO client support for SMB Signing is currently broken, so you might want to turn this option off when operating with Windows 2003 domain controllers in particular\&. - - -Default: \fBclient use spnego = yes\fR - - -.TP -comment (S) -This is a text field that is seen next to a share when a client does a queries the server, either via the network neighborhood or via \fBnet view\fR to list what shares are available\&. - - -If you want to set the string that is displayed next to the machine name then see the \fI server string\fR parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBNo comment string\fR - - -Example: \fBcomment = Fred's Files\fR - - -.TP -config file (G) -This allows you to override the config file to use, instead of the default (usually \fIsmb\&.conf\fR)\&. There is a chicken and egg problem here as this option is set in the config file! - - -For this reason, if the name of the config file has changed when the parameters are loaded then it will reload them from the new config file\&. - - -This option takes the usual substitutions, which can be very useful\&. - - -If the config file doesn't exist then it won't be loaded (allowing you to special case the config files of just a few clients)\&. - - -Example: \fBconfig file = /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf.%m\fR - - -.TP -copy (S) -This parameter allows you to "clone" service entries\&. The specified service is simply duplicated under the current service's name\&. Any parameters specified in the current section will override those in the section being copied\&. - - -This feature lets you set up a 'template' service and create similar services easily\&. Note that the service being copied must occur earlier in the configuration file than the service doing the copying\&. - - -Default: \fBno value\fR - - -Example: \fBcopy = otherservice\fR - - -.TP -create mask (S) -A synonym for this parameter is \fIcreate mode\fR \&. - - -When a file is created, the necessary permissions are calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed with this parameter\&. This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise MASK for the UNIX modes of a file\&. Any bit \fBnot\fR set here will be removed from the modes set on a file when it is created\&. - - -The default value of this parameter removes the 'group' and 'other' write and execute bits from the UNIX modes\&. - - -Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode created from this parameter with the value of the \fIforce create mode\fR parameter which is set to 000 by default\&. - - -This parameter does not affect directory modes\&. See the parameter \fIdirectory mode \fR for details\&. - - -See also the \fIforce create mode\fR parameter for forcing particular mode bits to be set on created files\&. See also the \fIdirectory mode\fR parameter for masking mode bits on created directories\&. See also the \fIinherit permissions\fR parameter\&. - - -Note that this parameter does not apply to permissions set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors\&. If the administrator wishes to enforce a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the \fIsecurity mask\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBcreate mask = 0744\fR - - -Example: \fBcreate mask = 0775\fR - - -.TP -create mode (S) -This is a synonym for \fI create mask\fR\&. - - -.TP -csc policy (S) -This stands for \fBclient-side caching policy\fR, and specifies how clients capable of offline caching will cache the files in the share\&. The valid values are: manual, documents, programs, disable\&. - - -These values correspond to those used on Windows servers\&. - - -For example, shares containing roaming profiles can have offline caching disabled using \fBcsc policy = disable\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBcsc policy = manual\fR - - -Example: \fBcsc policy = programs\fR - - -.TP -deadtime (G) -The value of the parameter (a decimal integer) represents the number of minutes of inactivity before a connection is considered dead, and it is disconnected\&. The deadtime only takes effect if the number of open files is zero\&. - - -This is useful to stop a server's resources being exhausted by a large number of inactive connections\&. - - -Most clients have an auto-reconnect feature when a connection is broken so in most cases this parameter should be transparent to users\&. - - -Using this parameter with a timeout of a few minutes is recommended for most systems\&. - - -A deadtime of zero indicates that no auto-disconnection should be performed\&. - - -Default: \fBdeadtime = 0\fR - - -Example: \fBdeadtime = 15\fR - - -.TP -debug hires timestamp (G) -Sometimes the timestamps in the log messages are needed with a resolution of higher that seconds, this boolean parameter adds microsecond resolution to the timestamp message header when turned on\&. - - -Note that the parameter \fI debug timestamp\fR must be on for this to have an effect\&. - - -Default: \fBdebug hires timestamp = no\fR - - -.TP -debuglevel (G) -Synonym for \fI log level\fR\&. - - -.TP -debug pid (G) -When using only one log file for more then one forked \fBsmbd\fR(8)-process there may be hard to follow which process outputs which message\&. This boolean parameter is adds the process-id to the timestamp message headers in the logfile when turned on\&. - - -Note that the parameter \fI debug timestamp\fR must be on for this to have an effect\&. - - -Default: \fBdebug pid = no\fR - - -.TP -debug timestamp (G) -Samba debug log messages are timestamped by default\&. If you are running at a high \fIdebug level\fR these timestamps can be distracting\&. This boolean parameter allows timestamping to be turned off\&. - - -Default: \fBdebug timestamp = yes\fR - - -.TP -debug uid (G) -Samba is sometimes run as root and sometime run as the connected user, this boolean parameter inserts the current euid, egid, uid and gid to the timestamp message headers in the log file if turned on\&. - - -Note that the parameter \fI debug timestamp\fR must be on for this to have an effect\&. - - -Default: \fBdebug uid = no\fR - - -.TP -default (G) -A synonym for \fI default service\fR\&. - - -.TP -default case (S) -See the section on NAME MANGLING\&. Also note the \fIshort preserve case\fR parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBdefault case = lower\fR - - -.TP -default devmode (S) -This parameter is only applicable to printable services\&. When smbd is serving Printer Drivers to Windows NT/2k/XP clients, each printer on the Samba server has a Device Mode which defines things such as paper size and orientation and duplex settings\&. The device mode can only correctly be generated by the printer driver itself (which can only be executed on a Win32 platform)\&. Because smbd is unable to execute the driver code to generate the device mode, the default behavior is to set this field to NULL\&. - - -Most problems with serving printer drivers to Windows NT/2k/XP clients can be traced to a problem with the generated device mode\&. Certain drivers will do things such as crashing the client's Explorer\&.exe with a NULL devmode\&. However, other printer drivers can cause the client's spooler service (spoolsv\&.exe) to die if the devmode was not created by the driver itself (i\&.e\&. smbd generates a default devmode)\&. - - -This parameter should be used with care and tested with the printer driver in question\&. It is better to leave the device mode to NULL and let the Windows client set the correct values\&. Because drivers do not do this all the time, setting \fBdefault devmode = yes\fR will instruct smbd to generate a default one\&. - - -For more information on Windows NT/2k printing and Device Modes, see the MSDN documentation\&. - - -Default: \fBdefault devmode = no\fR - - -.TP -default service (G) -This parameter specifies the name of a service which will be connected to if the service actually requested cannot be found\&. Note that the square brackets are \fBNOT\fR given in the parameter value (see example below)\&. - - -There is no default value for this parameter\&. If this parameter is not given, attempting to connect to a nonexistent service results in an error\&. - - -Typically the default service would be a \fIguest ok\fR, \fIread-only\fR service\&. - - -Also note that the apparent service name will be changed to equal that of the requested service, this is very useful as it allows you to use macros like \fI%S\fR to make a wildcard service\&. - - -Note also that any "_" characters in the name of the service used in the default service will get mapped to a "/"\&. This allows for interesting things\&. - - -Example: - - -.nf - -[global] - default service = pub - -[pub] - path = /%S -.fi - - -.TP -delete group script (G) -This is the full pathname to a script that will be run \fBAS ROOT\fR \fBsmbd\fR(8) when a group is requested to be deleted\&. It will expand any \fI%g\fR to the group name passed\&. This script is only useful for installations using the Windows NT domain administration tools\&. - - -.TP -deleteprinter command (G) -With the introduction of MS-RPC based printer support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2\&.2, it is now possible to delete printer at run time by issuing the DeletePrinter() RPC call\&. - - -For a Samba host this means that the printer must be physically deleted from underlying printing system\&. The \fI deleteprinter command\fR defines a script to be run which will perform the necessary operations for removing the printer from the print system and from \fIsmb\&.conf\fR\&. - - -The \fIdeleteprinter command\fR is automatically called with only one parameter: \fI "printer name"\fR\&. - - -Once the \fIdeleteprinter command\fR has been executed, \fBsmbd\fR will reparse the \fI smb\&.conf\fR to associated printer no longer exists\&. If the sharename is still valid, then \fBsmbd \fR will return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client\&. - - -See also \fI addprinter command\fR, \fIprinting\fR, \fIshow add printer wizard\fR - - -Default: \fBnone\fR - - -Example: \fBdeleteprinter command = /usr/bin/removeprinter\fR - - -.TP -delete readonly (S) -This parameter allows readonly files to be deleted\&. This is not normal DOS semantics, but is allowed by UNIX\&. - - -This option may be useful for running applications such as rcs, where UNIX file ownership prevents changing file permissions, and DOS semantics prevent deletion of a read only file\&. - - -Default: \fBdelete readonly = no\fR - - -.TP -delete share command (G) -Samba 2\&.2\&.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4\&.0 Server Manager\&. The \fIdelete share command\fR is used to define an external program or script which will remove an existing service definition from \fIsmb\&.conf\fR\&. In order to successfully execute the \fIdelete share command\fR, \fBsmbd\fR requires that the administrator be connected using a root account (i\&.e\&. uid == 0)\&. - - -When executed, \fBsmbd\fR will automatically invoke the \fIdelete share command\fR with two parameters\&. - - -\fIconfigFile\fR - the location of the global \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. - -\fIshareName\fR - the name of the existing service\&. - -This parameter is only used to remove file shares\&. To delete printer shares, see the \fIdeleteprinter command\fR\&. - - -See also \fIadd share command\fR, \fIchange share command\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBnone\fR - - -Example: \fBdelete share command = /usr/local/bin/delshare\fR - - -.TP -delete user from group script (G) -Full path to the script that will be called when a user is removed from a group using the Windows NT domain administration tools\&. It will be run by \fBsmbd\fR(8) \fBAS ROOT\fR\&. Any \fI%g\fR will be replaced with the group name and any \fI%u\fR will be replaced with the user name\&. - - -Default: \fBdelete user from group script = \fR - - -Example: \fBdelete user from group script = /usr/sbin/deluser %u %g\fR - - -.TP -delete user script (G) -This is the full pathname to a script that will be run by \fBsmbd\fR(8) when managing users with remote RPC (NT) tools\&. - - -This script is called when a remote client removes a user from the server, normally using 'User Manager for Domains' or \fBrpcclient\fR\&. - - -This script should delete the given UNIX username\&. - - -Default: \fBdelete user script = <empty string>\fR - - -Example: \fBdelete user script = /usr/local/samba/bin/del_user %u\fR - - -.TP -delete veto files (S) -This option is used when Samba is attempting to delete a directory that contains one or more vetoed directories (see the \fIveto files\fR option)\&. If this option is set to \fBno\fR (the default) then if a vetoed directory contains any non-vetoed files or directories then the directory delete will fail\&. This is usually what you want\&. - - -If this option is set to \fByes\fR, then Samba will attempt to recursively delete any files and directories within the vetoed directory\&. This can be useful for integration with file serving systems such as NetAtalk which create meta-files within directories you might normally veto DOS/Windows users from seeing (e\&.g\&. \fI\&.AppleDouble\fR) - - -Setting \fBdelete veto files = yes\fR allows these directories to be transparently deleted when the parent directory is deleted (so long as the user has permissions to do so)\&. - - -See also the \fIveto files\fR parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBdelete veto files = no\fR - - -.TP -deny hosts (S) -Synonym for \fIhosts deny\fR\&. - - -.TP -dfree command (G) -The \fIdfree command\fR setting should only be used on systems where a problem occurs with the internal disk space calculations\&. This has been known to happen with Ultrix, but may occur with other operating systems\&. The symptom that was seen was an error of "Abort Retry Ignore" at the end of each directory listing\&. - - -This setting allows the replacement of the internal routines to calculate the total disk space and amount available with an external routine\&. The example below gives a possible script that might fulfill this function\&. - - -The external program will be passed a single parameter indicating a directory in the filesystem being queried\&. This will typically consist of the string \fI\&./\fR\&. The script should return two integers in ASCII\&. The first should be the total disk space in blocks, and the second should be the number of available blocks\&. An optional third return value can give the block size in bytes\&. The default blocksize is 1024 bytes\&. - - -Note: Your script should \fBNOT\fR be setuid or setgid and should be owned by (and writeable only by) root! - - -Default: \fBBy default internal routines for determining the disk capacity and remaining space will be used\&. \fR - - -Example: \fBdfree command = /usr/local/samba/bin/dfree\fR - - -Where the script dfree (which must be made executable) could be: - - -.nf - -#!/bin/sh -df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' -.fi - - -or perhaps (on Sys V based systems): - - -.nf - -#!/bin/sh -/usr/bin/df -k $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $3" "$5}' -.fi - - -Note that you may have to replace the command names with full path names on some systems\&. - - -.TP -directory (S) -Synonym for \fIpath\fR\&. - - -.TP -directory mask (S) -This parameter is the octal modes which are used when converting DOS modes to UNIX modes when creating UNIX directories\&. - - -When a directory is created, the necessary permissions are calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed with this parameter\&. This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise MASK for the UNIX modes of a directory\&. Any bit \fBnot\fR set here will be removed from the modes set on a directory when it is created\&. - - -The default value of this parameter removes the 'group' and 'other' write bits from the UNIX mode, allowing only the user who owns the directory to modify it\&. - - -Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode created from this parameter with the value of the \fIforce directory mode\fR parameter\&. This parameter is set to 000 by default (i\&.e\&. no extra mode bits are added)\&. - - -Note that this parameter does not apply to permissions set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors\&. If the administrator wishes to enforce a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the \fIdirectory security mask\fR\&. - - -See the \fIforce directory mode\fR parameter to cause particular mode bits to always be set on created directories\&. - - -See also the \fIcreate mode \fR parameter for masking mode bits on created files, and the \fIdirectory security mask\fR parameter\&. - - -Also refer to the \fI inherit permissions\fR parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBdirectory mask = 0755\fR - - -Example: \fBdirectory mask = 0775\fR - - -.TP -directory mode (S) -Synonym for \fI directory mask\fR - - -.TP -directory security mask (S) -This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog box\&. - - -This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to the changed permission bits, thus preventing any bits not in this mask from being modified\&. Essentially, zero bits in this mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed to change\&. - - -If not set explicitly this parameter is set to 0777 meaning a user is allowed to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a directory\&. - - -\fBNote\fR that users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems\&. Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave it as the default of \fB0777\fR\&. - - -See also the \fI force directory security mode\fR, \fIsecurity mask\fR, \fIforce security mode \fR parameters\&. - - -Default: \fBdirectory security mask = 0777\fR - - -Example: \fBdirectory security mask = 0700\fR - - -.TP -disable netbios (G) -Enabling this parameter will disable netbios support in Samba\&. Netbios is the only available form of browsing in all windows versions except for 2000 and XP\&. - - -Note that clients that only support netbios won't be able to see your samba server when netbios support is disabled\&. - -Default: \fBdisable netbios = no\fR - - -Example: \fBdisable netbios = yes\fR - - -.TP -disable spoolss (G) -Enabling this parameter will disable Samba's support for the SPOOLSS set of MS-RPC's and will yield identical behavior as Samba 2\&.0\&.x\&. Windows NT/2000 clients will downgrade to using Lanman style printing commands\&. Windows 9x/ME will be uneffected by the parameter\&. However, this will also disable the ability to upload printer drivers to a Samba server via the Windows NT Add Printer Wizard or by using the NT printer properties dialog window\&. It will also disable the capability of Windows NT/2000 clients to download print drivers from the Samba host upon demand\&. \fBBe very careful about enabling this parameter\&.\fR - - -See also use client driver - - -Default : \fBdisable spoolss = no\fR - - -.TP -display charset (G) -Specifies the charset that samba will use to print messages to stdout and stderr and SWAT will use\&. Should generally be the same as the \fBunix charset\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBdisplay charset = ASCII\fR - - -Example: \fBdisplay charset = UTF8\fR - - -.TP -dns proxy (G) -Specifies that \fBnmbd\fR(8) when acting as a WINS server and finding that a NetBIOS name has not been registered, should treat the NetBIOS name word-for-word as a DNS name and do a lookup with the DNS server for that name on behalf of the name-querying client\&. - - -Note that the maximum length for a NetBIOS name is 15 characters, so the DNS name (or DNS alias) can likewise only be 15 characters, maximum\&. - - -\fBnmbd\fR spawns a second copy of itself to do the DNS name lookup requests, as doing a name lookup is a blocking action\&. - - -See also the parameter \fI wins support\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBdns proxy = yes\fR - - -.TP -domain logons (G) -If set to \fByes\fR, the Samba server will serve Windows 95/98 Domain logons for the \fIworkgroup\fR it is in\&. Samba 2\&.2 has limited capability to act as a domain controller for Windows NT 4 Domains\&. For more details on setting up this feature see the Samba-PDC-HOWTO included in the Samba documentation\&. - - -Default: \fBdomain logons = no\fR - - -.TP -domain master (G) -Tell \fBsmbd\fR(8) to enable WAN-wide browse list collation\&. Setting this option causes \fBnmbd\fR to claim a special domain specific NetBIOS name that identifies it as a domain master browser for its given \fIworkgroup\fR\&. Local master browsers in the same \fIworkgroup\fR on broadcast-isolated subnets will give this \fBnmbd\fR their local browse lists, and then ask \fBsmbd\fR(8) for a complete copy of the browse list for the whole wide area network\&. Browser clients will then contact their local master browser, and will receive the domain-wide browse list, instead of just the list for their broadcast-isolated subnet\&. - - -Note that Windows NT Primary Domain Controllers expect to be able to claim this \fIworkgroup\fR specific special NetBIOS name that identifies them as domain master browsers for that \fIworkgroup\fR by default (i\&.e\&. there is no way to prevent a Windows NT PDC from attempting to do this)\&. This means that if this parameter is set and \fBnmbd\fR claims the special name for a \fIworkgroup\fR before a Windows NT PDC is able to do so then cross subnet browsing will behave strangely and may fail\&. - - -If \fBdomain logons = yes\fR , then the default behavior is to enable the \fIdomain master\fR parameter\&. If \fIdomain logons\fR is not enabled (the default setting), then neither will \fIdomain master\fR be enabled by default\&. - - -Default: \fBdomain master = auto\fR - - -.TP -dont descend (S) -There are certain directories on some systems (e\&.g\&., the \fI/proc\fR tree under Linux) that are either not of interest to clients or are infinitely deep (recursive)\&. This parameter allows you to specify a comma-delimited list of directories that the server should always show as empty\&. - - -Note that Samba can be very fussy about the exact format of the "dont descend" entries\&. For example you may need \fI \&./proc\fR instead of just \fI/proc\fR\&. Experimentation is the best policy :-) - - -Default: \fBnone (i\&.e\&., all directories are OK to descend)\fR - - -Example: \fBdont descend = /proc,/dev\fR - - -.TP -dos charset (G) -DOS SMB clients assume the server has the same charset as they do\&. This option specifies which charset Samba should talk to DOS clients\&. - - -The default depends on which charsets you have installed\&. Samba tries to use charset 850 but falls back to ASCII in case it is not available\&. Run \fBtestparm\fR(1) to check the default on your system\&. - - -.TP -dos filemode (S) -The default behavior in Samba is to provide UNIX-like behavior where only the owner of a file/directory is able to change the permissions on it\&. However, this behavior is often confusing to DOS/Windows users\&. Enabling this parameter allows a user who has write access to the file (by whatever means) to modify the permissions on it\&. Note that a user belonging to the group owning the file will not be allowed to change permissions if the group is only granted read access\&. Ownership of the file/directory is not changed, only the permissions are modified\&. - - -Default: \fBdos filemode = no\fR - - -.TP -dos filetime resolution (S) -Under the DOS and Windows FAT filesystem, the finest granularity on time resolution is two seconds\&. Setting this parameter for a share causes Samba to round the reported time down to the nearest two second boundary when a query call that requires one second resolution is made to \fBsmbd\fR(8)\&. - - -This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for Visual C++ when used against Samba shares\&. If oplocks are enabled on a share, Visual C++ uses two different time reading calls to check if a file has changed since it was last read\&. One of these calls uses a one-second granularity, the other uses a two second granularity\&. As the two second call rounds any odd second down, then if the file has a timestamp of an odd number of seconds then the two timestamps will not match and Visual C++ will keep reporting the file has changed\&. Setting this option causes the two timestamps to match, and Visual C++ is happy\&. - - -Default: \fBdos filetime resolution = no\fR - - -.TP -dos filetimes (S) -Under DOS and Windows, if a user can write to a file they can change the timestamp on it\&. Under POSIX semantics, only the owner of the file or root may change the timestamp\&. By default, Samba runs with POSIX semantics and refuses to change the timestamp on a file if the user \fBsmbd\fR is acting on behalf of is not the file owner\&. Setting this option to \fB yes\fR allows DOS semantics and \fBsmbd\fR(8) will change the file timestamp as DOS requires\&. - - -Default: \fBdos filetimes = no\fR - - -.TP -enable rid algorithm (G) -This option is used to control whether or not smbd in Samba 3\&.0 should fallback to the algorithm used by Samba 2\&.2 to generate user and group RIDs\&. The longterm development goal is to remove the algorithmic mappings of RIDs altogether, but this has proved to be difficult\&. This parameter is mainly provided so that developers can turn the algorithm on and off and see what breaks\&. This parameter should not be disabled by non-developers because certain features in Samba will fail to work without it\&. - - -Default: \fBenable rid algorithm = <yes>\fR - - -.TP -encrypt passwords (G) -This boolean controls whether encrypted passwords will be negotiated with the client\&. Note that Windows NT 4\&.0 SP3 and above and also Windows 98 will by default expect encrypted passwords unless a registry entry is changed\&. To use encrypted passwords in Samba see the chapter "User Database" in the Samba HOWTO Collection\&. - - -In order for encrypted passwords to work correctly \fBsmbd\fR(8) must either have access to a local \fBsmbpasswd\fR(5) file (see the \fBsmbpasswd\fR(8) program for information on how to set up and maintain this file), or set the security = [server|domain|ads] parameter which causes \fBsmbd\fR to authenticate against another server\&. - - -Default: \fBencrypt passwords = yes\fR - - -.TP -enhanced browsing (G) -This option enables a couple of enhancements to cross-subnet browse propagation that have been added in Samba but which are not standard in Microsoft implementations\&. - - -The first enhancement to browse propagation consists of a regular wildcard query to a Samba WINS server for all Domain Master Browsers, followed by a browse synchronization with each of the returned DMBs\&. The second enhancement consists of a regular randomised browse synchronization with all currently known DMBs\&. - - -You may wish to disable this option if you have a problem with empty workgroups not disappearing from browse lists\&. Due to the restrictions of the browse protocols these enhancements can cause a empty workgroup to stay around forever which can be annoying\&. - - -In general you should leave this option enabled as it makes cross-subnet browse propagation much more reliable\&. - - -Default: \fBenhanced browsing = yes\fR - - -.TP -enumports command (G) -The concept of a "port" is fairly foreign to UNIX hosts\&. Under Windows NT/2000 print servers, a port is associated with a port monitor and generally takes the form of a local port (i\&.e\&. LPT1:, COM1:, FILE:) or a remote port (i\&.e\&. LPD Port Monitor, etc\&.\&.\&.)\&. By default, Samba has only one port defined--\fB"Samba Printer Port"\fR\&. Under Windows NT/2000, all printers must have a valid port name\&. If you wish to have a list of ports displayed (\fBsmbd \fR does not use a port name for anything) other than the default \fB"Samba Printer Port"\fR, you can define \fIenumports command\fR to point to a program which should generate a list of ports, one per line, to standard output\&. This listing will then be used in response to the level 1 and 2 EnumPorts() RPC\&. - - -Default: \fBno enumports command\fR - - -Example: \fBenumports command = /usr/bin/listports\fR - - -.TP -exec (S) -This is a synonym for \fIpreexec\fR\&. - - -.TP -fake directory create times (S) -NTFS and Windows VFAT file systems keep a create time for all files and directories\&. This is not the same as the ctime - status change time - that Unix keeps, so Samba by default reports the earliest of the various times Unix does keep\&. Setting this parameter for a share causes Samba to always report midnight 1-1-1980 as the create time for directories\&. - - -This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for Visual C++ when used against Samba shares\&. Visual C++ generated makefiles have the object directory as a dependency for each object file, and a make rule to create the directory\&. Also, when NMAKE compares timestamps it uses the creation time when examining a directory\&. Thus the object directory will be created if it does not exist, but once it does exist it will always have an earlier timestamp than the object files it contains\&. - - -However, Unix time semantics mean that the create time reported by Samba will be updated whenever a file is created or or deleted in the directory\&. NMAKE finds all object files in the object directory\&. The timestamp of the last one built is then compared to the timestamp of the object directory\&. If the directory's timestamp if newer, then all object files will be rebuilt\&. Enabling this option ensures directories always predate their contents and an NMAKE build will proceed as expected\&. - - -Default: \fBfake directory create times = no\fR - - -.TP -fake oplocks (S) -Oplocks are the way that SMB clients get permission from a server to locally cache file operations\&. If a server grants an oplock (opportunistic lock) then the client is free to assume that it is the only one accessing the file and it will aggressively cache file data\&. With some oplock types the client may even cache file open/close operations\&. This can give enormous performance benefits\&. - - -When you set \fBfake oplocks = yes\fR, \fBsmbd\fR(8) will always grant oplock requests no matter how many clients are using the file\&. - - -It is generally much better to use the real \fIoplocks\fR support rather than this parameter\&. - - -If you enable this option on all read-only shares or shares that you know will only be accessed from one client at a time such as physically read-only media like CDROMs, you will see a big performance improvement on many operations\&. If you enable this option on shares where multiple clients may be accessing the files read-write at the same time you can get data corruption\&. Use this option carefully! - - -Default: \fBfake oplocks = no\fR - - -.TP -follow symlinks (S) -This parameter allows the Samba administrator to stop \fBsmbd\fR(8) from following symbolic links in a particular share\&. Setting this parameter to \fBno\fR prevents any file or directory that is a symbolic link from being followed (the user will get an error)\&. This option is very useful to stop users from adding a symbolic link to \fI/etc/passwd\fR in their home directory for instance\&. However it will slow filename lookups down slightly\&. - - -This option is enabled (i\&.e\&. \fBsmbd\fR will follow symbolic links) by default\&. - - -Default: \fBfollow symlinks = yes\fR - - -.TP -force create mode (S) -This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit permissions that will \fBalways\fR be set on a file created by Samba\&. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto the mode bits of a file that is being created or having its permissions changed\&. The default for this parameter is (in octal) 000\&. The modes in this parameter are bitwise 'OR'ed onto the file mode after the mask set in the \fIcreate mask\fR parameter is applied\&. - - -See also the parameter \fIcreate mask\fR for details on masking mode bits on files\&. - - -See also the \fIinherit permissions\fR parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBforce create mode = 000\fR - - -Example: \fBforce create mode = 0755\fR - - -would force all created files to have read and execute permissions set for 'group' and 'other' as well as the read/write/execute bits set for the 'user'\&. - - -.TP -force directory mode (S) -This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit permissions that will \fBalways\fR be set on a directory created by Samba\&. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto the mode bits of a directory that is being created\&. The default for this parameter is (in octal) 0000 which will not add any extra permission bits to a created directory\&. This operation is done after the mode mask in the parameter \fIdirectory mask\fR is applied\&. - - -See also the parameter \fI directory mask\fR for details on masking mode bits on created directories\&. - - -See also the \fI inherit permissions\fR parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBforce directory mode = 000\fR - - -Example: \fBforce directory mode = 0755\fR - - -would force all created directories to have read and execute permissions set for 'group' and 'other' as well as the read/write/execute bits set for the 'user'\&. - - -.TP -force directory security mode (S) -This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog box\&. - - -This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this mask that the user may have modified to be on\&. Essentially, one bits in this mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security on a directory, the user has always set to be 'on'\&. - - -If not set explicitly this parameter is 000, which allows a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a directory without restrictions\&. - - -\fBNote\fR that users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems\&. Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave it set as 0000\&. - - -See also the \fI directory security mask\fR, \fIsecurity mask\fR, \fIforce security mode \fR parameters\&. - - -Default: \fBforce directory security mode = 0\fR - - -Example: \fBforce directory security mode = 700\fR - - -.TP -force group (S) -This specifies a UNIX group name that will be assigned as the default primary group for all users connecting to this service\&. This is useful for sharing files by ensuring that all access to files on service will use the named group for their permissions checking\&. Thus, by assigning permissions for this group to the files and directories within this service the Samba administrator can restrict or allow sharing of these files\&. - - -In Samba 2\&.0\&.5 and above this parameter has extended functionality in the following way\&. If the group name listed here has a '+' character prepended to it then the current user accessing the share only has the primary group default assigned to this group if they are already assigned as a member of that group\&. This allows an administrator to decide that only users who are already in a particular group will create files with group ownership set to that group\&. This gives a finer granularity of ownership assignment\&. For example, the setting \fIforce group = +sys\fR means that only users who are already in group sys will have their default primary group assigned to sys when accessing this Samba share\&. All other users will retain their ordinary primary group\&. - - -If the \fIforce user\fR parameter is also set the group specified in \fIforce group\fR will override the primary group set in \fIforce user\fR\&. - - -See also \fIforce user\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBno forced group\fR - - -Example: \fBforce group = agroup\fR - - -.TP -force security mode (S) -This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog box\&. - - -This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this mask that the user may have modified to be on\&. Essentially, one bits in this mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security on a file, the user has always set to be 'on'\&. - - -If not set explicitly this parameter is set to 0, and allows a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file, with no restrictions\&. - - -\fBNote\fR that users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems\&. Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave this set to 0000\&. - - -See also the \fI force directory security mode\fR, \fIdirectory security mask\fR, \fI security mask\fR parameters\&. - - -Default: \fBforce security mode = 0\fR - - -Example: \fBforce security mode = 700\fR - - -.TP -force user (S) -This specifies a UNIX user name that will be assigned as the default user for all users connecting to this service\&. This is useful for sharing files\&. You should also use it carefully as using it incorrectly can cause security problems\&. - - -This user name only gets used once a connection is established\&. Thus clients still need to connect as a valid user and supply a valid password\&. Once connected, all file operations will be performed as the "forced user", no matter what username the client connected as\&. This can be very useful\&. - - -In Samba 2\&.0\&.5 and above this parameter also causes the primary group of the forced user to be used as the primary group for all file activity\&. Prior to 2\&.0\&.5 the primary group was left as the primary group of the connecting user (this was a bug)\&. - - -See also \fIforce group\fR - - -Default: \fBno forced user\fR - - -Example: \fBforce user = auser\fR - - -.TP -fstype (S) -This parameter allows the administrator to configure the string that specifies the type of filesystem a share is using that is reported by \fBsmbd\fR(8) when a client queries the filesystem type for a share\&. The default type is \fBNTFS\fR for compatibility with Windows NT but this can be changed to other strings such as \fBSamba\fR or \fBFAT \fR if required\&. - - -Default: \fBfstype = NTFS\fR - - -Example: \fBfstype = Samba\fR - - -.TP -get quota command (G) -The \fBget quota command\fR should only be used whenever there is no operating system API available from the OS that samba can use\&. - - -This parameter should specify the path to a script that queries the quota information for the specified user/group for the partition that the specified directory is on\&. - - -Such a script should take 3 arguments: - - -directory - -type of query - -uid of user or gid of group - -The type of query can be one of : - - -1 - user quotas - -2 - user default quotas (uid = -1) - -3 - group quotas - -4 - group default quotas (gid = -1) - -This script should print its output according to the following format: - - -Line 1 - quota flags (0 = no quotas, 1 = quotas enabled, 2 = quotas enabled and enforced) - -Line 2 - number of currently used blocks - -Line 3 - the softlimit number of blocks - -Line 4 - the hardlimit number of blocks - -Line 5 - currently used number of inodes - -Line 6 - the softlimit number of inodes - -Line 7 - the hardlimit number of inodes - -Line 8(optional) - the number of bytes in a block(default is 1024) - -See also the \fIset quota command\fR parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBget quota command = \fR - - -Example: \fBget quota command = /usr/local/sbin/query_quota\fR - - -.TP -getwd cache (G) -This is a tuning option\&. When this is enabled a caching algorithm will be used to reduce the time taken for getwd() calls\&. This can have a significant impact on performance, especially when the \fIwide links\fR parameter is set to \fBno\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBgetwd cache = yes\fR - - -.TP -group (S) -Synonym for \fIforce group\fR\&. - - -.TP -guest account (G,S) -This is a username which will be used for access to services which are specified as \fI guest ok\fR (see below)\&. Whatever privileges this user has will be available to any client connecting to the guest service\&. Typically this user will exist in the password file, but will not have a valid login\&. The user account "ftp" is often a good choice for this parameter\&. If a username is specified in a given service, the specified username overrides this one\&. - - -One some systems the default guest account "nobody" may not be able to print\&. Use another account in this case\&. You should test this by trying to log in as your guest user (perhaps by using the \fBsu -\fR command) and trying to print using the system print command such as \fBlpr(1)\fR or \fB lp(1)\fR\&. - - -This parameter does not accept % macros, because many parts of the system require this value to be constant for correct operation\&. - - -Default: \fBspecified at compile time, usually "nobody"\fR - - -Example: \fBguest account = ftp\fR - - -.TP -guest ok (S) -If this parameter is \fByes\fR for a service, then no password is required to connect to the service\&. Privileges will be those of the \fI guest account\fR\&. - - -This paramater nullifies the benifits of setting \fIrestrict anonymous\fR = 2 - - -See the section below on \fI security\fR for more information about this option\&. - - -Default: \fBguest ok = no\fR - - -.TP -guest only (S) -If this parameter is \fByes\fR for a service, then only guest connections to the service are permitted\&. This parameter will have no effect if \fIguest ok\fR is not set for the service\&. - - -See the section below on \fI security\fR for more information about this option\&. - - -Default: \fBguest only = no\fR - - -.TP -hide dot files (S) -This is a boolean parameter that controls whether files starting with a dot appear as hidden files\&. - - -Default: \fBhide dot files = yes\fR - - -.TP -hide files (S) -This is a list of files or directories that are not visible but are accessible\&. The DOS 'hidden' attribute is applied to any files or directories that match\&. - - -Each entry in the list must be separated by a '/', which allows spaces to be included in the entry\&. '*' and '?' can be used to specify multiple files or directories as in DOS wildcards\&. - - -Each entry must be a Unix path, not a DOS path and must not include the Unix directory separator '/'\&. - - -Note that the case sensitivity option is applicable in hiding files\&. - - -Setting this parameter will affect the performance of Samba, as it will be forced to check all files and directories for a match as they are scanned\&. - - -See also \fIhide dot files\fR, \fI veto files\fR and \fIcase sensitive\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBno file are hidden\fR - - -Example: \fBhide files = /.*/DesktopFolderDB/TrashFor%m/resource.frk/\fR - - -The above example is based on files that the Macintosh SMB client (DAVE) available from Thursby creates for internal use, and also still hides all files beginning with a dot\&. - - -.TP -hide local users (G) -This parameter toggles the hiding of local UNIX users (root, wheel, floppy, etc) from remote clients\&. - - -Default: \fBhide local users = no\fR - - -.TP -hide special files (S) -This parameter prevents clients from seeing special files such as sockets, devices and fifo's in directory listings\&. - - -Default: \fBhide special files = no\fR - - -.TP -hide unreadable (S) -This parameter prevents clients from seeing the existance of files that cannot be read\&. Defaults to off\&. - - -Default: \fBhide unreadable = no\fR - - -.TP -hide unwriteable files (S) -This parameter prevents clients from seeing the existance of files that cannot be written to\&. Defaults to off\&. Note that unwriteable directories are shown as usual\&. - - -Default: \fBhide unwriteable = no\fR - - -.TP -homedir map (G) -If\fInis homedir \fR is \fByes\fR, and \fBsmbd\fR(8) is also acting as a Win95/98 \fIlogon server\fR then this parameter specifies the NIS (or YP) map from which the server for the user's home directory should be extracted\&. At present, only the Sun auto\&.home map format is understood\&. The form of the map is: - - -\fBusername server:/some/file/system\fR - - -and the program will extract the servername from before the first ':'\&. There should probably be a better parsing system that copes with different map formats and also Amd (another automounter) maps\&. - - -A working NIS client is required on the system for this option to work\&. - -See also \fInis homedir\fR , \fIdomain logons\fR \&. - - -Default: \fBhomedir map = <empty string>\fR - - -Example: \fBhomedir map = amd.homedir\fR - - -.TP -host msdfs (G) -If set to \fByes\fR, Samba will act as a Dfs server, and allow Dfs-aware clients to browse Dfs trees hosted on the server\&. - - -See also the \fI msdfs root\fR share level parameter\&. For more information on setting up a Dfs tree on Samba, refer to ???\&. - - -Default: \fBhost msdfs = no\fR - - -.TP -hostname lookups (G) -Specifies whether samba should use (expensive) hostname lookups or use the ip addresses instead\&. An example place where hostname lookups are currently used is when checking the \fBhosts deny\fR and \fBhosts allow\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBhostname lookups = yes\fR - - -Example: \fBhostname lookups = no\fR - - -.TP -hosts allow (S) -A synonym for this parameter is \fIallow hosts\fR\&. - - -This parameter is a comma, space, or tab delimited set of hosts which are permitted to access a service\&. - - -If specified in the [global] section then it will apply to all services, regardless of whether the individual service has a different setting\&. - - -You can specify the hosts by name or IP number\&. For example, you could restrict access to only the hosts on a Class C subnet with something like \fBallow hosts = 150.203.5. \fR\&. The full syntax of the list is described in the man page \fIhosts_access(5)\fR\&. Note that this man page may not be present on your system, so a brief description will be given here also\&. - - -Note that the localhost address 127\&.0\&.0\&.1 will always be allowed access unless specifically denied by a \fIhosts deny\fR option\&. - - -You can also specify hosts by network/netmask pairs and by netgroup names if your system supports netgroups\&. The \fBEXCEPT\fR keyword can also be used to limit a wildcard list\&. The following examples may provide some help: - - -Example 1: allow all IPs in 150\&.203\&.*\&.*; except one - - -\fBhosts allow = 150.203. EXCEPT 150.203.6.66\fR - - -Example 2: allow hosts that match the given network/netmask - - -\fBhosts allow = 150.203.15.0/255.255.255.0\fR - - -Example 3: allow a couple of hosts - - -\fBhosts allow = lapland, arvidsjaur\fR - - -Example 4: allow only hosts in NIS netgroup "foonet", but deny access from one particular host - - -\fBhosts allow = @foonet\fR - - -\fBhosts deny = pirate\fR - - -Note that access still requires suitable user-level passwords\&. - -See \fBtestparm\fR(1) for a way of testing your host access to see if it does what you expect\&. - - -Default: \fBnone (i\&.e\&., all hosts permitted access)\fR - - -Example: \fBallow hosts = 150.203.5. myhost.mynet.edu.au\fR - - -.TP -hosts deny (S) -The opposite of \fIhosts allow\fR - hosts listed here are \fBNOT\fR permitted access to services unless the specific services have their own lists to override this one\&. Where the lists conflict, the \fIallow\fR list takes precedence\&. - - -Default: \fBnone (i\&.e\&., no hosts specifically excluded)\fR - - -Example: \fBhosts deny = 150.203.4. badhost.mynet.edu.au\fR - - -.TP -hosts equiv (G) -If this global parameter is a non-null string, it specifies the name of a file to read for the names of hosts and users who will be allowed access without specifying a password\&. - - -This is not be confused with \fIhosts allow\fR which is about hosts access to services and is more useful for guest services\&. \fI hosts equiv\fR may be useful for NT clients which will not supply passwords to Samba\&. - - -The use of \fIhosts equiv \fR can be a major security hole\&. This is because you are trusting the PC to supply the correct username\&. It is very easy to get a PC to supply a false username\&. I recommend that the \fIhosts equiv\fR option be only used if you really know what you are doing, or perhaps on a home network where you trust your spouse and kids\&. And only if you \fBreally\fR trust them :-)\&. - -Default: \fBno host equivalences\fR - - -Example: \fBhosts equiv = /etc/hosts.equiv\fR - - -.TP -idmap backend (G) -The purpose of the idmap backend parameter is to allow idmap to NOT use the local idmap tdb file to obtain SID to UID / GID mappings, but instead to obtain them from a common LDAP backend\&. This way all domain members and controllers will have the same UID and GID to SID mappings\&. This avoids the risk of UID / GID inconsistencies across UNIX / Linux systems that are sharing information over protocols other than SMB/CIFS (ie: NFS)\&. - - -Default: \fBidmap backend = <empty string>\fR - - -Example: \fBidmap backend = ldap:ldap://ldapslave.example.com\fR - - -.TP -idmap gid (G) -The idmap gid parameter specifies the range of group ids that are allocated for the purpose of mapping UNX groups to NT group SIDs\&. This range of group ids should have no existing local or NIS groups within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise\&. - - -The availability of an idmap gid range is essential for correct operation of all group mapping\&. - - -Default: \fBidmap gid = <empty string>\fR - - -Example: \fBidmap gid = 10000-20000\fR - - -.TP -idmap uid (G) -The idmap uid parameter specifies the range of user ids that are allocated for use in mapping UNIX users to NT user SIDs\&. This range of ids should have no existing local or NIS users within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise\&. - - -Default: \fBidmap uid = <empty string>\fR - - -Example: \fBidmap uid = 10000-20000\fR - - -.TP -include (G) -This allows you to include one config file inside another\&. The file is included literally, as though typed in place\&. - - -It takes the standard substitutions, except \fI%u \fR, \fI%P\fR and \fI%S\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBno file included\fR - - -Example: \fBinclude = /usr/local/samba/lib/admin_smb.conf\fR - - -.TP -inherit acls (S) -This parameter can be used to ensure that if default acls exist on parent directories, they are always honored when creating a subdirectory\&. The default behavior is to use the mode specified when creating the directory\&. Enabling this option sets the mode to 0777, thus guaranteeing that default directory acls are propagated\&. - - -Default: \fBinherit acls = no\fR - - -.TP -inherit permissions (S) -The permissions on new files and directories are normally governed by \fI create mask\fR, \fIdirectory mask\fR, \fIforce create mode\fR and \fIforce directory mode\fR but the boolean inherit permissions parameter overrides this\&. - - -New directories inherit the mode of the parent directory, including bits such as setgid\&. - - -New files inherit their read/write bits from the parent directory\&. Their execute bits continue to be determined by \fImap archive\fR , \fImap hidden\fR and \fImap system\fR as usual\&. - - -Note that the setuid bit is \fBnever\fR set via inheritance (the code explicitly prohibits this)\&. - - -This can be particularly useful on large systems with many users, perhaps several thousand, to allow a single [homes] share to be used flexibly by each user\&. - - -See also \fIcreate mask \fR, \fI directory mask\fR, \fIforce create mode\fR and \fIforce directory mode\fR \&. - - -Default: \fBinherit permissions = no\fR - - -.TP -interfaces (G) -This option allows you to override the default network interfaces list that Samba will use for browsing, name registration and other NBT traffic\&. By default Samba will query the kernel for the list of all active interfaces and use any interfaces except 127\&.0\&.0\&.1 that are broadcast capable\&. - - -The option takes a list of interface strings\&. Each string can be in any of the following forms: - - -a network interface name (such as eth0)\&. This may include shell-like wildcards so eth* will match any interface starting with the substring "eth" - -an IP address\&. In this case the netmask is determined from the list of interfaces obtained from the kernel - -an IP/mask pair\&. - -a broadcast/mask pair\&. - -The "mask" parameters can either be a bit length (such as 24 for a C class network) or a full netmask in dotted decimal form\&. - - -The "IP" parameters above can either be a full dotted decimal IP address or a hostname which will be looked up via the OS's normal hostname resolution mechanisms\&. - - -For example, the following line: - - -\fBinterfaces = eth0 192.168.2.10/24 192.168.3.10/255.255.255.0\fR - - -would configure three network interfaces corresponding to the eth0 device and IP addresses 192\&.168\&.2\&.10 and 192\&.168\&.3\&.10\&. The netmasks of the latter two interfaces would be set to 255\&.255\&.255\&.0\&. - - -See also \fIbind interfaces only\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBall active interfaces except 127\&.0\&.0\&.1 that are broadcast capable\fR - - -.TP -invalid users (S) -This is a list of users that should not be allowed to login to this service\&. This is really a \fBparanoid\fR check to absolutely ensure an improper setting does not breach your security\&. - - -A name starting with a '@' is interpreted as an NIS netgroup first (if your system supports NIS), and then as a UNIX group if the name was not found in the NIS netgroup database\&. - - -A name starting with '+' is interpreted only by looking in the UNIX group database\&. A name starting with '&' is interpreted only by looking in the NIS netgroup database (this requires NIS to be working on your system)\&. The characters '+' and '&' may be used at the start of the name in either order so the value \fI+&group\fR means check the UNIX group database, followed by the NIS netgroup database, and the value \fI&+group\fR means check the NIS netgroup database, followed by the UNIX group database (the same as the '@' prefix)\&. - - -The current servicename is substituted for \fI%S\fR\&. This is useful in the [homes] section\&. - - -See also \fIvalid users \fR\&. - - -Default: \fBno invalid users\fR - - -Example: \fBinvalid users = root fred admin @wheel\fR - - -.TP -keepalive (G) -The value of the parameter (an integer) represents the number of seconds between \fIkeepalive\fR packets\&. If this parameter is zero, no keepalive packets will be sent\&. Keepalive packets, if sent, allow the server to tell whether a client is still present and responding\&. - - -Keepalives should, in general, not be needed if the socket being used has the SO_KEEPALIVE attribute set on it (see \fIsocket options\fR)\&. Basically you should only use this option if you strike difficulties\&. - - -Default: \fBkeepalive = 300\fR - - -Example: \fBkeepalive = 600\fR - - -.TP -kernel change notify (G) -This parameter specifies whether Samba should ask the kernel for change notifications in directories so that SMB clients can refresh whenever the data on the server changes\&. - - -This parameter is only usd when your kernel supports change notification to user programs, using the F_NOTIFY fcntl\&. - - -Default: \fBYes\fR - - -.TP -kernel oplocks (G) -For UNIXes that support kernel based \fIoplocks\fR (currently only IRIX and the Linux 2\&.4 kernel), this parameter allows the use of them to be turned on or off\&. - - -Kernel oplocks support allows Samba \fIoplocks \fR to be broken whenever a local UNIX process or NFS operation accesses a file that \fBsmbd\fR(8) has oplocked\&. This allows complete data consistency between SMB/CIFS, NFS and local file access (and is a \fBvery\fR cool feature :-)\&. - - -This parameter defaults to \fBon\fR, but is translated to a no-op on systems that no not have the necessary kernel support\&. You should never need to touch this parameter\&. - - -See also the \fIoplocks\fR and \fIlevel2 oplocks \fR parameters\&. - - -Default: \fBkernel oplocks = yes\fR - - -.TP -lanman auth (G) -This parameter determines whether or not \fBsmbd\fR(8) will attempt to authenticate users using the LANMAN password hash\&. If disabled, only clients which support NT password hashes (e\&.g\&. Windows NT/2000 clients, smbclient, etc\&.\&.\&. but not Windows 95/98 or the MS DOS network client) will be able to connect to the Samba host\&. - - -The LANMAN encrypted response is easily broken, due to it's case-insensitive nature, and the choice of algorithm\&. Servers without Windows 95/98 or MS DOS clients are advised to disable this option\&. - - -Unlike the \fBencypt passwords\fR option, this parameter cannot alter client behaviour, and the LANMAN response will still be sent over the network\&. See the \fBclient lanman auth\fR to disable this for Samba's clients (such as smbclient) - - -If this option, and \fBntlm auth\fR are both disabled, then only NTLMv2 logins will be permited\&. Not all clients support NTLMv2, and most will require special configuration to us it\&. - - -Default : \fBlanman auth = yes\fR - - -.TP -large readwrite (G) -This parameter determines whether or not \fBsmbd\fR(8) supports the new 64k streaming read and write varient SMB requests introduced with Windows 2000\&. Note that due to Windows 2000 client redirector bugs this requires Samba to be running on a 64-bit capable operating system such as IRIX, Solaris or a Linux 2\&.4 kernel\&. Can improve performance by 10% with Windows 2000 clients\&. Defaults to on\&. Not as tested as some other Samba code paths\&. - - -Default: \fBlarge readwrite = yes\fR - - -.TP -ldap admin dn (G) -The \fIldap admin dn\fR defines the Distinguished Name (DN) name used by Samba to contact the ldap server when retreiving user account information\&. The \fIldap admin dn\fR is used in conjunction with the admin dn password stored in the \fIprivate/secrets\&.tdb\fR file\&. See the \fBsmbpasswd\fR(8) man page for more information on how to accmplish this\&. - - -.TP -ldap delete dn (G) -This parameter specifies whether a delete operation in the ldapsam deletes the complete entry or only the attributes specific to Samba\&. - - -Default: \fBldap delete dn = no\fR - - -.TP -ldap filter (G) -This parameter specifies the RFC 2254 compliant LDAP search filter\&. The default is to match the login name with the \fBuid\fR attribute for all entries matching the \fBsambaAccount\fR objectclass\&. Note that this filter should only return one entry\&. - - -Default: \fBldap filter = (&(uid=%u)(objectclass=sambaAccount))\fR - - -.TP -ldap group suffix (G) -This parameters specifies the suffix that is used for groups when these are added to the LDAP directory\&. If this parameter is unset, the value of \fIldap suffix\fR will be used instead\&. - - -Default: \fBnone\fR - - -Example: \fBdc=samba,ou=Groups\fR - - -.TP -ldap idmap suffix (G) -This parameters specifies the suffix that is used when storing idmap mappings\&. If this parameter is unset, the value of \fIldap suffix\fR will be used instead\&. - - -Default: \fBnone\fR - - -Example: \fBou=Idmap,dc=samba,dc=org\fR - - -.TP -ldap machine suffix (G) -It specifies where machines should be added to the ldap tree\&. - - -Default: \fBnone\fR - - -.TP -ldap passwd sync (G) -This option is used to define whether or not Samba should sync the LDAP password with the NT and LM hashes for normal accounts (NOT for workstation, server or domain trusts) on a password change via SAMBA\&. - - -The \fIldap passwd sync\fR can be set to one of three values: - - -\fIYes\fR = Try to update the LDAP, NT and LM passwords and update the pwdLastSet time\&. - -\fINo\fR = Update NT and LM passwords and update the pwdLastSet time\&. - -\fIOnly\fR = Only update the LDAP password and let the LDAP server do the rest\&. - -Default: \fBldap passwd sync = no\fR - - -.TP -ldap port (G) -This parameter is only available if Samba has been configure to include the \fB--with-ldapsam\fR option at compile time\&. - - -This option is used to control the tcp port number used to contact the \fIldap server\fR\&. The default is to use the stand LDAPS port 636\&. - - -See Also: ldap ssl - - -Default : \fBldap port = 636 ; if ldap ssl = on\fR - - -Default : \fBldap port = 389 ; if ldap ssl = off\fR - - -.TP -ldap server (G) -This parameter is only available if Samba has been configure to include the \fB--with-ldapsam\fR option at compile time\&. - - -This parameter should contain the FQDN of the ldap directory server which should be queried to locate user account information\&. - - -Default : \fBldap server = localhost\fR - - -.TP -ldap ssl (G) -This option is used to define whether or not Samba should use SSL when connecting to the ldap server This is \fBNOT\fR related to Samba's previous SSL support which was enabled by specifying the \fB--with-ssl\fR option to the \fIconfigure\fR script\&. - - -The \fIldap ssl\fR can be set to one of three values: - - -\fIOff\fR = Never use SSL when querying the directory\&. - -\fIStart_tls\fR = Use the LDAPv3 StartTLS extended operation (RFC2830) for communicating with the directory server\&. - -\fIOn\fR = Use SSL on the ldaps port when contacting the \fIldap server\fR\&. Only available when the backwards-compatiblity \fB--with-ldapsam\fR option is specified to configure\&. See \fIpassdb backend\fR - -Default : \fBldap ssl = start_tls\fR - - -.TP -ldap suffix (G) -Specifies where user and machine accounts are added to the tree\&. Can be overriden by \fBldap user suffix\fR and \fBldap machine suffix\fR\&. It also used as the base dn for all ldap searches\&. - - -Default: \fBnone\fR - - -.TP -ldap user suffix (G) -This parameter specifies where users are added to the tree\&. If this parameter is not specified, the value from \fBldap suffix\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBnone\fR - - -.TP -level2 oplocks (S) -This parameter controls whether Samba supports level2 (read-only) oplocks on a share\&. - - -Level2, or read-only oplocks allow Windows NT clients that have an oplock on a file to downgrade from a read-write oplock to a read-only oplock once a second client opens the file (instead of releasing all oplocks on a second open, as in traditional, exclusive oplocks)\&. This allows all openers of the file that support level2 oplocks to cache the file for read-ahead only (ie\&. they may not cache writes or lock requests) and increases performance for many accesses of files that are not commonly written (such as application \&.EXE files)\&. - - -Once one of the clients which have a read-only oplock writes to the file all clients are notified (no reply is needed or waited for) and told to break their oplocks to "none" and delete any read-ahead caches\&. - - -It is recommended that this parameter be turned on to speed access to shared executables\&. - - -For more discussions on level2 oplocks see the CIFS spec\&. - - -Currently, if \fIkernel oplocks\fR are supported then level2 oplocks are not granted (even if this parameter is set to \fByes\fR)\&. Note also, the \fIoplocks\fR parameter must be set to \fByes\fR on this share in order for this parameter to have any effect\&. - - -See also the \fIoplocks\fR and \fIkernel oplocks\fR parameters\&. - - -Default: \fBlevel2 oplocks = yes\fR - - -.TP -lm announce (G) -This parameter determines if \fBnmbd\fR(8) will produce Lanman announce broadcasts that are needed by OS/2 clients in order for them to see the Samba server in their browse list\&. This parameter can have three values, \fByes\fR, \fBno\fR, or \fBauto\fR\&. The default is \fBauto\fR\&. If set to \fBno\fR Samba will never produce these broadcasts\&. If set to \fByes\fR Samba will produce Lanman announce broadcasts at a frequency set by the parameter \fIlm interval\fR\&. If set to \fBauto\fR Samba will not send Lanman announce broadcasts by default but will listen for them\&. If it hears such a broadcast on the wire it will then start sending them at a frequency set by the parameter \fIlm interval\fR\&. - - -See also \fIlm interval\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBlm announce = auto\fR - - -Example: \fBlm announce = yes\fR - - -.TP -lm interval (G) -If Samba is set to produce Lanman announce broadcasts needed by OS/2 clients (see the \fIlm announce\fR parameter) then this parameter defines the frequency in seconds with which they will be made\&. If this is set to zero then no Lanman announcements will be made despite the setting of the \fIlm announce\fR parameter\&. - - -See also \fIlm announce\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBlm interval = 60\fR - - -Example: \fBlm interval = 120\fR - - -.TP -load printers (G) -A boolean variable that controls whether all printers in the printcap will be loaded for browsing by default\&. See the printers section for more details\&. - - -Default: \fBload printers = yes\fR - - -.TP -local master (G) -This option allows \fBnmbd\fR(8) to try and become a local master browser on a subnet\&. If set to \fBno\fR then \fB nmbd\fR will not attempt to become a local master browser on a subnet and will also lose in all browsing elections\&. By default this value is set to \fByes\fR\&. Setting this value to \fByes\fR doesn't mean that Samba will \fBbecome\fR the local master browser on a subnet, just that \fBnmbd\fR will \fBparticipate\fR in elections for local master browser\&. - - -Setting this value to \fBno\fR will cause \fBnmbd\fR \fBnever\fR to become a local master browser\&. - - -Default: \fBlocal master = yes\fR - - -.TP -lock dir (G) -Synonym for \fI lock directory\fR\&. - - -.TP -lock directory (G) -This option specifies the directory where lock files will be placed\&. The lock files are used to implement the \fImax connections\fR option\&. - - -Default: \fBlock directory = ${prefix}/var/locks\fR - - -Example: \fBlock directory = /var/run/samba/locks\fR - - -.TP -locking (S) -This controls whether or not locking will be performed by the server in response to lock requests from the client\&. - - -If \fBlocking = no\fR, all lock and unlock requests will appear to succeed and all lock queries will report that the file in question is available for locking\&. - - -If \fBlocking = yes\fR, real locking will be performed by the server\&. - - -This option \fBmay\fR be useful for read-only filesystems which \fBmay\fR not need locking (such as CDROM drives), although setting this parameter of \fBno\fR is not really recommended even in this case\&. - - -Be careful about disabling locking either globally or in a specific service, as lack of locking may result in data corruption\&. You should never need to set this parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBlocking = yes\fR - - -.TP -lock spin count (G) -This parameter controls the number of times that smbd should attempt to gain a byte range lock on the behalf of a client request\&. Experiments have shown that Windows 2k servers do not reply with a failure if the lock could not be immediately granted, but try a few more times in case the lock could later be aquired\&. This behavior is used to support PC database formats such as MS Access and FoxPro\&. - - -Default: \fBlock spin count = 3\fR - - -.TP -lock spin time (G) -The time in microseconds that smbd should pause before attempting to gain a failed lock\&. See \fIlock spin count\fR for more details\&. - - -Default: \fBlock spin time = 10\fR - - -.TP -log file (G) -This option allows you to override the name of the Samba log file (also known as the debug file)\&. - - -This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate log files for each user or machine\&. - - -Example: \fBlog file = /usr/local/samba/var/log.%m\fR - - -.TP -log level (G) -The value of the parameter (a astring) allows the debug level (logging level) to be specified in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. This parameter has been extended since the 2\&.2\&.x series, now it allow to specify the debug level for multiple debug classes\&. This is to give greater flexibility in the configuration of the system\&. - - -The default will be the log level specified on the command line or level zero if none was specified\&. - - -Example: \fBlog level = 3 passdb:5 auth:10 winbind:2\fR - - -.TP -logon drive (G) -This parameter specifies the local path to which the home directory will be connected (see \fIlogon home\fR) and is only used by NT Workstations\&. - - -Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon server\&. - - -Default: \fBlogon drive = z:\fR - - -Example: \fBlogon drive = h:\fR - - -.TP -logon home (G) -This parameter specifies the home directory location when a Win95/98 or NT Workstation logs into a Samba PDC\&. It allows you to do - - -C:\\> \fBNET USE H: /HOME\fR - - -from a command prompt, for example\&. - - -This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine\&. - - -This parameter can be used with Win9X workstations to ensure that roaming profiles are stored in a subdirectory of the user's home directory\&. This is done in the following way: - - -\fBlogon home = \\%N\%U\profile\fR - - -This tells Samba to return the above string, with substitutions made when a client requests the info, generally in a NetUserGetInfo request\&. Win9X clients truncate the info to \\\\server\\share when a user does \fBnet use /home\fR but use the whole string when dealing with profiles\&. - - -Note that in prior versions of Samba, the \fIlogon path\fR was returned rather than \fIlogon home\fR\&. This broke \fBnet use /home\fR but allowed profiles outside the home directory\&. The current implementation is correct, and can be used for profiles if you use the above trick\&. - - -This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon server\&. - - -Default: \fBlogon home = "\\%N\%U"\fR - - -Example: \fBlogon home = "\\remote_smb_server\%U"\fR - - -.TP -logon path (G) -This parameter specifies the home directory where roaming profiles (NTuser\&.dat etc files for Windows NT) are stored\&. Contrary to previous versions of these manual pages, it has nothing to do with Win 9X roaming profiles\&. To find out how to handle roaming profiles for Win 9X system, see the \fIlogon home\fR parameter\&. - - -This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine\&. It also specifies the directory from which the "Application Data", (\fIdesktop\fR, \fIstart menu\fR, \fInetwork neighborhood\fR, \fIprograms\fR and other folders, and their contents, are loaded and displayed on your Windows NT client\&. - - -The share and the path must be readable by the user for the preferences and directories to be loaded onto the Windows NT client\&. The share must be writeable when the user logs in for the first time, in order that the Windows NT client can create the NTuser\&.dat and other directories\&. - - -Thereafter, the directories and any of the contents can, if required, be made read-only\&. It is not advisable that the NTuser\&.dat file be made read-only - rename it to NTuser\&.man to achieve the desired effect (a \fBMAN\fRdatory profile)\&. - - -Windows clients can sometimes maintain a connection to the [homes] share, even though there is no user logged in\&. Therefore, it is vital that the logon path does not include a reference to the homes share (i\&.e\&. setting this parameter to \\%N\\%U\\profile_path will cause problems)\&. - - -This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine\&. - - -Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon server\&. - - -Default: \fBlogon path = \\%N\%U\profile\fR - - -Example: \fBlogon path = \\PROFILESERVER\PROFILE\%U\fR - - -.TP -logon script (G) -This parameter specifies the batch file (\&.bat) or NT command file (\&.cmd) to be downloaded and run on a machine when a user successfully logs in\&. The file must contain the DOS style CR/LF line endings\&. Using a DOS-style editor to create the file is recommended\&. - - -The script must be a relative path to the [netlogon] service\&. If the [netlogon] service specifies a \fIpath\fR of \fI/usr/local/samba/netlogon\fR, and \fBlogon script = STARTUP.BAT\fR, then the file that will be downloaded is: - - -\fI/usr/local/samba/netlogon/STARTUP\&.BAT\fR - - -The contents of the batch file are entirely your choice\&. A - suggested command would be to add \fBNET TIME \\SERVER /SET - /YES\fR, to force every machine to synchronize clocks with - the same time server\&. Another use would be to add \fBNET USE - U: \\SERVER\UTILS\fR for commonly used utilities, or .nf - - \fBNET USE Q: \\\\SERVER\\ISO9001_QA\fR.fi - for example\&. - -Note that it is particularly important not to allow write access to the [netlogon] share, or to grant users write permission on the batch files in a secure environment, as this would allow the batch files to be arbitrarily modified and security to be breached\&. - - -This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine\&. - - -This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon server\&. - - -Default: \fBno logon script defined\fR - - -Example: \fBlogon script = scripts\%U.bat\fR - - -.TP -lppause command (S) -This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to stop printing or spooling a specific print job\&. - - -This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name and job number to pause the print job\&. One way of implementing this is by using job priorities, where jobs having a too low priority won't be sent to the printer\&. - - -If a \fI%p\fR is given then the printer name is put in its place\&. A \fI%j\fR is replaced with the job number (an integer)\&. On HPUX (see \fIprinting=hpux \fR), if the \fI-p%p\fR option is added to the lpq command, the job will show up with the correct status, i\&.e\&. if the job priority is lower than the set fence priority it will have the PAUSED status, whereas if the priority is equal or higher it will have the SPOOLED or PRINTING status\&. - - -Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the lppause command as the PATH may not be available to the server\&. - - -See also the \fIprinting \fR parameter\&. - - -Default: Currently no default value is given to this string, unless the value of the \fIprinting\fR parameter is \fBSYSV\fR, in which case the default is : - - -\fBlp -i %p-%j -H hold\fR - - -or if the value of the \fIprinting\fR parameter is \fBSOFTQ\fR, then the default is: - - -\fBqstat -s -j%j -h\fR - - -Example for HPUX: \fBlppause command = /usr/bin/lpalt %p-%j -p0\fR - - -.TP -lpq cache time (G) -This controls how long lpq info will be cached for to prevent the \fBlpq\fR command being called too often\&. A separate cache is kept for each variation of the \fB lpq\fR command used by the system, so if you use different \fBlpq\fR commands for different users then they won't share cache information\&. - - -The cache files are stored in \fI/tmp/lpq\&.xxxx\fR where xxxx is a hash of the \fBlpq\fR command in use\&. - - -The default is 10 seconds, meaning that the cached results of a previous identical \fBlpq\fR command will be used if the cached data is less than 10 seconds old\&. A large value may be advisable if your \fBlpq\fR command is very slow\&. - - -A value of 0 will disable caching completely\&. - - -See also the \fIprinting\fR parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBlpq cache time = 10\fR - - -Example: \fBlpq cache time = 30\fR - - -.TP -lpq command (S) -This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to obtain \fBlpq \fR-style printer status information\&. - - -This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name as its only parameter and outputs printer status information\&. - - -Currently nine styles of printer status information are supported; BSD, AIX, LPRNG, PLP, SYSV, HPUX, QNX, CUPS, and SOFTQ\&. This covers most UNIX systems\&. You control which type is expected using the \fIprinting =\fR option\&. - - -Some clients (notably Windows for Workgroups) may not correctly send the connection number for the printer they are requesting status information about\&. To get around this, the server reports on the first printer service connected to by the client\&. This only happens if the connection number sent is invalid\&. - - -If a \fI%p\fR is given then the printer name is put in its place\&. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command\&. - - -Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the \fIlpq command\fR as the \fB$PATH \fR may not be available to the server\&. When compiled with the CUPS libraries, no \fIlpq command\fR is needed because smbd will make a library call to obtain the print queue listing\&. - - -See also the \fIprinting \fR parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBdepends on the setting of \fI printing\fR\fR - - -Example: \fBlpq command = /usr/bin/lpq -P%p\fR - - -.TP -lpresume command (S) -This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to restart or continue printing or spooling a specific print job\&. - - -This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name and job number to resume the print job\&. See also the \fIlppause command \fR parameter\&. - - -If a \fI%p\fR is given then the printer name is put in its place\&. A \fI%j\fR is replaced with the job number (an integer)\&. - - -Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the \fIlpresume command\fR as the PATH may not be available to the server\&. - - -See also the \fIprinting \fR parameter\&. - - -Default: Currently no default value is given to this string, unless the value of the \fIprinting\fR parameter is \fBSYSV\fR, in which case the default is : - - -\fBlp -i %p-%j -H resume\fR - - -or if the value of the \fIprinting\fR parameter is \fBSOFTQ\fR, then the default is: - - -\fBqstat -s -j%j -r\fR - - -Example for HPUX: \fBlpresume command = /usr/bin/lpalt %p-%j -p2\fR - - -.TP -lprm command (S) -This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to delete a print job\&. - - -This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name and job number, and deletes the print job\&. - - -If a \fI%p\fR is given then the printer name is put in its place\&. A \fI%j\fR is replaced with the job number (an integer)\&. - - -Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the \fIlprm command\fR as the PATH may not be available to the server\&. - - -See also the \fIprinting \fR parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBdepends on the setting of \fIprinting \fR\fR - - -Example 1: \fBlprm command = /usr/bin/lprm -P%p %j\fR - - -Example 2: \fBlprm command = /usr/bin/cancel %p-%j\fR - - -.TP -machine password timeout (G) -If a Samba server is a member of a Windows NT Domain (see the security = domain) parameter) then periodically a running smbd process will try and change the MACHINE ACCOUNT PASSWORD stored in the TDB called \fIprivate/secrets\&.tdb \fR\&. This parameter specifies how often this password will be changed, in seconds\&. The default is one week (expressed in seconds), the same as a Windows NT Domain member server\&. - - -See also \fBsmbpasswd\fR(8), and the security = domain) parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBmachine password timeout = 604800\fR - - -.TP -magic output (S) -This parameter specifies the name of a file which will contain output created by a magic script (see the \fImagic script\fR parameter below)\&. - - -Warning: If two clients use the same \fImagic script \fR in the same directory the output file content is undefined\&. - - -Default: \fBmagic output = <magic script name>.out\fR - - -Example: \fBmagic output = myfile.txt\fR - - -.TP -magic script (S) -This parameter specifies the name of a file which, if opened, will be executed by the server when the file is closed\&. This allows a UNIX script to be sent to the Samba host and executed on behalf of the connected user\&. - - -Scripts executed in this way will be deleted upon completion assuming that the user has the appropriate level of privilege and the file permissions allow the deletion\&. - - -If the script generates output, output will be sent to the file specified by the \fI magic output\fR parameter (see above)\&. - - -Note that some shells are unable to interpret scripts containing CR/LF instead of CR as the end-of-line marker\&. Magic scripts must be executable \fBas is\fR on the host, which for some hosts and some shells will require filtering at the DOS end\&. - - -Magic scripts are \fBEXPERIMENTAL\fR and should \fBNOT\fR be relied upon\&. - - -Default: \fBNone\&. Magic scripts disabled\&.\fR - - -Example: \fBmagic script = user.csh\fR - - -.TP -mangle case (S) -See the section on NAME MANGLING - - -Default: \fBmangle case = no\fR - - -.TP -mangled map (S) -This is for those who want to directly map UNIX file names which cannot be represented on Windows/DOS\&. The mangling of names is not always what is needed\&. In particular you may have documents with file extensions that differ between DOS and UNIX\&. For example, under UNIX it is common to use \fI\&.html\fR for HTML files, whereas under Windows/DOS \fI\&.htm\fR is more commonly used\&. - - -So to map \fIhtml\fR to \fIhtm\fR you would use: - - -\fBmangled map = (*.html *.htm)\fR - - -One very useful case is to remove the annoying \fI;1 \fR off the ends of filenames on some CDROMs (only visible under some UNIXes)\&. To do this use a map of (*;1 *;)\&. - - -Default: \fBno mangled map\fR - - -Example: \fBmangled map = (*;1 *;)\fR - - -.TP -mangled names (S) -This controls whether non-DOS names under UNIX should be mapped to DOS-compatible names ("mangled") and made visible, or whether non-DOS names should simply be ignored\&. - - -See the section on NAME MANGLING for details on how to control the mangling process\&. - - -If mangling is used then the mangling algorithm is as follows: - - -The first (up to) five alphanumeric characters before the rightmost dot of the filename are preserved, forced to upper case, and appear as the first (up to) five characters of the mangled name\&. - -A tilde "~" is appended to the first part of the mangled name, followed by a two-character unique sequence, based on the original root name (i\&.e\&., the original filename minus its final extension)\&. The final extension is included in the hash calculation only if it contains any upper case characters or is longer than three characters\&. - - -Note that the character to use may be specified using the \fImangling char\fR option, if you don't like '~'\&. - -The first three alphanumeric characters of the final extension are preserved, forced to upper case and appear as the extension of the mangled name\&. The final extension is defined as that part of the original filename after the rightmost dot\&. If there are no dots in the filename, the mangled name will have no extension (except in the case of "hidden files" - see below)\&. - -Files whose UNIX name begins with a dot will be presented as DOS hidden files\&. The mangled name will be created as for other filenames, but with the leading dot removed and "___" as its extension regardless of actual original extension (that's three underscores)\&. - -The two-digit hash value consists of upper case alphanumeric characters\&. - - -This algorithm can cause name collisions only if files in a directory share the same first five alphanumeric characters\&. The probability of such a clash is 1/1300\&. - - -The name mangling (if enabled) allows a file to be copied between UNIX directories from Windows/DOS while retaining the long UNIX filename\&. UNIX files can be renamed to a new extension from Windows/DOS and will retain the same basename\&. Mangled names do not change between sessions\&. - - -Default: \fBmangled names = yes\fR - - -.TP -mangled stack (G) -This parameter controls the number of mangled names that should be cached in the Samba server \fBsmbd\fR(8)\&. - - -This stack is a list of recently mangled base names (extensions are only maintained if they are longer than 3 characters or contains upper case characters)\&. - - -The larger this value, the more likely it is that mangled names can be successfully converted to correct long UNIX names\&. However, large stack sizes will slow most directory accesses\&. Smaller stacks save memory in the server (each stack element costs 256 bytes)\&. - - -It is not possible to absolutely guarantee correct long filenames, so be prepared for some surprises! - - -Default: \fBmangled stack = 50\fR - - -Example: \fBmangled stack = 100\fR - - -.TP -mangle prefix (G) -controls the number of prefix characters from the original name used when generating the mangled names\&. A larger value will give a weaker hash and therefore more name collisions\&. The minimum value is 1 and the maximum value is 6\&. - - -mangle prefix is effective only when mangling method is hash2\&. - - -Default: \fBmangle prefix = 1\fR - - -Example: \fBmangle prefix = 4\fR - - -.TP -mangling char (S) -This controls what character is used as the \fBmagic\fR character in name mangling\&. The default is a '~' but this may interfere with some software\&. Use this option to set it to whatever you prefer\&. This is effective only when mangling method is hash\&. - - -Default: \fBmangling char = ~\fR - - -Example: \fBmangling char = ^\fR - - -.TP -mangling method (G) -controls the algorithm used for the generating the mangled names\&. Can take two different values, "hash" and "hash2"\&. "hash" is the default and is the algorithm that has been used in Samba for many years\&. "hash2" is a newer and considered a better algorithm (generates less collisions) in the names\&. However, many Win32 applications store the mangled names and so changing to the new algorithm must not be done lightly as these applications may break unless reinstalled\&. - - -Default: \fBmangling method = hash2\fR - - -Example: \fBmangling method = hash\fR - - -.TP -map acl inherit (S) -This boolean parameter controls whether \fBsmbd\fR(8) will attempt to map the 'inherit' and 'protected' access control entry flags stored in Windows ACLs into an extended attribute called user\&.SAMBA_PAI\&. This parameter only takes effect if Samba is being run on a platform that supports extended attributes (Linux and IRIX so far) and allows the Windows 2000 ACL editor to correctly use inheritance with the Samba POSIX ACL mapping code\&. - - -Default: \fBmap acl inherit = no\fR - - -.TP -map archive (S) -This controls whether the DOS archive attribute should be mapped to the UNIX owner execute bit\&. The DOS archive bit is set when a file has been modified since its last backup\&. One motivation for this option it to keep Samba/your PC from making any file it touches from becoming executable under UNIX\&. This can be quite annoying for shared source code, documents, etc\&.\&.\&. - - -Note that this requires the \fIcreate mask\fR parameter to be set such that owner execute bit is not masked out (i\&.e\&. it must include 100)\&. See the parameter \fIcreate mask\fR for details\&. - - -Default: \fBmap archive = yes\fR - - -.TP -map hidden (S) -This controls whether DOS style hidden files should be mapped to the UNIX world execute bit\&. - - -Note that this requires the \fIcreate mask\fR to be set such that the world execute bit is not masked out (i\&.e\&. it must include 001)\&. See the parameter \fIcreate mask\fR for details\&. - - -Default: \fBmap hidden = no\fR - - -.TP -map system (S) -This controls whether DOS style system files should be mapped to the UNIX group execute bit\&. - - -Note that this requires the \fIcreate mask\fR to be set such that the group execute bit is not masked out (i\&.e\&. it must include 010)\&. See the parameter \fIcreate mask\fR for details\&. - - -Default: \fBmap system = no\fR - - -.TP -map to guest (G) -This parameter is only useful in security modes other than \fIsecurity = share\fR - i\&.e\&. \fBuser\fR, \fBserver\fR, and \fBdomain\fR\&. - - -This parameter can take three different values, which tell \fBsmbd\fR(8) what to do with user login requests that don't match a valid UNIX user in some way\&. - - -The three settings are : - - -\fBNever\fR - Means user login requests with an invalid password are rejected\&. This is the default\&. - -\fBBad User\fR - Means user logins with an invalid password are rejected, unless the username does not exist, in which case it is treated as a guest login and mapped into the \fI guest account\fR\&. - -\fBBad Password\fR - Means user logins with an invalid password are treated as a guest login and mapped into the guest account\&. Note that this can cause problems as it means that any user incorrectly typing their password will be silently logged on as "guest" - and will not know the reason they cannot access files they think they should - there will have been no message given to them that they got their password wrong\&. Helpdesk services will \fBhate\fR you if you set the \fImap to guest\fR parameter this way :-)\&. - -Note that this parameter is needed to set up "Guest" share services when using \fIsecurity\fR modes other than share\&. This is because in these modes the name of the resource being requested is \fBnot\fR sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client so the server cannot make authentication decisions at the correct time (connection to the share) for "Guest" shares\&. - - -For people familiar with the older Samba releases, this parameter maps to the old compile-time setting of the \fB GUEST_SESSSETUP\fR value in local\&.h\&. - - -Default: \fBmap to guest = Never\fR - - -Example: \fBmap to guest = Bad User\fR - - -.TP -max connections (S) -This option allows the number of simultaneous connections to a service to be limited\&. If \fImax connections\fR is greater than 0 then connections will be refused if this number of connections to the service are already open\&. A value of zero mean an unlimited number of connections may be made\&. - - -Record lock files are used to implement this feature\&. The lock files will be stored in the directory specified by the \fIlock directory\fR option\&. - - -Default: \fBmax connections = 0\fR - - -Example: \fBmax connections = 10\fR - - -.TP -max disk size (G) -This option allows you to put an upper limit on the apparent size of disks\&. If you set this option to 100 then all shares will appear to be not larger than 100 MB in size\&. - - -Note that this option does not limit the amount of data you can put on the disk\&. In the above case you could still store much more than 100 MB on the disk, but if a client ever asks for the amount of free disk space or the total disk size then the result will be bounded by the amount specified in \fImax disk size\fR\&. - - -This option is primarily useful to work around bugs in some pieces of software that can't handle very large disks, particularly disks over 1GB in size\&. - - -A \fImax disk size\fR of 0 means no limit\&. - - -Default: \fBmax disk size = 0\fR - - -Example: \fBmax disk size = 1000\fR - - -.TP -max log size (G) -This option (an integer in kilobytes) specifies the max size the log file should grow to\&. Samba periodically checks the size and if it is exceeded it will rename the file, adding a \fI\&.old\fR extension\&. - - -A size of 0 means no limit\&. - - -Default: \fBmax log size = 5000\fR - - -Example: \fBmax log size = 1000\fR - - -.TP -max mux (G) -This option controls the maximum number of outstanding simultaneous SMB operations that Samba tells the client it will allow\&. You should never need to set this parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBmax mux = 50\fR - - -.TP -max open files (G) -This parameter limits the maximum number of open files that one \fBsmbd\fR(8) file serving process may have open for a client at any one time\&. The default for this parameter is set very high (10,000) as Samba uses only one bit per unopened file\&. - - -The limit of the number of open files is usually set by the UNIX per-process file descriptor limit rather than this parameter so you should never need to touch this parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBmax open files = 10000\fR - - -.TP -max print jobs (S) -This parameter limits the maximum number of jobs allowable in a Samba printer queue at any given moment\&. If this number is exceeded, \fBsmbd\fR(8) will remote "Out of Space" to the client\&. See all \fItotal print jobs\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBmax print jobs = 1000\fR - - -Example: \fBmax print jobs = 5000\fR - - -.TP -max protocol (G) -The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest protocol level that will be supported by the server\&. - - -Possible values are : - - -\fBCORE\fR: Earliest version\&. No concept of user names\&. - -\fBCOREPLUS\fR: Slight improvements on CORE for efficiency\&. - -\fBLANMAN1\fR: First \fB modern\fR version of the protocol\&. Long filename support\&. - -\fBLANMAN2\fR: Updates to Lanman1 protocol\&. - -\fBNT1\fR: Current up to date version of the protocol\&. Used by Windows NT\&. Known as CIFS\&. - -Normally this option should not be set as the automatic negotiation phase in the SMB protocol takes care of choosing the appropriate protocol\&. - - -See also \fImin protocol\fR - - -Default: \fBmax protocol = NT1\fR - - -Example: \fBmax protocol = LANMAN1\fR - - -.TP -max reported print jobs (S) -This parameter limits the maximum number of jobs displayed in a port monitor for Samba printer queue at any given moment\&. If this number is exceeded, the excess jobs will not be shown\&. A value of zero means there is no limit on the number of print jobs reported\&. See all \fItotal print jobs\fR and \fImax print jobs\fR parameters\&. - - -Default: \fBmax reported print jobs = 0\fR - - -Example: \fBmax reported print jobs = 1000\fR - - -.TP -max smbd processes (G) -This parameter limits the maximum number of \fBsmbd\fR(8) processes concurrently running on a system and is intended as a stopgap to prevent degrading service to clients in the event that the server has insufficient resources to handle more than this number of connections\&. Remember that under normal operating conditions, each user will have an \fBsmbd\fR(8) associated with him or her to handle connections to all shares from a given host\&. - - -Default: \fBmax smbd processes = 0\fR ## no limit - - -Example: \fBmax smbd processes = 1000\fR - - -.TP -max ttl (G) -This option tells \fBnmbd\fR(8) what the default 'time to live' of NetBIOS names should be (in seconds) when \fBnmbd\fR is requesting a name using either a broadcast packet or from a WINS server\&. You should never need to change this parameter\&. The default is 3 days\&. - - -Default: \fBmax ttl = 259200\fR - - -.TP -max wins ttl (G) -This option tells \fBsmbd\fR(8) when acting as a WINS server ( \fIwins support = yes\fR) what the maximum 'time to live' of NetBIOS names that \fBnmbd\fR will grant will be (in seconds)\&. You should never need to change this parameter\&. The default is 6 days (518400 seconds)\&. - - -See also the \fImin wins ttl\fR parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBmax wins ttl = 518400\fR - - -.TP -max xmit (G) -This option controls the maximum packet size that will be negotiated by Samba\&. The default is 65535, which is the maximum\&. In some cases you may find you get better performance with a smaller value\&. A value below 2048 is likely to cause problems\&. - - -Default: \fBmax xmit = 65535\fR - - -Example: \fBmax xmit = 8192\fR - - -.TP -message command (G) -This specifies what command to run when the server receives a WinPopup style message\&. - - -This would normally be a command that would deliver the message somehow\&. How this is to be done is up to your imagination\&. - - -An example is: - - -\fBmessage command = csh -c 'xedit %s;rm %s' &\fR - - -This delivers the message using \fBxedit\fR, then removes it afterwards\&. \fBNOTE THAT IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT THIS COMMAND RETURN IMMEDIATELY\fR\&. That's why I have the '&' on the end\&. If it doesn't return immediately then your PCs may freeze when sending messages (they should recover after 30 seconds, hopefully)\&. - - -All messages are delivered as the global guest user\&. The command takes the standard substitutions, although \fI %u\fR won't work (\fI%U\fR may be better in this case)\&. - - -Apart from the standard substitutions, some additional ones apply\&. In particular: - - -\fI%s\fR = the filename containing the message\&. - -\fI%t\fR = the destination that the message was sent to (probably the server name)\&. - -\fI%f\fR = who the message is from\&. - -You could make this command send mail, or whatever else takes your fancy\&. Please let us know of any really interesting ideas you have\&. - - -Here's a way of sending the messages as mail to root: - - -\fBmessage command = /bin/mail -s 'message from %f on %m' root < %s; rm %s\fR - - -If you don't have a message command then the message won't be delivered and Samba will tell the sender there was an error\&. Unfortunately WfWg totally ignores the error code and carries on regardless, saying that the message was delivered\&. - - -If you want to silently delete it then try: - - -\fBmessage command = rm %s\fR - - -Default: \fBno message command\fR - - -Example: \fBmessage command = csh -c 'xedit %s; rm %s' &\fR - - -.TP -min passwd length (G) -Synonym for \fImin password length\fR\&. - - -.TP -min password length (G) -This option sets the minimum length in characters of a plaintext password that \fBsmbd\fR will accept when performing UNIX password changing\&. - - -See also \fIunix password sync\fR, \fIpasswd program\fR and \fIpasswd chat debug\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBmin password length = 5\fR - - -.TP -min print space (S) -This sets the minimum amount of free disk space that must be available before a user will be able to spool a print job\&. It is specified in kilobytes\&. The default is 0, which means a user can always spool a print job\&. - - -See also the \fIprinting \fR parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBmin print space = 0\fR - - -Example: \fBmin print space = 2000\fR - - -.TP -min protocol (G) -The value of the parameter (a string) is the lowest SMB protocol dialect than Samba will support\&. Please refer to the \fImax protocol\fR parameter for a list of valid protocol names and a brief description of each\&. You may also wish to refer to the C source code in \fIsource/smbd/negprot\&.c\fR for a listing of known protocol dialects supported by clients\&. - - -If you are viewing this parameter as a security measure, you should also refer to the \fIlanman auth\fR parameter\&. Otherwise, you should never need to change this parameter\&. - - -Default : \fBmin protocol = CORE\fR - - -Example : \fBmin protocol = NT1\fR # disable DOS clients - - -.TP -min wins ttl (G) -This option tells \fBnmbd\fR(8) when acting as a WINS server (\fI wins support = yes\fR) what the minimum 'time to live' of NetBIOS names that \fBnmbd\fR will grant will be (in seconds)\&. You should never need to change this parameter\&. The default is 6 hours (21600 seconds)\&. - - -Default: \fBmin wins ttl = 21600\fR - - -.TP -msdfs proxy (S) -This parameter indicates that the share is a stand-in for another CIFS share whose location is specified by the value of the parameter\&. When clients attempt to connect to this share, they are redirected to the proxied share using the SMB-Dfs protocol\&. - - -Only Dfs roots can act as proxy shares\&. Take a look at the \fImsdfs root\fR and \fIhost msdfs\fR options to find out how to set up a Dfs root share\&. - - -Example: \fBmsdfs proxy = \\\\otherserver\\someshare\fR - - -.TP -msdfs root (S) -If set to \fByes\fR, Samba treats the share as a Dfs root and allows clients to browse the distributed file system tree rooted at the share directory\&. Dfs links are specified in the share directory by symbolic links of the form \fImsdfs:serverA\\\\shareA,serverB\\\\shareB\fR and so on\&. For more information on setting up a Dfs tree on Samba, refer to ???\&. - - -See also \fIhost msdfs\fR - - -Default: \fBmsdfs root = no\fR - - -.TP -name cache timeout (G) -Specifies the number of seconds it takes before entries in samba's hostname resolve cache time out\&. If the timeout is set to 0\&. the caching is disabled\&. - - -Default: \fBname cache timeout = 660\fR - - -Example: \fBname cache timeout = 0\fR - - -.TP -name resolve order (G) -This option is used by the programs in the Samba suite to determine what naming services to use and in what order to resolve host names to IP addresses\&. Its main purpose to is to control how netbios name resolution is performed\&. The option takes a space separated string of name resolution options\&. - - -The options are: "lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast"\&. They cause names to be resolved as follows: - - -\fBlmhosts\fR : Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file\&. If the line in lmhosts has no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see the lmhosts(5) for details) then any name type matches for lookup\&. - -\fBhost\fR : Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, using the system \fI/etc/hosts \fR, NIS, or DNS lookups\&. This method of name resolution is operating system depended for instance on IRIX or Solaris this may be controlled by the \fI/etc/nsswitch\&.conf\fR file\&. Note that this method is used only if the NetBIOS name type being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type or 0x1c (domain controllers)\&. The latter case is only useful for active directory domains and results in a DNS query for the SRV RR entry matching _ldap\&._tcp\&.domain\&. - -\fBwins\fR : Query a name with the IP address listed in the \fI wins server\fR parameter\&. If no WINS server has been specified this method will be ignored\&. - -\fBbcast\fR : Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces listed in the \fIinterfaces\fR parameter\&. This is the least reliable of the name resolution methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally connected subnet\&. - -Default: \fBname resolve order = lmhosts host wins bcast\fR - - -Example: \fBname resolve order = lmhosts bcast host\fR - - -This will cause the local lmhosts file to be examined first, followed by a broadcast attempt, followed by a normal system hostname lookup\&. - - -When Samba is functioning in ADS security mode (\fBsecurity = ads\fR) it is advised to use following settings for \fIname resolve order\fR: - - -\fBname resolve order = wins bcast\fR - - -DC lookups will still be done via DNS, but fallbacks to netbios names will not inundate your DNS servers with needless querys for DOMAIN<0x1c> lookups\&. - - -.TP -netbios aliases (G) -This is a list of NetBIOS names that nmbd will advertise as additional names by which the Samba server is known\&. This allows one machine to appear in browse lists under multiple names\&. If a machine is acting as a browse server or logon server none of these names will be advertised as either browse server or logon servers, only the primary name of the machine will be advertised with these capabilities\&. - - -See also \fInetbios name\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBempty string (no additional names)\fR - - -Example: \fBnetbios aliases = TEST TEST1 TEST2\fR - - -.TP -netbios name (G) -This sets the NetBIOS name by which a Samba server is known\&. By default it is the same as the first component of the host's DNS name\&. If a machine is a browse server or logon server this name (or the first component of the hosts DNS name) will be the name that these services are advertised under\&. - - -See also \fInetbios aliases\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBmachine DNS name\fR - - -Example: \fBnetbios name = MYNAME\fR - - -.TP -netbios scope (G) -This sets the NetBIOS scope that Samba will operate under\&. This should not be set unless every machine on your LAN also sets this value\&. - - -.TP -nis homedir (G) -Get the home share server from a NIS map\&. For UNIX systems that use an automounter, the user's home directory will often be mounted on a workstation on demand from a remote server\&. - - -When the Samba logon server is not the actual home directory server, but is mounting the home directories via NFS then two network hops would be required to access the users home directory if the logon server told the client to use itself as the SMB server for home directories (one over SMB and one over NFS)\&. This can be very slow\&. - - -This option allows Samba to return the home share as being on a different server to the logon server and as long as a Samba daemon is running on the home directory server, it will be mounted on the Samba client directly from the directory server\&. When Samba is returning the home share to the client, it will consult the NIS map specified in \fIhomedir map\fR and return the server listed there\&. - - -Note that for this option to work there must be a working NIS system and the Samba server with this option must also be a logon server\&. - - -Default: \fBnis homedir = no\fR - - -.TP -nt acl support (S) -This boolean parameter controls whether \fBsmbd\fR(8) will attempt to map UNIX permissions into Windows NT access control lists\&. This parameter was formally a global parameter in releases prior to 2\&.2\&.2\&. - - -Default: \fBnt acl support = yes\fR - - -.TP -ntlm auth (G) -This parameter determines whether or not \fBsmbd\fR(8) will attempt to authenticate users using the NTLM encrypted password response\&. If disabled, either the lanman password hash or an NTLMv2 response will need to be sent by the client\&. - - -If this option, and \fBlanman auth\fR are both disabled, then only NTLMv2 logins will be permited\&. Not all clients support NTLMv2, and most will require special configuration to us it\&. - - -Default : \fBntlm auth = yes\fR - - -.TP -nt pipe support (G) -This boolean parameter controls whether \fBsmbd\fR(8) will allow Windows NT clients to connect to the NT SMB specific \fBIPC$\fR pipes\&. This is a developer debugging option and can be left alone\&. - - -Default: \fBnt pipe support = yes\fR - - -.TP -nt status support (G) -This boolean parameter controls whether \fBsmbd\fR(8) will negotiate NT specific status support with Windows NT/2k/XP clients\&. This is a developer debugging option and should be left alone\&. If this option is set to \fBno\fR then Samba offers exactly the same DOS error codes that versions prior to Samba 2\&.2\&.3 reported\&. - - -You should not need to ever disable this parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBnt status support = yes\fR - - -.TP -null passwords (G) -Allow or disallow client access to accounts that have null passwords\&. - - -See also \fBsmbpasswd\fR(5)\&. - - -Default: \fBnull passwords = no\fR - - -.TP -obey pam restrictions (G) -When Samba 3\&.0 is configured to enable PAM support (i\&.e\&. --with-pam), this parameter will control whether or not Samba should obey PAM's account and session management directives\&. The default behavior is to use PAM for clear text authentication only and to ignore any account or session management\&. Note that Samba always ignores PAM for authentication in the case of \fIencrypt passwords = yes\fR\&. The reason is that PAM modules cannot support the challenge/response authentication mechanism needed in the presence of SMB password encryption\&. - - -Default: \fBobey pam restrictions = no\fR - - -.TP -only guest (S) -A synonym for \fI guest only\fR\&. - - -.TP -only user (S) -This is a boolean option that controls whether connections with usernames not in the \fIuser\fR list will be allowed\&. By default this option is disabled so that a client can supply a username to be used by the server\&. Enabling this parameter will force the server to only use the login names from the \fIuser\fR list and is only really useful in share level security\&. - - -Note that this also means Samba won't try to deduce usernames from the service name\&. This can be annoying for the [homes] section\&. To get around this you could use \fBuser = %S\fR which means your \fIuser\fR list will be just the service name, which for home directories is the name of the user\&. - - -See also the \fIuser\fR parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBonly user = no\fR - - -.TP -oplock break wait time (G) -This is a tuning parameter added due to bugs in both Windows 9x and WinNT\&. If Samba responds to a client too quickly when that client issues an SMB that can cause an oplock break request, then the network client can fail and not respond to the break request\&. This tuning parameter (which is set in milliseconds) is the amount of time Samba will wait before sending an oplock break request to such (broken) clients\&. - - -\fBDO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBoplock break wait time = 0\fR - - -.TP -oplock contention limit (S) -This is a \fBvery\fR advanced \fBsmbd\fR(8) tuning option to improve the efficiency of the granting of oplocks under multiple client contention for the same file\&. - - -In brief it specifies a number, which causes \fBsmbd\fR(8)not to grant an oplock even when requested if the approximate number of clients contending for an oplock on the same file goes over this limit\&. This causes \fBsmbd\fR to behave in a similar way to Windows NT\&. - - -\fBDO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBoplock contention limit = 2\fR - - -.TP -oplocks (S) -This boolean option tells \fBsmbd\fR whether to issue oplocks (opportunistic locks) to file open requests on this share\&. The oplock code can dramatically (approx\&. 30% or more) improve the speed of access to files on Samba servers\&. It allows the clients to aggressively cache files locally and you may want to disable this option for unreliable network environments (it is turned on by default in Windows NT Servers)\&. For more information see the file \fISpeed\&.txt\fR in the Samba \fIdocs/\fR directory\&. - - -Oplocks may be selectively turned off on certain files with a share\&. See the \fI veto oplock files\fR parameter\&. On some systems oplocks are recognized by the underlying operating system\&. This allows data synchronization between all access to oplocked files, whether it be via Samba or NFS or a local UNIX process\&. See the \fIkernel oplocks\fR parameter for details\&. - - -See also the \fIkernel oplocks\fR and \fI level2 oplocks\fR parameters\&. - - -Default: \fBoplocks = yes\fR - - -.TP -os2 driver map (G) -The parameter is used to define the absolute path to a file containing a mapping of Windows NT printer driver names to OS/2 printer driver names\&. The format is: - - -<nt driver name> = <os2 driver name>\&.<device name> - - -For example, a valid entry using the HP LaserJet 5 printer driver would appear as \fBHP LaserJet 5L = LASERJET.HP LaserJet 5L\fR\&. - - -The need for the file is due to the printer driver namespace problem described in ???\&. For more details on OS/2 clients, please refer to ???\&. - - -Default: \fBos2 driver map = <empty string>\fR - - -.TP -os level (G) -This integer value controls what level Samba advertises itself as for browse elections\&. The value of this parameter determines whether \fBnmbd\fR(8) has a chance of becoming a local master browser for the \fI WORKGROUP\fR in the local broadcast area\&. - - -\fBNote :\fRBy default, Samba will win a local master browsing election over all Microsoft operating systems except a Windows NT 4\&.0/2000 Domain Controller\&. This means that a misconfigured Samba host can effectively isolate a subnet for browsing purposes\&. See \fIBROWSING\&.txt \fR in the Samba \fIdocs/\fR directory for details\&. - - -Default: \fBos level = 20\fR - - -Example: \fBos level = 65 \fR - - -.TP -pam password change (G) -With the addition of better PAM support in Samba 2\&.2, this parameter, it is possible to use PAM's password change control flag for Samba\&. If enabled, then PAM will be used for password changes when requested by an SMB client instead of the program listed in \fIpasswd program\fR\&. It should be possible to enable this without changing your \fIpasswd chat\fR parameter for most setups\&. - - -Default: \fBpam password change = no\fR - - -.TP -panic action (G) -This is a Samba developer option that allows a system command to be called when either \fBsmbd\fR(8) or \fBsmbd\fR(8) crashes\&. This is usually used to draw attention to the fact that a problem occurred\&. - - -Default: \fBpanic action = <empty string>\fR - - -Example: \fBpanic action = "/bin/sleep 90000"\fR - - -.TP -paranoid server security (G) -Some version of NT 4\&.x allow non-guest users with a bad passowrd\&. When this option is enabled, samba will not use a broken NT 4\&.x server as password server, but instead complain to the logs and exit\&. - - -Disabling this option prevents Samba from making this check, which involves deliberatly attempting a bad logon to the remote server\&. - - -Default: \fBparanoid server security = yes\fR - - -.TP -passdb backend (G) -This option allows the administrator to chose which backends to retrieve and store passwords with\&. This allows (for example) both smbpasswd and tdbsam to be used without a recompile\&. Multiple backends can be specified, separated by spaces\&. The backends will be searched in the order they are specified\&. New users are always added to the first backend specified\&. - - -This parameter is in two parts, the backend's name, and a 'location' string that has meaning only to that particular backed\&. These are separated by a : character\&. - - -Available backends can include: .TP 3 \(bu \fBsmbpasswd\fR - The default smbpasswd backend\&. Takes a path to the smbpasswd file as an optional argument\&. .TP \(bu \fBtdbsam\fR - The TDB based password storage backend\&. Takes a path to the TDB as an optional argument (defaults to passdb\&.tdb in the \fIprivate dir\fR directory\&. .TP \(bu \fBldapsam\fR - The LDAP based passdb backend\&. Takes an LDAP URL as an optional argument (defaults to \fBldap://localhost\fR) LDAP connections should be secured where possible\&. This may be done using either Start-TLS (see \fIldap ssl\fR) or by specifying \fIldaps://\fR in the URL argument\&. .TP \(bu \fBnisplussam\fR - The NIS+ based passdb backend\&. Takes name NIS domain as an optional argument\&. Only works with sun NIS+ servers\&. .TP \(bu \fBmysql\fR - The MySQL based passdb backend\&. Takes an identifier as argument\&. Read the Samba HOWTO Collection for configuration details\&. .LP - - -Default: \fBpassdb backend = smbpasswd\fR - - -Example: \fBpassdb backend = tdbsam:/etc/samba/private/passdb.tdb smbpasswd:/etc/samba/smbpasswd\fR - - -Example: \fBpassdb backend = ldapsam:ldaps://ldap.example.com\fR - - -Example: \fBpassdb backend = mysql:my_plugin_args tdbsam\fR - - -.TP -passwd chat (G) -This string controls the \fB"chat"\fR conversation that takes places between \fBsmbd\fR(8) and the local password changing program to change the user's password\&. The string describes a sequence of response-receive pairs that \fBsmbd\fR(8) uses to determine what to send to the \fIpasswd program\fR and what to expect back\&. If the expected output is not received then the password is not changed\&. - - -This chat sequence is often quite site specific, depending on what local methods are used for password control (such as NIS etc)\&. - - -Note that this parameter only is only used if the \fIunix password sync\fR parameter is set to \fByes\fR\&. This sequence is then called \fBAS ROOT\fR when the SMB password in the smbpasswd file is being changed, without access to the old password cleartext\&. This means that root must be able to reset the user's password without knowing the text of the previous password\&. In the presence of NIS/YP, this means that the passwd program must be executed on the NIS master\&. - - -The string can contain the macro \fI%n\fR which is substituted for the new password\&. The chat sequence can also contain the standard macros \fB\\\\n\fR, \fB\\\\r\fR, \fB\\\\t\fR and \fB\\\\s\fR to give line-feed, carriage-return, tab and space\&. The chat sequence string can also contain a '*' which matches any sequence of characters\&. Double quotes can be used to collect strings with spaces in them into a single string\&. - - -If the send string in any part of the chat sequence is a full stop "\&.", then no string is sent\&. Similarly, if the expect string is a full stop then no string is expected\&. - - -If the \fIpam password change\fR parameter is set to \fByes\fR, the chat pairs may be matched in any order, and success is determined by the PAM result, not any particular output\&. The \\n macro is ignored for PAM conversions\&. - - -See also \fIunix password sync\fR, \fI passwd program\fR , \fIpasswd chat debug\fR and \fIpam password change\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBpasswd chat = *new*password* %n\\n *new*password* %n\\n *changed*\fR - - -Example: \fBpasswd chat = "*Enter OLD password*" %o\\n "*Enter NEW password*" %n\\n "*Reenter NEW password*" %n\\n "*Password changed*"\fR - - -.TP -passwd chat debug (G) -This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script parameter is run in \fBdebug\fR mode\&. In this mode the strings passed to and received from the passwd chat are printed in the \fBsmbd\fR(8) log with a \fIdebug level\fR of 100\&. This is a dangerous option as it will allow plaintext passwords to be seen in the \fBsmbd\fR log\&. It is available to help Samba admins debug their \fIpasswd chat\fR scripts when calling the \fIpasswd program\fR and should be turned off after this has been done\&. This option has no effect if the \fIpam password change\fR paramter is set\&. This parameter is off by default\&. - - -See also \fIpasswd chat\fR , \fIpam password change\fR , \fIpasswd program\fR \&. - - -Default: \fBpasswd chat debug = no\fR - - -.TP -passwd program (G) -The name of a program that can be used to set UNIX user passwords\&. Any occurrences of \fI%u\fR will be replaced with the user name\&. The user name is checked for existence before calling the password changing program\&. - - -Also note that many passwd programs insist in \fBreasonable \fR passwords, such as a minimum length, or the inclusion of mixed case chars and digits\&. This can pose a problem as some clients (such as Windows for Workgroups) uppercase the password before sending it\&. - - -\fBNote\fR that if the \fIunix password sync\fR parameter is set to \fByes \fR then this program is called \fBAS ROOT\fR before the SMB password in the smbpasswd file is changed\&. If this UNIX password change fails, then \fBsmbd\fR will fail to change the SMB password also (this is by design)\&. - - -If the \fIunix password sync\fR parameter is set this parameter \fBMUST USE ABSOLUTE PATHS\fR for \fBALL\fR programs called, and must be examined for security implications\&. Note that by default \fIunix password sync\fR is set to \fBno\fR\&. - - -See also \fIunix password sync\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBpasswd program = /bin/passwd\fR - - -Example: \fBpasswd program = /sbin/npasswd %u\fR - - -.TP -password level (G) -Some client/server combinations have difficulty with mixed-case passwords\&. One offending client is Windows for Workgroups, which for some reason forces passwords to upper case when using the LANMAN1 protocol, but leaves them alone when using COREPLUS! Another problem child is the Windows 95/98 family of operating systems\&. These clients upper case clear text passwords even when NT LM 0\&.12 selected by the protocol negotiation request/response\&. - - -This parameter defines the maximum number of characters that may be upper case in passwords\&. - - -For example, say the password given was "FRED"\&. If \fI password level\fR is set to 1, the following combinations would be tried if "FRED" failed: - - -"Fred", "fred", "fRed", "frEd","freD" - - -If \fIpassword level\fR was set to 2, the following combinations would also be tried: - - -"FRed", "FrEd", "FreD", "fREd", "fReD", "frED", \&.\&. - - -And so on\&. - - -The higher value this parameter is set to the more likely it is that a mixed case password will be matched against a single case password\&. However, you should be aware that use of this parameter reduces security and increases the time taken to process a new connection\&. - - -A value of zero will cause only two attempts to be made - the password as is and the password in all-lower case\&. - - -Default: \fBpassword level = 0\fR - - -Example: \fBpassword level = 4\fR - - -.TP -password server (G) -By specifying the name of another SMB server or Active Directory domain controller with this option, and using \fBsecurity = [ads|domain|server]\fR it is possible to get Samba to to do all its username/password validation using a specific remote server\&. - - -This option sets the name or IP address of the password server to use\&. New syntax has been added to support defining the port to use when connecting to the server the case of an ADS realm\&. To define a port other than the default LDAP port of 389, add the port number using a colon after the name or IP address (e\&.g\&. 192\&.168\&.1\&.100:389)\&. If you do not specify a port, Samba will use the standard LDAP port of tcp/389\&. Note that port numbers have no effect on password servers for Windows NT 4\&.0 domains or netbios connections\&. - - -If parameter is a name, it is looked up using the parameter \fIname resolve order\fR and so may resolved by any method and order described in that parameter\&. - - -The password server must be a machine capable of using the "LM1\&.2X002" or the "NT LM 0\&.12" protocol, and it must be in user level security mode\&. - - -Using a password server means your UNIX box (running Samba) is only as secure as your password server\&. \fBDO NOT CHOOSE A PASSWORD SERVER THAT YOU DON'T COMPLETELY TRUST\fR\&. - -Never point a Samba server at itself for password serving\&. This will cause a loop and could lock up your Samba server! - - -The name of the password server takes the standard substitutions, but probably the only useful one is \fI%m \fR, which means the Samba server will use the incoming client as the password server\&. If you use this then you better trust your clients, and you had better restrict them with hosts allow! - - -If the \fIsecurity\fR parameter is set to \fBdomain\fR or \fBads\fR, then the list of machines in this option must be a list of Primary or Backup Domain controllers for the Domain or the character '*', as the Samba server is effectively in that domain, and will use cryptographically authenticated RPC calls to authenticate the user logging on\&. The advantage of using \fB security = domain\fR is that if you list several hosts in the \fIpassword server\fR option then \fBsmbd \fR will try each in turn till it finds one that responds\&. This is useful in case your primary server goes down\&. - - -If the \fIpassword server\fR option is set to the character '*', then Samba will attempt to auto-locate the Primary or Backup Domain controllers to authenticate against by doing a query for the name \fBWORKGROUP<1C>\fR and then contacting each server returned in the list of IP addresses from the name resolution source\&. - - -If the list of servers contains both names/IP's and the '*' character, the list is treated as a list of preferred domain controllers, but an auto lookup of all remaining DC's will be added to the list as well\&. Samba will not attempt to optimize this list by locating the closest DC\&. - - -If the \fIsecurity\fR parameter is set to \fBserver\fR, then there are different restrictions that \fBsecurity = domain\fR doesn't suffer from: - - -You may list several password servers in the \fIpassword server\fR parameter, however if an \fBsmbd\fR makes a connection to a password server, and then the password server fails, no more users will be able to be authenticated from this \fBsmbd\fR\&. This is a restriction of the SMB/CIFS protocol when in \fBsecurity = server \fR mode and cannot be fixed in Samba\&. - -If you are using a Windows NT server as your password server then you will have to ensure that your users are able to login from the Samba server, as when in \fB security = server\fR mode the network logon will appear to come from there rather than from the users workstation\&. - -See also the \fIsecurity \fR parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBpassword server = <empty string>\fR - - -Example: \fBpassword server = NT-PDC, NT-BDC1, NT-BDC2, *\fR - - -Example: \fBpassword server = windc.mydomain.com:389 192.168.1.101 *\fR - - -Example: \fBpassword server = *\fR - - -.TP -path (S) -This parameter specifies a directory to which the user of the service is to be given access\&. In the case of printable services, this is where print data will spool prior to being submitted to the host for printing\&. - - -For a printable service offering guest access, the service should be readonly and the path should be world-writeable and have the sticky bit set\&. This is not mandatory of course, but you probably won't get the results you expect if you do otherwise\&. - - -Any occurrences of \fI%u\fR in the path will be replaced with the UNIX username that the client is using on this connection\&. Any occurrences of \fI%m\fR will be replaced by the NetBIOS name of the machine they are connecting from\&. These replacements are very useful for setting up pseudo home directories for users\&. - - -Note that this path will be based on \fIroot dir\fR if one was specified\&. - - -Default: \fBnone\fR - - -Example: \fBpath = /home/fred\fR - - -.TP -pid directory (G) -This option specifies the directory where pid files will be placed\&. - - -Default: \fBpid directory = ${prefix}/var/locks\fR - - -Example: \fBpid directory = /var/run/\fR - - -.TP -posix locking (S) -The \fBsmbd\fR(8) daemon maintains an database of file locks obtained by SMB clients\&. The default behavior is to map this internal database to POSIX locks\&. This means that file locks obtained by SMB clients are consistent with those seen by POSIX compliant applications accessing the files via a non-SMB method (e\&.g\&. NFS or local file access)\&. You should never need to disable this parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBposix locking = yes\fR - - -.TP -postexec (S) -This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is disconnected\&. It takes the usual substitutions\&. The command may be run as the root on some systems\&. - - -An interesting example may be to unmount server resources: - - -\fBpostexec = /etc/umount /cdrom\fR - - -See also \fIpreexec\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBnone (no command executed)\fR - - -Example: \fBpostexec = echo \"%u disconnected from %S from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log\fR - - -.TP -preexec (S) -This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is connected to\&. It takes the usual substitutions\&. - - -An interesting example is to send the users a welcome message every time they log in\&. Maybe a message of the day? Here is an example: - - -\fBpreexec = csh -c 'echo \"Welcome to %S!\" | /usr/local/samba/bin/smbclient -M %m -I %I' & \fR - - -Of course, this could get annoying after a while :-) - - -See also \fIpreexec close\fR and \fIpostexec \fR\&. - - -Default: \fBnone (no command executed)\fR - - -Example: \fBpreexec = echo \"%u connected to %S from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log\fR - - -.TP -preexec close (S) -This boolean option controls whether a non-zero return code from \fIpreexec \fR should close the service being connected to\&. - - -Default: \fBpreexec close = no\fR - - -.TP -prefered master (G) -Synonym for \fI preferred master\fR for people who cannot spell :-)\&. - - -.TP -preferred master (G) -This boolean parameter controls if \fBnmbd\fR(8) is a preferred master browser for its workgroup\&. - - -If this is set to \fByes\fR, on startup, \fBnmbd\fR will force an election, and it will have a slight advantage in winning the election\&. It is recommended that this parameter is used in conjunction with \fB domain master = yes\fR, so that \fBnmbd\fR can guarantee becoming a domain master\&. - - -Use this option with caution, because if there are several hosts (whether Samba servers, Windows 95 or NT) that are preferred master browsers on the same subnet, they will each periodically and continuously attempt to become the local master browser\&. This will result in unnecessary broadcast traffic and reduced browsing capabilities\&. - - -See also \fIos level\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBpreferred master = auto\fR - - -.TP -preload (G) -This is a list of services that you want to be automatically added to the browse lists\&. This is most useful for homes and printers services that would otherwise not be visible\&. - - -Note that if you just want all printers in your printcap file loaded then the \fIload printers\fR option is easier\&. - - -Default: \fBno preloaded services\fR - - -Example: \fBpreload = fred lp colorlp\fR - - -.TP -preload modules (G) -This is a list of paths to modules that should be loaded into smbd before a client connects\&. This improves the speed of smbd when reacting to new connections somewhat\&. - - -Default: \fBpreload modules = \fR - - -Example: \fBpreload modules = /usr/lib/samba/passdb/mysql.so+++ \fR - - -.TP -preserve case (S) -This controls if new filenames are created with the case that the client passes, or if they are forced to be the \fIdefault case \fR\&. - - -Default: \fBpreserve case = yes\fR - - -See the section on NAME MANGLING for a fuller discussion\&. - - -.TP -printable (S) -If this parameter is \fByes\fR, then clients may open, write to and submit spool files on the directory specified for the service\&. - - -Note that a printable service will ALWAYS allow writing to the service path (user privileges permitting) via the spooling of print data\&. The \fIread only \fR parameter controls only non-printing access to the resource\&. - - -Default: \fBprintable = no\fR - - -.TP -printcap (G) -Synonym for \fI printcap name\fR\&. - - -.TP -printcap name (S) -This parameter may be used to override the compiled-in default printcap name used by the server (usually \fI /etc/printcap\fR)\&. See the discussion of the [printers] section above for reasons why you might want to do this\&. - - -To use the CUPS printing interface set \fBprintcap name = cups \fR\&. This should be supplemented by an addtional setting printing = cups in the [global] section\&. \fBprintcap name = cups\fR will use the "dummy" printcap created by CUPS, as specified in your CUPS configuration file\&. - - -On System V systems that use \fBlpstat\fR to list available printers you can use \fBprintcap name = lpstat \fR to automatically obtain lists of available printers\&. This is the default for systems that define SYSV at configure time in Samba (this includes most System V based systems)\&. If \fI printcap name\fR is set to \fBlpstat\fR on these systems then Samba will launch \fBlpstat -v\fR and attempt to parse the output to obtain a printer list\&. - - -A minimal printcap file would look something like this: - - -.nf - -print1|My Printer 1 -print2|My Printer 2 -print3|My Printer 3 -print4|My Printer 4 -print5|My Printer 5 -.fi - - -where the '|' separates aliases of a printer\&. The fact that the second alias has a space in it gives a hint to Samba that it's a comment\&. - - -Under AIX the default printcap name is \fI/etc/qconfig\fR\&. Samba will assume the file is in AIX \fIqconfig\fR format if the string \fIqconfig\fR appears in the printcap filename\&. - -Default: \fBprintcap name = /etc/printcap\fR - - -Example: \fBprintcap name = /etc/myprintcap\fR - - -.TP -print command (S) -After a print job has finished spooling to a service, this command will be used via a \fBsystem()\fR call to process the spool file\&. Typically the command specified will submit the spool file to the host's printing subsystem, but there is no requirement that this be the case\&. The server will not remove the spool file, so whatever command you specify should remove the spool file when it has been processed, otherwise you will need to manually remove old spool files\&. - - -The print command is simply a text string\&. It will be used verbatim after macro substitutions have been made: - - -%s, %f - the path to the spool file name - - -%p - the appropriate printer name - - -%J - the job name as transmitted by the client\&. - - -%c - The number of printed pages of the spooled job (if known)\&. - - -%z - the size of the spooled print job (in bytes) - - -The print command \fBMUST\fR contain at least one occurrence of \fI%s\fR or \fI%f \fR - the \fI%p\fR is optional\&. At the time a job is submitted, if no printer name is supplied the \fI%p \fR will be silently removed from the printer command\&. - - -If specified in the [global] section, the print command given will be used for any printable service that does not have its own print command specified\&. - - -If there is neither a specified print command for a printable service nor a global print command, spool files will be created but not processed and (most importantly) not removed\&. - - -Note that printing may fail on some UNIXes from the \fBnobody\fR account\&. If this happens then create an alternative guest account that can print and set the \fIguest account\fR in the [global] section\&. - - -You can form quite complex print commands by realizing that they are just passed to a shell\&. For example the following will log a print job, print the file, then remove it\&. Note that ';' is the usual separator for command in shell scripts\&. - - -\fBprint command = echo Printing %s >> /tmp/print.log; lpr -P %p %s; rm %s\fR - - -You may have to vary this command considerably depending on how you normally print files on your system\&. The default for the parameter varies depending on the setting of the \fIprinting\fR parameter\&. - - -Default: For \fBprinting = BSD, AIX, QNX, LPRNG or PLP :\fR - - -\fBprint command = lpr -r -P%p %s\fR - - -For \fBprinting = SYSV or HPUX :\fR - - -\fBprint command = lp -c -d%p %s; rm %s\fR - - -For \fBprinting = SOFTQ :\fR - - -\fBprint command = lp -d%p -s %s; rm %s\fR - - -For printing = CUPS : If SAMBA is compiled against libcups, then printcap = cups uses the CUPS API to submit jobs, etc\&. Otherwise it maps to the System V commands with the -oraw option for printing, i\&.e\&. it uses \fBlp -c -d%p -oraw; rm %s\fR\&. With \fBprinting = cups\fR, and if SAMBA is compiled against libcups, any manually set print command will be ignored\&. - - -Example: \fBprint command = /usr/local/samba/bin/myprintscript %p %s\fR - - -.TP -printer (S) -Synonym for \fI printer name\fR\&. - - -.TP -printer admin (S) -This is a list of users that can do anything to printers via the remote administration interfaces offered by MS-RPC (usually using a NT workstation)\&. Note that the root user always has admin rights\&. - - -Default: \fBprinter admin = <empty string>\fR - - -Example: \fBprinter admin = admin, @staff\fR - - -.TP -printer name (S) -This parameter specifies the name of the printer to which print jobs spooled through a printable service will be sent\&. - - -If specified in the [global] section, the printer name given will be used for any printable service that does not have its own printer name specified\&. - - -Default: \fBnone (but may be \fBlp\fR on many systems)\fR - - -Example: \fBprinter name = laserwriter\fR - - -.TP -printing (S) -This parameters controls how printer status information is interpreted on your system\&. It also affects the default values for the \fIprint command\fR, \fIlpq command\fR, \fIlppause command \fR, \fIlpresume command\fR, and \fIlprm command\fR if specified in the [global] section\&. - - -Currently nine printing styles are supported\&. They are \fBBSD\fR, \fBAIX\fR, \fBLPRNG\fR, \fBPLP\fR, \fBSYSV\fR, \fBHPUX\fR, \fBQNX\fR, \fBSOFTQ\fR, and \fBCUPS\fR\&. - - -To see what the defaults are for the other print commands when using the various options use the \fBtestparm\fR(1) program\&. - - -This option can be set on a per printer basis - - -See also the discussion in the [printers] section\&. - - -.TP -print ok (S) -Synonym for \fIprintable\fR\&. - - -.TP -private dir (G) -This parameters defines the directory smbd will use for storing such files as \fIsmbpasswd\fR and \fIsecrets\&.tdb\fR\&. - - -Default :\fBprivate dir = ${prefix}/private\fR - - -.TP -profile acls (S) -This boolean parameter controls whether \fBsmbd\fR(8) This boolean parameter was added to fix the problems that people have been having with storing user profiles on Samba shares from Windows 2000 or Windows XP clients\&. New versions of Windows 2000 or Windows XP service packs do security ACL checking on the owner and ability to write of the profile directory stored on a local workstation when copied from a Samba share\&. - - -When not in domain mode with winbindd then the security info copied onto the local workstation has no meaning to the logged in user (SID) on that workstation so the profile storing fails\&. Adding this parameter onto a share used for profile storage changes two things about the returned Windows ACL\&. Firstly it changes the owner and group owner of all reported files and directories to be BUILTIN\\\\Administrators, BUILTIN\\\\Users respectively (SIDs S-1-5-32-544, S-1-5-32-545)\&. Secondly it adds an ACE entry of "Full Control" to the SID BUILTIN\\\\Users to every returned ACL\&. This will allow any Windows 2000 or XP workstation user to access the profile\&. - - -Note that if you have multiple users logging on to a workstation then in order to prevent them from being able to access each others profiles you must remove the "Bypass traverse checking" advanced user right\&. This will prevent access to other users profile directories as the top level profile directory (named after the user) is created by the workstation profile code and has an ACL restricting entry to the directory tree to the owning user\&. - - -Default: \fBprofile acls = no\fR - - -.TP -protocol (G) -Synonym for \fImax protocol\fR\&. - - -.TP -public (S) -Synonym for \fIguest ok\fR\&. - - -.TP -queuepause command (S) -This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to pause the printer queue\&. - - -This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name as its only parameter and stops the printer queue, such that no longer jobs are submitted to the printer\&. - - -This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, but can be issued from the Printers window under Windows 95 and NT\&. - - -If a \fI%p\fR is given then the printer name is put in its place\&. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command\&. - - -Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the server\&. - - -Default: \fBdepends on the setting of \fIprinting\fR\fR - - -Example: \fBqueuepause command = disable %p\fR - - -.TP -queueresume command (S) -This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to resume the printer queue\&. It is the command to undo the behavior that is caused by the previous parameter (\fI queuepause command\fR)\&. - - -This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name as its only parameter and resumes the printer queue, such that queued jobs are resubmitted to the printer\&. - - -This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, but can be issued from the Printers window under Windows 95 and NT\&. - - -If a \fI%p\fR is given then the printer name is put in its place\&. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command\&. - - -Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the server\&. - - -Default: \fBdepends on the setting of \fIprinting\fR\fR - - -Example: \fBqueuepause command = enable %p\fR - - -.TP -read bmpx (G) -This boolean parameter controls whether \fBsmbd\fR(8) will support the "Read Block Multiplex" SMB\&. This is now rarely used and defaults to \fBno\fR\&. You should never need to set this parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBread bmpx = no\fR - - -.TP -read list (S) -This is a list of users that are given read-only access to a service\&. If the connecting user is in this list then they will not be given write access, no matter what the \fIread only\fR option is set to\&. The list can include group names using the syntax described in the \fI invalid users\fR parameter\&. - - -See also the \fI write list\fR parameter and the \fIinvalid users\fR parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBread list = <empty string>\fR - - -Example: \fBread list = mary, @students\fR - - -.TP -read only (S) -An inverted synonym is \fIwriteable\fR\&. - - -If this parameter is \fByes\fR, then users of a service may not create or modify files in the service's directory\&. - - -Note that a printable service (\fBprintable = yes\fR) will \fBALWAYS\fR allow writing to the directory (user privileges permitting), but only via spooling operations\&. - - -Default: \fBread only = yes\fR - - -.TP -read raw (G) -This parameter controls whether or not the server will support the raw read SMB requests when transferring data to clients\&. - - -If enabled, raw reads allow reads of 65535 bytes in one packet\&. This typically provides a major performance benefit\&. - - -However, some clients either negotiate the allowable block size incorrectly or are incapable of supporting larger block sizes, and for these clients you may need to disable raw reads\&. - - -In general this parameter should be viewed as a system tuning tool and left severely alone\&. See also \fIwrite raw\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBread raw = yes\fR - - -.TP -read size (G) -The option \fIread size\fR affects the overlap of disk reads/writes with network reads/writes\&. If the amount of data being transferred in several of the SMB commands (currently SMBwrite, SMBwriteX and SMBreadbraw) is larger than this value then the server begins writing the data before it has received the whole packet from the network, or in the case of SMBreadbraw, it begins writing to the network before all the data has been read from disk\&. - - -This overlapping works best when the speeds of disk and network access are similar, having very little effect when the speed of one is much greater than the other\&. - - -The default value is 16384, but very little experimentation has been done yet to determine the optimal value, and it is likely that the best value will vary greatly between systems anyway\&. A value over 65536 is pointless and will cause you to allocate memory unnecessarily\&. - - -Default: \fBread size = 16384\fR - - -Example: \fBread size = 8192\fR - - -.TP -realm (G) -This option specifies the kerberos realm to use\&. The realm is used as the ADS equivalent of the NT4 \fBdomain\fR\&. It is usually set to the DNS name of the kerberos server\&. - - -Default: \fBrealm = \fR - - -Example: \fBrealm = mysambabox.mycompany.com\fR - - -.TP -remote announce (G) -This option allows you to setup \fBnmbd\fR(8)to periodically announce itself to arbitrary IP addresses with an arbitrary workgroup name\&. - - -This is useful if you want your Samba server to appear in a remote workgroup for which the normal browse propagation rules don't work\&. The remote workgroup can be anywhere that you can send IP packets to\&. - - -For example: - - -\fBremote announce = 192.168.2.255/SERVERS 192.168.4.255/STAFF\fR - - -the above line would cause \fBnmbd\fR to announce itself to the two given IP addresses using the given workgroup names\&. If you leave out the workgroup name then the one given in the \fIworkgroup\fR parameter is used instead\&. - - -The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast addresses of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses of known browse masters if your network config is that stable\&. - - -See ???\&. - - -Default: \fBremote announce = <empty string>\fR - - -.TP -remote browse sync (G) -This option allows you to setup \fBnmbd\fR(8) to periodically request synchronization of browse lists with the master browser of a Samba server that is on a remote segment\&. This option will allow you to gain browse lists for multiple workgroups across routed networks\&. This is done in a manner that does not work with any non-Samba servers\&. - - -This is useful if you want your Samba server and all local clients to appear in a remote workgroup for which the normal browse propagation rules don't work\&. The remote workgroup can be anywhere that you can send IP packets to\&. - - -For example: - - -\fBremote browse sync = 192.168.2.255 192.168.4.255\fR - - -the above line would cause \fBnmbd\fR to request the master browser on the specified subnets or addresses to synchronize their browse lists with the local server\&. - - -The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast addresses of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses of known browse masters if your network config is that stable\&. If a machine IP address is given Samba makes NO attempt to validate that the remote machine is available, is listening, nor that it is in fact the browse master on its segment\&. - - -Default: \fBremote browse sync = <empty string>\fR - - -.TP -restrict anonymous (G) -The setting of this parameter determines whether user and group list information is returned for an anonymous connection\&. and mirrors the effects of the \fBHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SYSTEM\\CurrentControlSet\\Control\\LSA\\RestrictAnonymous\fR registry key in Windows 2000 and Windows NT\&. When set to 0, user and group list information is returned to anyone who asks\&. When set to 1, only an authenticated user can retrive user and group list information\&. For the value 2, supported by Windows 2000/XP and Samba, no anonymous connections are allowed at all\&. This can break third party and Microsoft applications which expect to be allowed to perform operations anonymously\&. - - -The security advantage of using restrict anonymous = 1 is dubious, as user and group list information can be obtained using other means\&. - - -The security advantage of using restrict anonymous = 2 is removed by setting \fIguest ok\fR = yes on any share\&. - -Default: \fBrestrict anonymous = 0\fR - - -.TP -root (G) -Synonym for \fIroot directory"\fR\&. - - -.TP -root dir (G) -Synonym for \fIroot directory"\fR\&. - - -.TP -root directory (G) -The server will \fBchroot()\fR (i\&.e\&. Change its root directory) to this directory on startup\&. This is not strictly necessary for secure operation\&. Even without it the server will deny access to files not in one of the service entries\&. It may also check for, and deny access to, soft links to other parts of the filesystem, or attempts to use "\&.\&." in file names to access other directories (depending on the setting of the \fIwide links\fR parameter)\&. - - -Adding a \fIroot directory\fR entry other than "/" adds an extra level of security, but at a price\&. It absolutely ensures that no access is given to files not in the sub-tree specified in the \fIroot directory\fR option, \fBincluding\fR some files needed for complete operation of the server\&. To maintain full operability of the server you will need to mirror some system files into the \fIroot directory\fR tree\&. In particular you will need to mirror \fI/etc/passwd\fR (or a subset of it), and any binaries or configuration files needed for printing (if required)\&. The set of files that must be mirrored is operating system dependent\&. - - -Default: \fBroot directory = /\fR - - -Example: \fBroot directory = /homes/smb\fR - - -.TP -root postexec (S) -This is the same as the \fIpostexec\fR parameter except that the command is run as root\&. This is useful for unmounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) after a connection is closed\&. - - -See also \fI postexec\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBroot postexec = <empty string>\fR - - -.TP -root preexec (S) -This is the same as the \fIpreexec\fR parameter except that the command is run as root\&. This is useful for mounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) when a connection is opened\&. - - -See also \fI preexec\fR and \fIpreexec close\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBroot preexec = <empty string>\fR - - -.TP -root preexec close (S) -This is the same as the \fIpreexec close \fR parameter except that the command is run as root\&. - - -See also \fI preexec\fR and \fIpreexec close\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBroot preexec close = no\fR - - -.TP -security (G) -This option affects how clients respond to Samba and is one of the most important settings in the \fI smb\&.conf\fR file\&. - - -The option sets the "security mode bit" in replies to protocol negotiations with \fBsmbd\fR(8) to turn share level security on or off\&. Clients decide based on this bit whether (and how) to transfer user and password information to the server\&. - - -The default is \fBsecurity = user\fR, as this is the most common setting needed when talking to Windows 98 and Windows NT\&. - - -The alternatives are \fBsecurity = share\fR, \fBsecurity = server\fR or \fBsecurity = domain \fR\&. - - -In versions of Samba prior to 2\&.0\&.0, the default was \fBsecurity = share\fR mainly because that was the only option at one stage\&. - - -There is a bug in WfWg that has relevance to this setting\&. When in user or server level security a WfWg client will totally ignore the password you type in the "connect drive" dialog box\&. This makes it very difficult (if not impossible) to connect to a Samba service as anyone except the user that you are logged into WfWg as\&. - - -If your PCs use usernames that are the same as their usernames on the UNIX machine then you will want to use \fBsecurity = user\fR\&. If you mostly use usernames that don't exist on the UNIX box then use \fBsecurity = share\fR\&. - - -You should also use \fBsecurity = share\fR if you want to mainly setup shares without a password (guest shares)\&. This is commonly used for a shared printer server\&. It is more difficult to setup guest shares with \fBsecurity = user\fR, see the \fImap to guest\fR parameter for details\&. - - -It is possible to use \fBsmbd\fR in a \fB hybrid mode\fR where it is offers both user and share level security under different \fINetBIOS aliases\fR\&. - - -The different settings will now be explained\&. - - -\fBSECURITY = SHARE\fR - - -When clients connect to a share level security server they need not log onto the server with a valid username and password before attempting to connect to a shared resource (although modern clients such as Windows 95/98 and Windows NT will send a logon request with a username but no password when talking to a \fBsecurity = share \fR server)\&. Instead, the clients send authentication information (passwords) on a per-share basis, at the time they attempt to connect to that share\&. - - -Note that \fBsmbd\fR \fBALWAYS\fR uses a valid UNIX user to act on behalf of the client, even in \fBsecurity = share\fR level security\&. - - -As clients are not required to send a username to the server in share level security, \fBsmbd\fR uses several techniques to determine the correct UNIX user to use on behalf of the client\&. - - -A list of possible UNIX usernames to match with the given client password is constructed using the following methods : - - -If the \fIguest only\fR parameter is set, then all the other stages are missed and only the \fIguest account\fR username is checked\&. - -Is a username is sent with the share connection request, then this username (after mapping - see \fIusername map\fR), is added as a potential username\&. - -If the client did a previous \fBlogon \fR request (the SessionSetup SMB call) then the username sent in this SMB will be added as a potential username\&. - -The name of the service the client requested is added as a potential username\&. - -The NetBIOS name of the client is added to the list as a potential username\&. - -Any users on the \fI user\fR list are added as potential usernames\&. - -If the \fIguest only\fR parameter is not set, then this list is then tried with the supplied password\&. The first user for whom the password matches will be used as the UNIX user\&. - - -If the \fIguest only\fR parameter is set, or no username can be determined then if the share is marked as available to the \fIguest account\fR, then this guest user will be used, otherwise access is denied\&. - - -Note that it can be \fBvery\fR confusing in share-level security as to which UNIX username will eventually be used in granting access\&. - - -See also the section NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION\&. - - -\fBSECURITY = USER\fR - - -This is the default security setting in Samba 3\&.0\&. With user-level security a client must first "log-on" with a valid username and password (which can be mapped using the \fIusername map\fR parameter)\&. Encrypted passwords (see the \fIencrypted passwords\fR parameter) can also be used in this security mode\&. Parameters such as \fIuser\fR and \fIguest only\fR if set are then applied and may change the UNIX user to use on this connection, but only after the user has been successfully authenticated\&. - - -\fBNote\fR that the name of the resource being requested is \fBnot\fR sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client\&. This is why guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing the server to automatically map unknown users into the \fIguest account\fR\&. See the \fImap to guest\fR parameter for details on doing this\&. - - -See also the section NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION\&. - - -\fBSECURITY = DOMAIN\fR - - -This mode will only work correctly if \fBnet\fR(8) has been used to add this machine into a Windows NT Domain\&. It expects the \fIencrypted passwords\fR parameter to be set to \fByes\fR\&. In this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by passing it to a Windows NT Primary or Backup Domain Controller, in exactly the same way that a Windows NT Server would do\&. - - -\fBNote\fR that a valid UNIX user must still exist as well as the account on the Domain Controller to allow Samba to have a valid UNIX account to map file access to\&. - - -\fBNote\fR that from the client's point of view \fBsecurity = domain\fR is the same as \fBsecurity = user\fR\&. It only affects how the server deals with the authentication, it does not in any way affect what the client sees\&. - - -\fBNote\fR that the name of the resource being requested is \fBnot\fR sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client\&. This is why guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing the server to automatically map unknown users into the \fIguest account\fR\&. See the \fImap to guest\fR parameter for details on doing this\&. - - -See also the section NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION\&. - - -See also the \fIpassword server\fR parameter and the \fIencrypted passwords\fR parameter\&. - - -\fBSECURITY = SERVER\fR - - -In this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by passing it to another SMB server, such as an NT box\&. If this fails it will revert to \fBsecurity = user\fR\&. It expects the \fIencrypted passwords\fR parameter to be set to \fByes\fR, unless the remote server does not support them\&. However note that if encrypted passwords have been negotiated then Samba cannot revert back to checking the UNIX password file, it must have a valid \fIsmbpasswd\fR file to check users against\&. See the chapter about the User Database in the Samba HOWTO Collection for details on how to set this up\&. - - -This mode of operation has significant pitfalls, due to the fact that is activly initiates a man-in-the-middle attack on the remote SMB server\&. In particular, this mode of operation can cause significant resource consuption on the PDC, as it must maintain an active connection for the duration of the user's session\&. Furthermore, if this connection is lost, there is no way to reestablish it, and futher authenticaions to the Samba server may fail\&. (From a single client, till it disconnects)\&. - -From the client's point of view \fBsecurity = server\fR is the same as \fBsecurity = user\fR\&. It only affects how the server deals with the authentication, it does not in any way affect what the client sees\&. - -\fBNote\fR that the name of the resource being requested is \fBnot\fR sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client\&. This is why guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing the server to automatically map unknown users into the \fIguest account\fR\&. See the \fImap to guest\fR parameter for details on doing this\&. - - -See also the section NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION\&. - - -See also the \fIpassword server\fR parameter and the \fIencrypted passwords\fR parameter\&. - - -\fBSECURITY = ADS\fR - - -In this mode, Samba will act as a domain member in an ADS realm\&. To operate in this mode, the machine running Samba will need to have Kerberos installed and configured and Samba will need to be joined to the ADS realm using the net utility\&. - - -Note that this mode does NOT make Samba operate as a Active Directory Domain Controller\&. - - -Read the chapter about Domain Membership in the HOWTO for details\&. - - -See also the \fIads server \fR parameter, the \fIrealm \fR paramter and the \fIencrypted passwords\fR parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBsecurity = USER\fR - - -Example: \fBsecurity = DOMAIN\fR - - -.TP -security mask (S) -This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog box\&. - - -This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to the changed permission bits, thus preventing any bits not in this mask from being modified\&. Essentially, zero bits in this mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed to change\&. - - -If not set explicitly this parameter is 0777, allowing a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file\&. - - -\fBNote\fR that users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems\&. Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave it set to \fB0777\fR\&. - - -See also the \fIforce directory security mode\fR, \fIdirectory security mask\fR, \fIforce security mode\fR parameters\&. - - -Default: \fBsecurity mask = 0777\fR - - -Example: \fBsecurity mask = 0770\fR - - -.TP -server schannel (G) -This controls whether the server offers or even demands the use of the netlogon schannel\&. \fIserver schannel = no\fR does not offer the schannel, \fIserver schannel = auto\fR offers the schannel but does not enforce it, and \fIserver schannel = yes\fR denies access if the client is not able to speak netlogon schannel\&. This is only the case for Windows NT4 before SP4\&. - - -Please note that with this set to \fIno\fR you will have to apply the WindowsXP requireSignOrSeal-Registry patch found in the docs/Registry subdirectory\&. - - -Default: \fBserver schannel = auto\fR - - -Example: \fBserver schannel = yes\fR - - -.TP -server signing (G) -This controls whether the server offers or requires the client it talks to to use SMB signing\&. Possible values are \fBauto\fR, \fBmandatory\fR and \fBdisabled\fR\&. - - -When set to auto, SMB signing is offered, but not enforced\&. When set to mandatory, SMB signing is required and if set to disabled, SMB signing is not offered either\&. - - -Default: \fBclient signing = False\fR - - -.TP -server string (G) -This controls what string will show up in the printer comment box in print manager and next to the IPC connection in \fBnet view\fR\&. It can be any string that you wish to show to your users\&. - - -It also sets what will appear in browse lists next to the machine name\&. - - -A \fI%v\fR will be replaced with the Samba version number\&. - - -A \fI%h\fR will be replaced with the hostname\&. - - -Default: \fBserver string = Samba %v\fR - - -Example: \fBserver string = University of GNUs Samba Server\fR - - -.TP -set directory (S) -If \fBset directory = no\fR, then users of the service may not use the setdir command to change directory\&. - - -The \fBsetdir\fR command is only implemented in the Digital Pathworks client\&. See the Pathworks documentation for details\&. - - -Default: \fBset directory = no\fR - - -.TP -set primary group script (G) -Thanks to the Posix subsystem in NT a Windows User has a primary group in addition to the auxiliary groups\&. This script sets the primary group in the unix userdatase when an administrator sets the primary group from the windows user manager or when fetching a SAM with \fBnet rpc vampire\fR\&. \fI%u\fR will be replaced with the user whose primary group is to be set\&. \fI%g\fR will be replaced with the group to set\&. - - -Default: \fBNo default value\fR - - -Example: \fBset primary group script = /usr/sbin/usermod -g '%g' '%u'\fR - - -.TP -set quota command (G) -The \fBset quota command\fR should only be used whenever there is no operating system API available from the OS that samba can use\&. - - -This parameter should specify the path to a script that can set quota for the specified arguments\&. - - -The specified script should take the following arguments: - - -1 - quota type .TP 3 \(bu 1 - user quotas .TP \(bu 2 - user default quotas (uid = -1) .TP \(bu 3 - group quotas .TP \(bu 4 - group default quotas (gid = -1) .LP - -2 - id (uid for user, gid for group, -1 if N/A) - -3 - quota state (0 = disable, 1 = enable, 2 = enable and enforce) - -4 - block softlimit - -5 - block hardlimit - -6 - inode softlimit - -7 - inode hardlimit - -8(optional) - block size, defaults to 1024 - -The script should output at least one line of data\&. - - -See also the \fIget quota command\fR parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBset quota command = \fR - - -Example: \fBset quota command = /usr/local/sbin/set_quota\fR - - -.TP -share modes (S) -This enables or disables the honoring of the \fIshare modes\fR during a file open\&. These modes are used by clients to gain exclusive read or write access to a file\&. - - -These open modes are not directly supported by UNIX, so they are simulated using shared memory, or lock files if your UNIX doesn't support shared memory (almost all do)\&. - - -The share modes that are enabled by this option are \fBDENY_DOS\fR, \fBDENY_ALL\fR, \fBDENY_READ\fR, \fBDENY_WRITE\fR, \fBDENY_NONE\fR and \fBDENY_FCB\fR\&. - - -This option gives full share compatibility and enabled by default\&. - - -You should \fBNEVER\fR turn this parameter off as many Windows applications will break if you do so\&. - - -Default: \fBshare modes = yes\fR - - -.TP -short preserve case (S) -This boolean parameter controls if new files which conform to 8\&.3 syntax, that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are created upper case, or if they are forced to be the \fIdefault case \fR\&. This option can be use with \fBpreserve case = yes\fR to permit long filenames to retain their case, while short names are lowered\&. - - -See the section on NAME MANGLING\&. - - -Default: \fBshort preserve case = yes\fR - - -.TP -show add printer wizard (G) -With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support for Windows NT/2000 client in Samba 2\&.2, a "Printers\&.\&.\&." folder will appear on Samba hosts in the share listing\&. Normally this folder will contain an icon for the MS Add Printer Wizard (APW)\&. However, it is possible to disable this feature regardless of the level of privilege of the connected user\&. - - -Under normal circumstances, the Windows NT/2000 client will open a handle on the printer server with OpenPrinterEx() asking for Administrator privileges\&. If the user does not have administrative access on the print server (i\&.e is not root or a member of the \fIprinter admin\fR group), the OpenPrinterEx() call fails and the client makes another open call with a request for a lower privilege level\&. This should succeed, however the APW icon will not be displayed\&. - - -Disabling the \fIshow add printer wizard\fR parameter will always cause the OpenPrinterEx() on the server to fail\&. Thus the APW icon will never be displayed\&. \fB Note :\fRThis does not prevent the same user from having administrative privilege on an individual printer\&. - - -See also \fIaddprinter command\fR, \fIdeleteprinter command\fR, \fIprinter admin\fR - - -Default :\fBshow add printer wizard = yes\fR - - -.TP -shutdown script (G) -\fBThis parameter only exists in the HEAD cvs branch\fR This a full path name to a script called by \fBsmbd\fR(8) that should start a shutdown procedure\&. - - -This command will be run as the user connected to the server\&. - - -%m %t %r %f parameters are expanded: - - -\fI%m\fR will be substituted with the shutdown message sent to the server\&. - -\fI%t\fR will be substituted with the number of seconds to wait before effectively starting the shutdown procedure\&. - -\fI%r\fR will be substituted with the switch \fB-r\fR\&. It means reboot after shutdown for NT\&. - -\fI%f\fR will be substituted with the switch \fB-f\fR\&. It means force the shutdown even if applications do not respond for NT\&. - -Default: \fBNone\fR\&. - - -Example: \fBshutdown script = /usr/local/samba/sbin/shutdown %m %t %r %f\fR - - -Shutdown script example: -.nf - -#!/bin/bash - -$time=0 -let "time/60" -let "time++" - -/sbin/shutdown $3 $4 +$time $1 & -.fi - -Shutdown does not return so we need to launch it in background\&. - - -See also \fIabort shutdown script\fR\&. - - -.TP -smb passwd file (G) -This option sets the path to the encrypted smbpasswd file\&. By default the path to the smbpasswd file is compiled into Samba\&. - - -Default: \fBsmb passwd file = ${prefix}/private/smbpasswd\fR - - -Example: \fBsmb passwd file = /etc/samba/smbpasswd\fR - - -.TP -smb ports (G) -Specifies which ports the server should listen on for SMB traffic\&. - - -Default: \fBsmb ports = 445 139\fR - - -.TP -socket address (G) -This option allows you to control what address Samba will listen for connections on\&. This is used to support multiple virtual interfaces on the one server, each with a different configuration\&. - - -By default Samba will accept connections on any address\&. - - -Example: \fBsocket address = 192.168.2.20\fR - - -.TP -socket options (G) -This option allows you to set socket options to be used when talking with the client\&. - - -Socket options are controls on the networking layer of the operating systems which allow the connection to be tuned\&. - - -This option will typically be used to tune your Samba server for optimal performance for your local network\&. There is no way that Samba can know what the optimal parameters are for your net, so you must experiment and choose them yourself\&. We strongly suggest you read the appropriate documentation for your operating system first (perhaps \fBman setsockopt\fR will help)\&. - - -You may find that on some systems Samba will say "Unknown socket option" when you supply an option\&. This means you either incorrectly typed it or you need to add an include file to includes\&.h for your OS\&. If the latter is the case please send the patch to samba-technical@samba\&.org\&. - - -Any of the supported socket options may be combined in any way you like, as long as your OS allows it\&. - - -This is the list of socket options currently settable using this option: - - -SO_KEEPALIVE - -SO_REUSEADDR - -SO_BROADCAST - -TCP_NODELAY - -IPTOS_LOWDELAY - -IPTOS_THROUGHPUT - -SO_SNDBUF * - -SO_RCVBUF * - -SO_SNDLOWAT * - -SO_RCVLOWAT * - -Those marked with a \fB'*'\fR take an integer argument\&. The others can optionally take a 1 or 0 argument to enable or disable the option, by default they will be enabled if you don't specify 1 or 0\&. - - -To specify an argument use the syntax SOME_OPTION = VALUE for example \fBSO_SNDBUF = 8192\fR\&. Note that you must not have any spaces before or after the = sign\&. - - -If you are on a local network then a sensible option might be: - - -\fBsocket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY\fR - - -If you have a local network then you could try: - - -\fBsocket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY TCP_NODELAY\fR - - -If you are on a wide area network then perhaps try setting IPTOS_THROUGHPUT\&. - - -Note that several of the options may cause your Samba server to fail completely\&. Use these options with caution! - - -Default: \fBsocket options = TCP_NODELAY\fR - - -Example: \fBsocket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY\fR - - -.TP -source environment (G) -This parameter causes Samba to set environment variables as per the content of the file named\&. - - -If the value of this parameter starts with a "|" character then Samba will treat that value as a pipe command to open and will set the environment variables from the output of the pipe\&. - - -The contents of the file or the output of the pipe should be formatted as the output of the standard Unix \fBenv(1)\fR command\&. This is of the form: - - -Example environment entry: - - -\fBSAMBA_NETBIOS_NAME = myhostname\fR - - -Default: \fBNo default value\fR - - -Examples: \fBsource environment = |/etc/smb.conf.sh\fR - - -Example: \fBsource environment = /usr/local/smb_env_vars\fR - - -.TP -stat cache (G) -This parameter determines if \fBsmbd\fR(8) will use a cache in order to speed up case insensitive name mappings\&. You should never need to change this parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBstat cache = yes\fR - - -.TP -strict allocate (S) -This is a boolean that controls the handling of disk space allocation in the server\&. When this is set to \fByes\fR the server will change from UNIX behaviour of not committing real disk storage blocks when a file is extended to the Windows behaviour of actually forcing the disk system to allocate real storage blocks when a file is created or extended to be a given size\&. In UNIX terminology this means that Samba will stop creating sparse files\&. This can be slow on some systems\&. - - -When strict allocate is \fBno\fR the server does sparse disk block allocation when a file is extended\&. - - -Setting this to \fByes\fR can help Samba return out of quota messages on systems that are restricting the disk quota of users\&. - - -Default: \fBstrict allocate = no\fR - - -.TP -strict locking (S) -This is a boolean that controls the handling of file locking in the server\&. When this is set to \fByes\fR, the server will check every read and write access for file locks, and deny access if locks exist\&. This can be slow on some systems\&. - - -When strict locking is disabled, the server performs file lock checks only when the client explicitly asks for them\&. - - -Well-behaved clients always ask for lock checks when it is important\&. So in the vast majority of cases, \fBstrict locking = no\fR is preferable\&. - - -Default: \fBstrict locking = no\fR - - -.TP -strict sync (S) -Many Windows applications (including the Windows 98 explorer shell) seem to confuse flushing buffer contents to disk with doing a sync to disk\&. Under UNIX, a sync call forces the process to be suspended until the kernel has ensured that all outstanding data in kernel disk buffers has been safely stored onto stable storage\&. This is very slow and should only be done rarely\&. Setting this parameter to \fBno\fR (the default) means that \fBsmbd\fR(8) ignores the Windows applications requests for a sync call\&. There is only a possibility of losing data if the operating system itself that Samba is running on crashes, so there is little danger in this default setting\&. In addition, this fixes many performance problems that people have reported with the new Windows98 explorer shell file copies\&. - - -See also the \fIsync always\fR parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBstrict sync = no\fR - - -.TP -sync always (S) -This is a boolean parameter that controls whether writes will always be written to stable storage before the write call returns\&. If this is \fBno\fR then the server will be guided by the client's request in each write call (clients can set a bit indicating that a particular write should be synchronous)\&. If this is \fByes\fR then every write will be followed by a \fBfsync() \fR call to ensure the data is written to disk\&. Note that the \fIstrict sync\fR parameter must be set to \fByes\fR in order for this parameter to have any affect\&. - - -See also the \fIstrict sync\fR parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBsync always = no\fR - - -.TP -syslog (G) -This parameter maps how Samba debug messages are logged onto the system syslog logging levels\&. Samba debug level zero maps onto syslog \fBLOG_ERR\fR, debug level one maps onto \fBLOG_WARNING\fR, debug level two maps onto \fBLOG_NOTICE\fR, debug level three maps onto LOG_INFO\&. All higher levels are mapped to \fB LOG_DEBUG\fR\&. - - -This parameter sets the threshold for sending messages to syslog\&. Only messages with debug level less than this value will be sent to syslog\&. - - -Default: \fBsyslog = 1\fR - - -.TP -syslog only (G) -If this parameter is set then Samba debug messages are logged into the system syslog only, and not to the debug log files\&. - - -Default: \fBsyslog only = no\fR - - -.TP -template homedir (G) -When filling out the user information for a Windows NT user, the \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon uses this parameter to fill in the home directory for that user\&. If the string \fI%D\fR is present it is substituted with the user's Windows NT domain name\&. If the string \fI%U\fR is present it is substituted with the user's Windows NT user name\&. - - -Default: \fBtemplate homedir = /home/%D/%U\fR - - -.TP -template primary group (G) -This option defines the default primary group for each user created by \fBwinbindd\fR(8)'s local account management functions (similar to the 'add user script')\&. - - -Default: \fBtemplate primary group = nobody\fR - - -.TP -template shell (G) -When filling out the user information for a Windows NT user, the \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon uses this parameter to fill in the login shell for that user\&. - - -Default: \fBtemplate shell = /bin/false\fR - - -.TP -time offset (G) -This parameter is a setting in minutes to add to the normal GMT to local time conversion\&. This is useful if you are serving a lot of PCs that have incorrect daylight saving time handling\&. - - -Default: \fBtime offset = 0\fR - - -Example: \fBtime offset = 60\fR - - -.TP -time server (G) -This parameter determines if \fBnmbd\fR(8) advertises itself as a time server to Windows clients\&. - - -Default: \fBtime server = no\fR - - -.TP -timestamp logs (G) -Synonym for \fI debug timestamp\fR\&. - - -.TP -unicode (G) -Specifies whether Samba should try to use unicode on the wire by default\&. Note: This does NOT mean that samba will assume that the unix machine uses unicode! - - -Default: \fBunicode = yes\fR - - -.TP -unix charset (G) -Specifies the charset the unix machine Samba runs on uses\&. Samba needs to know this in order to be able to convert text to the charsets other SMB clients use\&. - - -Default: \fBunix charset = UTF8\fR - - -Example: \fBunix charset = ASCII\fR - - -.TP -unix extensions (G) -This boolean parameter controls whether Samba implments the CIFS UNIX extensions, as defined by HP\&. These extensions enable Samba to better serve UNIX CIFS clients by supporting features such as symbolic links, hard links, etc\&.\&.\&. These extensions require a similarly enabled client, and are of no current use to Windows clients\&. - - -Default: \fBunix extensions = yes\fR - - -.TP -unix password sync (G) -This boolean parameter controls whether Samba attempts to synchronize the UNIX password with the SMB password when the encrypted SMB password in the smbpasswd file is changed\&. If this is set to \fByes\fR the program specified in the \fIpasswd program\fRparameter is called \fBAS ROOT\fR - to allow the new UNIX password to be set without access to the old UNIX password (as the SMB password change code has no access to the old password cleartext, only the new)\&. - - -See also \fIpasswd program\fR, \fI passwd chat\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBunix password sync = no\fR - - -.TP -update encrypted (G) -This boolean parameter allows a user logging on with a plaintext password to have their encrypted (hashed) password in the smbpasswd file to be updated automatically as they log on\&. This option allows a site to migrate from plaintext password authentication (users authenticate with plaintext password over the wire, and are checked against a UNIX account database) to encrypted password authentication (the SMB challenge/response authentication mechanism) without forcing all users to re-enter their passwords via smbpasswd at the time the change is made\&. This is a convenience option to allow the change over to encrypted passwords to be made over a longer period\&. Once all users have encrypted representations of their passwords in the smbpasswd file this parameter should be set to \fBno\fR\&. - - -In order for this parameter to work correctly the \fIencrypt passwords\fR parameter must be set to \fBno\fR when this parameter is set to \fByes\fR\&. - - -Note that even when this parameter is set a user authenticating to \fBsmbd\fR must still enter a valid password in order to connect correctly, and to update their hashed (smbpasswd) passwords\&. - - -Default: \fBupdate encrypted = no\fR - - -.TP -use client driver (S) -This parameter applies only to Windows NT/2000 clients\&. It has no effect on Windows 95/98/ME clients\&. When serving a printer to Windows NT/2000 clients without first installing a valid printer driver on the Samba host, the client will be required to install a local printer driver\&. From this point on, the client will treat the print as a local printer and not a network printer connection\&. This is much the same behavior that will occur when \fBdisable spoolss = yes\fR\&. - - -The differentiating factor is that under normal circumstances, the NT/2000 client will attempt to open the network printer using MS-RPC\&. The problem is that because the client considers the printer to be local, it will attempt to issue the OpenPrinterEx() call requesting access rights associated with the logged on user\&. If the user possesses local administator rights but not root privilegde on the Samba host (often the case), the OpenPrinterEx() call will fail\&. The result is that the client will now display an "Access Denied; Unable to connect" message in the printer queue window (even though jobs may successfully be printed)\&. - - -If this parameter is enabled for a printer, then any attempt to open the printer with the PRINTER_ACCESS_ADMINISTER right is mapped to PRINTER_ACCESS_USE instead\&. Thus allowing the OpenPrinterEx() call to succeed\&. \fBThis parameter MUST not be able enabled on a print share which has valid print driver installed on the Samba server\&.\fR - - -See also \fIdisable spoolss\fR - - -Default: \fBuse client driver = no\fR - - -.TP -use mmap (G) -This global parameter determines if the tdb internals of Samba can depend on mmap working correctly on the running system\&. Samba requires a coherent mmap/read-write system memory cache\&. Currently only HPUX does not have such a coherent cache, and so this parameter is set to \fBno\fR by default on HPUX\&. On all other systems this parameter should be left alone\&. This parameter is provided to help the Samba developers track down problems with the tdb internal code\&. - - -Default: \fBuse mmap = yes\fR - - -.TP -user (S) -Synonym for \fIusername\fR\&. - - -.TP -username (S) -Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited list, in which case the supplied password will be tested against each username in turn (left to right)\&. - - -The \fIusername\fR line is needed only when the PC is unable to supply its own username\&. This is the case for the COREPLUS protocol or where your users have different WfWg usernames to UNIX usernames\&. In both these cases you may also be better using the \\\\server\\share%user syntax instead\&. - - -The \fIusername\fR line is not a great solution in many cases as it means Samba will try to validate the supplied password against each of the usernames in the \fIusername\fR line in turn\&. This is slow and a bad idea for lots of users in case of duplicate passwords\&. You may get timeouts or security breaches using this parameter unwisely\&. - - -Samba relies on the underlying UNIX security\&. This parameter does not restrict who can login, it just offers hints to the Samba server as to what usernames might correspond to the supplied password\&. Users can login as whoever they please and they will be able to do no more damage than if they started a telnet session\&. The daemon runs as the user that they log in as, so they cannot do anything that user cannot do\&. - - -To restrict a service to a particular set of users you can use the \fIvalid users \fR parameter\&. - - -If any of the usernames begin with a '@' then the name will be looked up first in the NIS netgroups list (if Samba is compiled with netgroup support), followed by a lookup in the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users in the group of that name\&. - - -If any of the usernames begin with a '+' then the name will be looked up only in the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users in the group of that name\&. - - -If any of the usernames begin with a '&' then the name will be looked up only in the NIS netgroups database (if Samba is compiled with netgroup support) and will expand to a list of all users in the netgroup group of that name\&. - - -Note that searching though a groups database can take quite some time, and some clients may time out during the search\&. - - -See the section NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION for more information on how this parameter determines access to the services\&. - - -Default: \fBThe guest account if a guest service, else <empty string>.\fR - - -Examples:\fBusername = fred, mary, jack, jane, @users, @pcgroup\fR - - -.TP -username level (G) -This option helps Samba to try and 'guess' at the real UNIX username, as many DOS clients send an all-uppercase username\&. By default Samba tries all lowercase, followed by the username with the first letter capitalized, and fails if the username is not found on the UNIX machine\&. - - -If this parameter is set to non-zero the behavior changes\&. This parameter is a number that specifies the number of uppercase combinations to try while trying to determine the UNIX user name\&. The higher the number the more combinations will be tried, but the slower the discovery of usernames will be\&. Use this parameter when you have strange usernames on your UNIX machine, such as \fBAstrangeUser \fR\&. - - -Default: \fBusername level = 0\fR - - -Example: \fBusername level = 5\fR - - -.TP -username map (G) -This option allows you to specify a file containing a mapping of usernames from the clients to the server\&. This can be used for several purposes\&. The most common is to map usernames that users use on DOS or Windows machines to those that the UNIX box uses\&. The other is to map multiple users to a single username so that they can more easily share files\&. - - -The map file is parsed line by line\&. Each line should contain a single UNIX username on the left then a '=' followed by a list of usernames on the right\&. The list of usernames on the right may contain names of the form @group in which case they will match any UNIX username in that group\&. The special client name '*' is a wildcard and matches any name\&. Each line of the map file may be up to 1023 characters long\&. - - -The file is processed on each line by taking the supplied username and comparing it with each username on the right hand side of the '=' signs\&. If the supplied name matches any of the names on the right hand side then it is replaced with the name on the left\&. Processing then continues with the next line\&. - - -If any line begins with a '#' or a ';' then it is ignored - - -If any line begins with an '!' then the processing will stop after that line if a mapping was done by the line\&. Otherwise mapping continues with every line being processed\&. Using '!' is most useful when you have a wildcard mapping line later in the file\&. - - -For example to map from the name \fBadmin\fR or \fBadministrator\fR to the UNIX name \fB root\fR you would use: - - -\fBroot = admin administrator\fR - - -Or to map anyone in the UNIX group \fBsystem\fR to the UNIX name \fBsys\fR you would use: - - -\fBsys = @system\fR - - -You can have as many mappings as you like in a username map file\&. - - -If your system supports the NIS NETGROUP option then the netgroup database is checked before the \fI/etc/group \fR database for matching groups\&. - - -You can map Windows usernames that have spaces in them by using double quotes around the name\&. For example: - - -\fBtridge = "Andrew Tridgell"\fR - - -would map the windows username "Andrew Tridgell" to the unix username "tridge"\&. - - -The following example would map mary and fred to the unix user sys, and map the rest to guest\&. Note the use of the '!' to tell Samba to stop processing if it gets a match on that line\&. - - -.nf - -!sys = mary fred -guest = * -.fi - - -Note that the remapping is applied to all occurrences of usernames\&. Thus if you connect to \\\\server\\fred and \fB fred\fR is remapped to \fBmary\fR then you will actually be connecting to \\\\server\\mary and will need to supply a password suitable for \fBmary\fR not \fBfred\fR\&. The only exception to this is the username passed to the \fI password server\fR (if you have one)\&. The password server will receive whatever username the client supplies without modification\&. - - -Also note that no reverse mapping is done\&. The main effect this has is with printing\&. Users who have been mapped may have trouble deleting print jobs as PrintManager under WfWg will think they don't own the print job\&. - - -Default: \fBno username map\fR - - -Example: \fBusername map = /usr/local/samba/lib/users.map\fR - - -.TP -users (S) -Synonym for \fI username\fR\&. - - -.TP -use sendfile (S) -If this parameter is \fByes\fR, and Samba was built with the --with-sendfile-support option, and the underlying operating system supports sendfile system call, then some SMB read calls (mainly ReadAndX and ReadRaw) will use the more efficient sendfile system call for files that are exclusively oplocked\&. This may make more efficient use of the system CPU's and cause Samba to be faster\&. This is off by default as it's effects are unknown as yet\&. - - -Default: \fBuse sendfile = no\fR - - -.TP -use spnego (G) -This variable controls controls whether samba will try to use Simple and Protected NEGOciation (as specified by rfc2478) with WindowsXP and Windows2000 clients to agree upon an authentication mechanism\&. Unless further issues are discovered with our SPNEGO implementation, there is no reason this should ever be disabled\&. - - -Default: \fBuse spnego = yes\fR - - -.TP -utmp (G) -This boolean parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option \fB --with-utmp\fR\&. If set to \fByes\fR then Samba will attempt to add utmp or utmpx records (depending on the UNIX system) whenever a connection is made to a Samba server\&. Sites may use this to record the user connecting to a Samba share\&. - - -Due to the requirements of the utmp record, we are required to create a unique identifier for the incoming user\&. Enabling this option creates an n^2 algorithm to find this number\&. This may impede performance on large installations\&. - - -See also the \fI utmp directory\fR parameter\&. - - -Default: \fButmp = no\fR - - -.TP -utmp directory (G) -This parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option \fB --with-utmp\fR\&. It specifies a directory pathname that is used to store the utmp or utmpx files (depending on the UNIX system) that record user connections to a Samba server\&. See also the \fIutmp\fR parameter\&. By default this is not set, meaning the system will use whatever utmp file the native system is set to use (usually \fI/var/run/utmp\fR on Linux)\&. - - -Default: \fBno utmp directory\fR - - -Example: \fButmp directory = /var/run/utmp\fR - - -.TP --valid (S) -This parameter indicates whether a share is valid and thus can be used\&. When this parameter is set to false, the share will be in no way visible nor accessible\&. - - -This option should not be used by regular users but might be of help to developers\&. Samba uses this option internally to mark shares as deleted\&. - - -Default: \fBTrue\fR - - -.TP -valid users (S) -This is a list of users that should be allowed to login to this service\&. Names starting with '@', '+' and '&' are interpreted using the same rules as described in the \fIinvalid users\fR parameter\&. - - -If this is empty (the default) then any user can login\&. If a username is in both this list and the \fIinvalid users\fR list then access is denied for that user\&. - - -The current servicename is substituted for \fI%S \fR\&. This is useful in the [homes] section\&. - - -See also \fIinvalid users \fR - - -Default: \fBNo valid users list (anyone can login) \fR - - -Example: \fBvalid users = greg, @pcusers\fR - - -.TP -veto files (S) -This is a list of files and directories that are neither visible nor accessible\&. Each entry in the list must be separated by a '/', which allows spaces to be included in the entry\&. '*' and '?' can be used to specify multiple files or directories as in DOS wildcards\&. - - -Each entry must be a unix path, not a DOS path and must \fBnot\fR include the unix directory separator '/'\&. - - -Note that the \fIcase sensitive\fR option is applicable in vetoing files\&. - - -One feature of the veto files parameter that it is important to be aware of is Samba's behaviour when trying to delete a directory\&. If a directory that is to be deleted contains nothing but veto files this deletion will \fBfail\fR unless you also set the \fIdelete veto files\fR parameter to \fIyes\fR\&. - - -Setting this parameter will affect the performance of Samba, as it will be forced to check all files and directories for a match as they are scanned\&. - - -See also \fIhide files \fR and \fI case sensitive\fR\&. - - -Default: \fBNo files or directories are vetoed\&. \fR - - -Examples: -.nf - -; Veto any files containing the word Security, -; any ending in \&.tmp, and any directory containing the -; word root\&. -veto files = /*Security*/*\&.tmp/*root*/ - -; Veto the Apple specific files that a NetAtalk server -; creates\&. -veto files = /\&.AppleDouble/\&.bin/\&.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ -.fi - - -.TP -veto oplock files (S) -This parameter is only valid when the \fIoplocks\fR parameter is turned on for a share\&. It allows the Samba administrator to selectively turn off the granting of oplocks on selected files that match a wildcarded list, similar to the wildcarded list used in the \fIveto files\fR parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBNo files are vetoed for oplock grants\fR - - -You might want to do this on files that you know will be heavily contended for by clients\&. A good example of this is in the NetBench SMB benchmark program, which causes heavy client contention for files ending in \fI\&.SEM\fR\&. To cause Samba not to grant oplocks on these files you would use the line (either in the [global] section or in the section for the particular NetBench share : - - -Example: \fBveto oplock files = /*.SEM/\fR - - -.TP -vfs object (S) -Synonym for \fIvfs objects\fR \&. - - -.TP -vfs objects (S) -This parameter specifies the backend names which are used for Samba VFS I/O operations\&. By default, normal disk I/O operations are used but these can be overloaded with one or more VFS objects\&. - - -Default: \fBno value\fR - - -Example: \fBvfs objects = extd_audit recycle\fR - - -.TP -volume (S) -This allows you to override the volume label returned for a share\&. Useful for CDROMs with installation programs that insist on a particular volume label\&. - - -Default: \fBthe name of the share\fR - - -.TP -wide links (S) -This parameter controls whether or not links in the UNIX file system may be followed by the server\&. Links that point to areas within the directory tree exported by the server are always allowed; this parameter controls access only to areas that are outside the directory tree being exported\&. - - -Note that setting this parameter can have a negative effect on your server performance due to the extra system calls that Samba has to do in order to perform the link checks\&. - - -Default: \fBwide links = yes\fR - - -.TP -winbind cache time (G) -This parameter specifies the number of seconds the \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon will cache user and group information before querying a Windows NT server again\&. - - -Default: \fBwinbind cache type = 300\fR - - -.TP -winbind enable local accounts (G) -This parameter controls whether or not winbindd will act as a stand in replacement for the various account management hooks in smb\&.conf (e\&.g\&. 'add user script')\&. If enabled, winbindd will support the creation of local users and groups as another source of UNIX account information available via getpwnam() or getgrgid(), etc\&.\&.\&. - - -Default: \fBwinbind enable local accounts = yes\fR - - -.TP -winbind enum groups (G) -On large installations using \fBwinbindd\fR(8) it may be necessary to suppress the enumeration of groups through the \fBsetgrent()\fR, \fBgetgrent()\fR and \fBendgrent()\fR group of system calls\&. If the \fIwinbind enum groups\fR parameter is \fBno\fR, calls to the \fBgetgrent()\fR system call will not return any data\&. - - -\fBWarning:\fR Turning off group enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly\&. - - -Default: \fBwinbind enum groups = yes \fR - - -.TP -winbind enum users (G) -On large installations using \fBwinbindd\fR(8) it may be necessary to suppress the enumeration of users through the \fBsetpwent()\fR, \fBgetpwent()\fR and \fBendpwent()\fR group of system calls\&. If the \fIwinbind enum users\fR parameter is \fBno\fR, calls to the \fBgetpwent\fR system call will not return any data\&. - - -\fBWarning:\fR Turning off user enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly\&. For example, the finger program relies on having access to the full user list when searching for matching usernames\&. - - -Default: \fBwinbind enum users = yes \fR - - -.TP -winbind gid (G) -This parameter is now an alias for \fBidmap gid\fR - - -The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of group ids that are allocated by the \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon\&. This range of group ids should have no existing local or NIS groups within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise\&. - - -Default: \fBwinbind gid = <empty string>\fR - - -Example: \fBwinbind gid = 10000-20000\fR - - -.TP -winbind separator (G) -This parameter allows an admin to define the character used when listing a username of the form of \fIDOMAIN \fR\\\fIuser\fR\&. This parameter is only applicable when using the \fIpam_winbind\&.so\fR and \fInss_winbind\&.so\fR modules for UNIX services\&. - - -Please note that setting this parameter to + causes problems with group membership at least on glibc systems, as the character + is used as a special character for NIS in /etc/group\&. - - -Default: \fBwinbind separator = '\'\fR - - -Example: \fBwinbind separator = +\fR - - -.TP -winbind trusted domains only (G) -This parameter is designed to allow Samba servers that are members of a Samba controlled domain to use UNIX accounts distributed vi NIS, rsync, or LDAP as the uid's for winbindd users in the hosts primary domain\&. Therefore, the user 'SAMBA\\user1' would be mapped to the account 'user1' in /etc/passwd instead of allocating a new uid for him or her\&. - - -Default: \fBwinbind trusted domains only = <no>\fR - - -.TP -winbind uid (G) -This parameter is now an alias for \fBidmap uid\fR - - -The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of user ids that are allocated by the \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon\&. This range of ids should have no existing local or NIS users within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise\&. - - -Default: \fBwinbind uid = <empty string>\fR - - -Example: \fBwinbind uid = 10000-20000\fR - - -.TP -winbind use default domain (G) -This parameter specifies whether the \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon should operate on users without domain component in their username\&. Users without a domain component are treated as is part of the winbindd server's own domain\&. While this does not benifit Windows users, it makes SSH, FTP and e-mail function in a way much closer to the way they would in a native unix system\&. - - -Default: \fBwinbind use default domain = <no>\fR - - -Example: \fBwinbind use default domain = yes\fR - - -.TP -wins hook (G) -When Samba is running as a WINS server this allows you to call an external program for all changes to the WINS database\&. The primary use for this option is to allow the dynamic update of external name resolution databases such as dynamic DNS\&. - - -The wins hook parameter specifies the name of a script or executable that will be called as follows: - - -\fBwins_hook operation name nametype ttl IP_list\fR - - -The first argument is the operation and is one of "add", "delete", or "refresh"\&. In most cases the operation can be ignored as the rest of the parameters provide sufficient information\&. Note that "refresh" may sometimes be called when the name has not previously been added, in that case it should be treated as an add\&. - -The second argument is the NetBIOS name\&. If the name is not a legal name then the wins hook is not called\&. Legal names contain only letters, digits, hyphens, underscores and periods\&. - -The third argument is the NetBIOS name type as a 2 digit hexadecimal number\&. - -The fourth argument is the TTL (time to live) for the name in seconds\&. - -The fifth and subsequent arguments are the IP addresses currently registered for that name\&. If this list is empty then the name should be deleted\&. - -An example script that calls the BIND dynamic DNS update program \fBnsupdate\fR is provided in the examples directory of the Samba source code\&. - - -.TP -wins partners (G) -A space separated list of partners' IP addresses for WINS replication\&. WINS partners are always defined as push/pull partners as defining only one way WINS replication is unreliable\&. WINS replication is currently experimental and unreliable between samba servers\&. - - -Default: \fBwins partners = \fR - - -Example: \fBwins partners = 192.168.0.1 172.16.1.2\fR - - -.TP -wins proxy (G) -This is a boolean that controls if \fBnmbd\fR(8) will respond to broadcast name queries on behalf of other hosts\&. You may need to set this to \fByes\fR for some older clients\&. - - -Default: \fBwins proxy = no\fR - - -.TP -wins server (G) -This specifies the IP address (or DNS name: IP address for preference) of the WINS server that \fBnmbd\fR(8) should register with\&. If you have a WINS server on your network then you should set this to the WINS server's IP\&. - - -You should point this at your WINS server if you have a multi-subnetted network\&. - - -If you want to work in multiple namespaces, you can give every wins server a 'tag'\&. For each tag, only one (working) server will be queried for a name\&. The tag should be seperated from the ip address by a colon\&. - - -You need to set up Samba to point to a WINS server if you have multiple subnets and wish cross-subnet browsing to work correctly\&. - -See the ???\&. - - -Default: \fBnot enabled\fR - - -Example: \fBwins server = mary:192.9.200.1 fred:192.168.3.199 mary:192.168.2.61\fR - - -For this example when querying a certain name, 192\&.19\&.200\&.1 will be asked first and if that doesn't respond 192\&.168\&.2\&.61\&. If either of those doesn't know the name 192\&.168\&.3\&.199 will be queried\&. - - -Example: \fBwins server = 192.9.200.1 192.168.2.61\fR - - -.TP -wins support (G) -This boolean controls if the \fBnmbd\fR(8) process in Samba will act as a WINS server\&. You should not set this to \fByes\fR unless you have a multi-subnetted network and you wish a particular \fBnmbd\fR to be your WINS server\&. Note that you should \fBNEVER\fR set this to \fByes\fR on more than one machine in your network\&. - - -Default: \fBwins support = no\fR - - -.TP -workgroup (G) -This controls what workgroup your server will appear to be in when queried by clients\&. Note that this parameter also controls the Domain name used with the \fBsecurity = domain\fR setting\&. - - -Default: \fBset at compile time to WORKGROUP\fR - - -Example: \fBworkgroup = MYGROUP\fR - - -.TP -writable (S) -Synonym for \fI writeable\fR for people who can't spell :-)\&. - - -.TP -writeable (S) -Inverted synonym for \fIread only\fR\&. - - -.TP -write cache size (S) -If this integer parameter is set to non-zero value, Samba will create an in-memory cache for each oplocked file (it does \fBnot\fR do this for non-oplocked files)\&. All writes that the client does not request to be flushed directly to disk will be stored in this cache if possible\&. The cache is flushed onto disk when a write comes in whose offset would not fit into the cache or when the file is closed by the client\&. Reads for the file are also served from this cache if the data is stored within it\&. - - -This cache allows Samba to batch client writes into a more efficient write size for RAID disks (i\&.e\&. writes may be tuned to be the RAID stripe size) and can improve performance on systems where the disk subsystem is a bottleneck but there is free memory for userspace programs\&. - - -The integer parameter specifies the size of this cache (per oplocked file) in bytes\&. - - -Default: \fBwrite cache size = 0\fR - - -Example: \fBwrite cache size = 262144\fR - - -for a 256k cache size per file\&. - - -.TP -write list (S) -This is a list of users that are given read-write access to a service\&. If the connecting user is in this list then they will be given write access, no matter what the \fIread only\fR option is set to\&. The list can include group names using the @group syntax\&. - - -Note that if a user is in both the read list and the write list then they will be given write access\&. - - -See also the \fIread list \fR option\&. - - -Default: \fBwrite list = <empty string>\fR - - -Example: \fBwrite list = admin, root, @staff\fR - - -.TP -write ok (S) -Inverted synonym for \fIread only\fR\&. - - -.TP -write raw (G) -This parameter controls whether or not the server will support raw write SMB's when transferring data from clients\&. You should never need to change this parameter\&. - - -Default: \fBwrite raw = yes\fR - - -.TP -wtmp directory (G) -This parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option \fB --with-utmp\fR\&. It specifies a directory pathname that is used to store the wtmp or wtmpx files (depending on the UNIX system) that record user connections to a Samba server\&. The difference with the utmp directory is the fact that user info is kept after a user has logged out\&. - - -See also the \fIutmp\fR parameter\&. By default this is not set, meaning the system will use whatever utmp file the native system is set to use (usually \fI/var/run/wtmp\fR on Linux)\&. - - -Default: \fBno wtmp directory\fR - - -Example: \fBwtmp directory = /var/log/wtmp\fR - - -.SH "WARNINGS" - -.PP -Although the configuration file permits service names to contain spaces, your client software may not\&. Spaces will be ignored in comparisons anyway, so it shouldn't be a problem - but be aware of the possibility\&. - -.PP -On a similar note, many clients - especially DOS clients - limit service names to eight characters\&. \fBsmbd\fR(8) has no such limitation, but attempts to connect from such clients will fail if they truncate the service names\&. For this reason you should probably keep your service names down to eight characters in length\&. - -.PP -Use of the [homes] and [printers] special sections make life for an administrator easy, but the various combinations of default attributes can be tricky\&. Take extreme care when designing these sections\&. In particular, ensure that the permissions on spool directories are correct\&. - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -\fBsamba\fR(7), \fBsmbpasswd\fR(8), \fBswat\fR(8), \fBsmbd\fR(8), \fBnmbd\fR(8), \fBsmbclient\fR(1), \fBnmblookup\fR(1), \fBtestparm\fR(1), \fBtestprns\fR(1)\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbcacls.1 b/docs/manpages/smbcacls.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 006679962c3..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/smbcacls.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,246 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "SMBCACLS" 1 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -smbcacls \- Set or get ACLs on an NT file or directory names -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBsmbcacls\fR {//server/share} {filename} [-D acls] [-M acls] [-a acls] [-S acls] [-C name] [-G name] [-n] [-t] [-U username] [-h] [-d] - -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -The \fBsmbcacls\fR program manipulates NT Access Control Lists (ACLs) on SMB file shares\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.PP -The following options are available to the \fBsmbcacls\fR program\&. The format of ACLs is described in the section ACL FORMAT - -.TP --a acls -Add the ACLs specified to the ACL list\&. Existing access control entries are unchanged\&. - - -.TP --M acls -Modify the mask value (permissions) for the ACLs specified on the command line\&. An error will be printed for each ACL specified that was not already present in the ACL list - - -.TP --D acls -Delete any ACLs specified on the command line\&. An error will be printed for each ACL specified that was not already present in the ACL list\&. - - -.TP --S acls -This command sets the ACLs on the file with only the ones specified on the command line\&. All other ACLs are erased\&. Note that the ACL specified must contain at least a revision, type, owner and group for the call to succeed\&. - - -.TP --U username -Specifies a username used to connect to the specified service\&. The username may be of the form "username" in which case the user is prompted to enter in a password and the workgroup specified in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file is used, or "username%password" or "DOMAIN\\username%password" and the password and workgroup names are used as provided\&. - - -.TP --C name -The owner of a file or directory can be changed to the name given using the \fI-C\fR option\&. The name can be a sid in the form S-1-x-y-z or a name resolved against the server specified in the first argument\&. - - -This command is a shortcut for -M OWNER:name\&. - - -.TP --G name -The group owner of a file or directory can be changed to the name given using the \fI-G\fR option\&. The name can be a sid in the form S-1-x-y-z or a name resolved against the server specified n the first argument\&. - - -This command is a shortcut for -M GROUP:name\&. - - -.TP --n -This option displays all ACL information in numeric format\&. The default is to convert SIDs to names and ACE types and masks to a readable string format\&. - - -.TP --t -Don't actually do anything, only validate the correctness of the arguments\&. - - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.TP --V -Prints the program version number\&. - - -.TP --s <configuration file> -The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&. - - -.TP --d|--debug=debuglevel -\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&. - - -The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day-to-day running - it generates a small amount of information about operations carried out\&. - - -Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&. - - -Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. - - -.TP --l|--logfile=logbasename -File name for log/debug files\&. The extension \fB"\&.client"\fR will be appended\&. The log file is never removed by the client\&. - - -.SH "ACL FORMAT" - -.PP -The format of an ACL is one or more ACL entries separated by either commas or newlines\&. An ACL entry is one of the following: - -.PP - -.nf - -REVISION:<revision number> -OWNER:<sid or name> -GROUP:<sid or name> -ACL:<sid or name>:<type>/<flags>/<mask> -.fi - - -.PP -The revision of the ACL specifies the internal Windows NT ACL revision for the security descriptor\&. If not specified it defaults to 1\&. Using values other than 1 may cause strange behaviour\&. - -.PP -The owner and group specify the owner and group sids for the object\&. If a SID in the format CWS-1-x-y-z is specified this is used, otherwise the name specified is resolved using the server on which the file or directory resides\&. - -.PP -ACLs specify permissions granted to the SID\&. This SID again can be specified in CWS-1-x-y-z format or as a name in which case it is resolved against the server on which the file or directory resides\&. The type, flags and mask values determine the type of access granted to the SID\&. - -.PP -The type can be either 0 or 1 corresponding to ALLOWED or DENIED access to the SID\&. The flags values are generally zero for file ACLs and either 9 or 2 for directory ACLs\&. Some common flags are: - -.TP 3 -\(bu -\fB#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_OBJECT_INHERIT 0x1\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fB#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_CONTAINER_INHERIT 0x2\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fB#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_NO_PROPAGATE_INHERIT 0x4\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fB#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_INHERIT_ONLY 0x8\fR - -.LP - -.PP -At present flags can only be specified as decimal or hexadecimal values\&. - -.PP -The mask is a value which expresses the access right granted to the SID\&. It can be given as a decimal or hexadecimal value, or by using one of the following text strings which map to the NT file permissions of the same name\&. - -.TP 3 -\(bu -\fBR\fR - Allow read access - -.TP -\(bu -\fBW\fR - Allow write access - -.TP -\(bu -\fBX\fR - Execute permission on the object - -.TP -\(bu -\fBD\fR - Delete the object - -.TP -\(bu -\fBP\fR - Change permissions - -.TP -\(bu -\fBO\fR - Take ownership - -.LP - -.PP -The following combined permissions can be specified: - -.TP 3 -\(bu -\fBREAD\fR - Equivalent to 'RX' permissions - -.TP -\(bu -\fBCHANGE\fR - Equivalent to 'RXWD' permissions - -.TP -\(bu -\fBFULL\fR - Equivalent to 'RWXDPO' permissions - -.LP - -.SH "EXIT STATUS" - -.PP -The \fBsmbcacls\fR program sets the exit status depending on the success or otherwise of the operations performed\&. The exit status may be one of the following values\&. - -.PP -If the operation succeeded, smbcacls returns and exit status of 0\&. If \fBsmbcacls\fR couldn't connect to the specified server, or there was an error getting or setting the ACLs, an exit status of 1 is returned\&. If there was an error parsing any command line arguments, an exit status of 2 is returned\&. - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -\fBsmbcacls\fR was written by Andrew Tridgell and Tim Potter\&. - -.PP -The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbclient.1 b/docs/manpages/smbclient.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e14a2770a7b..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/smbclient.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,637 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "SMBCLIENT" 1 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -smbclient \- ftp-like client to access SMB/CIFS resources on servers -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBsmbclient\fR {servicename} [password] [-b <buffer size>] [-d debuglevel] [-D Directory] - [-U username] [-W workgroup] [-M <netbios name>] [-m maxprotocol] [-A authfile] [-N] [-l logfile] [-L <netbios name>] [-I destinationIP] [-E] [-c <command string>] [-i scope] [-O <socket options>] [-p port] [-R <name resolve order>] [-s <smb config file>] [-T<c|x>IXFqgbNan] [-k] - -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -\fBsmbclient\fR is a client that can 'talk' to an SMB/CIFS server\&. It offers an interface similar to that of the ftp program (see \fBftp\fR(1))\&. Operations include things like getting files from the server to the local machine, putting files from the local machine to the server, retrieving directory information from the server and so on\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP -servicename -servicename is the name of the service you want to use on the server\&. A service name takes the form \fI//server/service\fR where \fIserver \fR is the NetBIOS name of the SMB/CIFS server offering the desired service and \fIservice\fR is the name of the service offered\&. Thus to connect to the service "printer" on the SMB/CIFS server "smbserver", you would use the servicename \fI//smbserver/printer \fR - - -Note that the server name required is NOT necessarily the IP (DNS) host name of the server ! The name required is a NetBIOS server name, which may or may not be the same as the IP hostname of the machine running the server\&. - - -The server name is looked up according to either the \fI-R\fR parameter to \fBsmbclient\fR or using the name resolve order parameter in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file, allowing an administrator to change the order and methods by which server names are looked up\&. - - -.TP -password -The password required to access the specified service on the specified server\&. If this parameter is supplied, the \fI-N\fR option (suppress password prompt) is assumed\&. - - -There is no default password\&. If no password is supplied on the command line (either by using this parameter or adding a password to the \fI-U\fR option (see below)) and the \fI-N\fR option is not specified, the client will prompt for a password, even if the desired service does not require one\&. (If no password is required, simply press ENTER to provide a null password\&.) - - -Note: Some servers (including OS/2 and Windows for Workgroups) insist on an uppercase password\&. Lowercase or mixed case passwords may be rejected by these servers\&. - - -Be cautious about including passwords in scripts\&. - - -.TP --R <name resolve order> -This option is used by the programs in the Samba suite to determine what naming services and in what order to resolve host names to IP addresses\&. The option takes a space-separated string of different name resolution options\&. - - -The options are :"lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast"\&. They cause names to be resolved as follows: - - -\fBlmhosts\fR: Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file\&. If the line in lmhosts has no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see the \fBlmhosts\fR(5) for details) then any name type matches for lookup\&. - -\fBhost\fR: Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, using the system \fI/etc/hosts \fR, NIS, or DNS lookups\&. This method of name resolution is operating system dependent, for instance on IRIX or Solaris this may be controlled by the \fI/etc/nsswitch\&.conf\fR file)\&. Note that this method is only used if the NetBIOS name type being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type, otherwise it is ignored\&. - -\fBwins\fR: Query a name with the IP address listed in the \fIwins server\fR parameter\&. If no WINS server has been specified this method will be ignored\&. - -\fBbcast\fR: Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces listed in the \fIinterfaces\fR parameter\&. This is the least reliable of the name resolution methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally connected subnet\&. - -If this parameter is not set then the name resolve order defined in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file parameter (name resolve order) will be used\&. - - -The default order is lmhosts, host, wins, bcast and without this parameter or any entry in the \fIname resolve order \fR parameter of the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file the name resolution methods will be attempted in this order\&. - - -.TP --M NetBIOS name -This options allows you to send messages, using the "WinPopup" protocol, to another computer\&. Once a connection is established you then type your message, pressing ^D (control-D) to end\&. - - -If the receiving computer is running WinPopup the user will receive the message and probably a beep\&. If they are not running WinPopup the message will be lost, and no error message will occur\&. - - -The message is also automatically truncated if the message is over 1600 bytes, as this is the limit of the protocol\&. - - -One useful trick is to cat the message through \fBsmbclient\fR\&. For example: \fB cat mymessage.txt | smbclient -M FRED \fR will send the message in the file \fImymessage\&.txt\fR to the machine FRED\&. - - -You may also find the \fI-U\fR and \fI-I\fR options useful, as they allow you to control the FROM and TO parts of the message\&. - - -See the \fImessage command\fR parameter in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) for a description of how to handle incoming WinPopup messages in Samba\&. - - -\fBNote\fR: Copy WinPopup into the startup group on your WfWg PCs if you want them to always be able to receive messages\&. - - -.TP --p port -This number is the TCP port number that will be used when making connections to the server\&. The standard (well-known) TCP port number for an SMB/CIFS server is 139, which is the default\&. - - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.TP --I IP-address -\fIIP address\fR is the address of the server to connect to\&. It should be specified in standard "a\&.b\&.c\&.d" notation\&. - - -Normally the client would attempt to locate a named SMB/CIFS server by looking it up via the NetBIOS name resolution mechanism described above in the \fIname resolve order\fR parameter above\&. Using this parameter will force the client to assume that the server is on the machine with the specified IP address and the NetBIOS name component of the resource being connected to will be ignored\&. - - -There is no default for this parameter\&. If not supplied, it will be determined automatically by the client as described above\&. - - -.TP --E -This parameter causes the client to write messages to the standard error stream (stderr) rather than to the standard output stream\&. - - -By default, the client writes messages to standard output - typically the user's tty\&. - - -.TP --L -This option allows you to look at what services are available on a server\&. You use it as \fBsmbclient -L host\fR and a list should appear\&. The \fI-I \fR option may be useful if your NetBIOS names don't match your TCP/IP DNS host names or if you are trying to reach a host on another network\&. - - -.TP --t terminal code -This option tells \fBsmbclient\fR how to interpret filenames coming from the remote server\&. Usually Asian language multibyte UNIX implementations use different character sets than SMB/CIFS servers (\fBEUC\fR instead of \fB SJIS\fR for example)\&. Setting this parameter will let \fBsmbclient\fR convert between the UNIX filenames and the SMB filenames correctly\&. This option has not been seriously tested and may have some problems\&. - - -The terminal codes include CWsjis, CWeuc, CWjis7, CWjis8, CWjunet, CWhex, CWcap\&. This is not a complete list, check the Samba source code for the complete list\&. - - -.TP --b buffersize -This option changes the transmit/send buffer size when getting or putting a file from/to the server\&. The default is 65520 bytes\&. Setting this value smaller (to 1200 bytes) has been observed to speed up file transfers to and from a Win9x server\&. - - -.TP --V -Prints the program version number\&. - - -.TP --s <configuration file> -The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&. - - -.TP --d|--debug=debuglevel -\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&. - - -The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day-to-day running - it generates a small amount of information about operations carried out\&. - - -Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&. - - -Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. - - -.TP --l|--logfile=logbasename -File name for log/debug files\&. The extension \fB"\&.client"\fR will be appended\&. The log file is never removed by the client\&. - - -.TP --N -If specified, this parameter suppresses the normal password prompt from the client to the user\&. This is useful when accessing a service that does not require a password\&. - - -Unless a password is specified on the command line or this parameter is specified, the client will request a password\&. - - -.TP --k -Try to authenticate with kerberos\&. Only useful in an Active Directory environment\&. - - -.TP --A|--authfile=filename -This option allows you to specify a file from which to read the username and password used in the connection\&. The format of the file is - - -.nf - -username = <value> -password = <value> -domain = <value> -.fi - - -Make certain that the permissions on the file restrict access from unwanted users\&. - - -.TP --U|--user=username[%password] -Sets the SMB username or username and password\&. - - -If %password is not specified, the user will be prompted\&. The client will first check the \fBUSER\fR environment variable, then the \fBLOGNAME\fR variable and if either exists, the string is uppercased\&. If these environmental variables are not found, the username \fBGUEST\fR is used\&. - - -A third option is to use a credentials file which contains the plaintext of the username and password\&. This option is mainly provided for scripts where the admin does not wish to pass the credentials on the command line or via environment variables\&. If this method is used, make certain that the permissions on the file restrict access from unwanted users\&. See the \fI-A\fR for more details\&. - - -Be cautious about including passwords in scripts\&. Also, on many systems the command line of a running process may be seen via the \fBps\fR command\&. To be safe always allow \fBrpcclient\fR to prompt for a password and type it in directly\&. - - -.TP --n <primary NetBIOS name> -This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself\&. This is identical to setting the \fInetbios name\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in \fIsmb\&.conf\fR\&. - - -.TP --i <scope> -This specifies a NetBIOS scope that \fBnmblookup\fR will use to communicate with when generating NetBIOS names\&. For details on the use of NetBIOS scopes, see rfc1001\&.txt and rfc1002\&.txt\&. NetBIOS scopes are \fBvery\fR rarely used, only set this parameter if you are the system administrator in charge of all the NetBIOS systems you communicate with\&. - - -.TP --W|--workgroup=domain -Set the SMB domain of the username\&. This overrides the default domain which is the domain defined in smb\&.conf\&. If the domain specified is the same as the servers NetBIOS name, it causes the client to log on using the servers local SAM (as opposed to the Domain SAM)\&. - - -.TP --O socket options -TCP socket options to set on the client socket\&. See the socket options parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR manual page for the list of valid options\&. - - -.TP --T tar options -smbclient may be used to create \fBtar(1) \fR compatible backups of all the files on an SMB/CIFS share\&. The secondary tar flags that can be given to this option are : - - -\fIc\fR - Create a tar file on UNIX\&. Must be followed by the name of a tar file, tape device or "-" for standard output\&. If using standard output you must turn the log level to its lowest value -d0 to avoid corrupting your tar file\&. This flag is mutually exclusive with the \fIx\fR flag\&. - -\fIx\fR - Extract (restore) a local tar file back to a share\&. Unless the -D option is given, the tar files will be restored from the top level of the share\&. Must be followed by the name of the tar file, device or "-" for standard input\&. Mutually exclusive with the \fIc\fR flag\&. Restored files have their creation times (mtime) set to the date saved in the tar file\&. Directories currently do not get their creation dates restored properly\&. - -\fII\fR - Include files and directories\&. Is the default behavior when filenames are specified above\&. Causes tar files to be included in an extract or create (and therefore everything else to be excluded)\&. See example below\&. Filename globbing works in one of two ways\&. See r below\&. - -\fIX\fR - Exclude files and directories\&. Causes tar files to be excluded from an extract or create\&. See example below\&. Filename globbing works in one of two ways now\&. See \fIr\fR below\&. - -\fIb\fR - Blocksize\&. Must be followed by a valid (greater than zero) blocksize\&. Causes tar file to be written out in blocksize*TBLOCK (usually 512 byte) blocks\&. - -\fIg\fR - Incremental\&. Only back up files that have the archive bit set\&. Useful only with the \fIc\fR flag\&. - -\fIq\fR - Quiet\&. Keeps tar from printing diagnostics as it works\&. This is the same as tarmode quiet\&. - -\fIr\fR - Regular expression include or exclude\&. Uses regular expression matching for excluding or excluding files if compiled with HAVE_REGEX_H\&. However this mode can be very slow\&. If not compiled with HAVE_REGEX_H, does a limited wildcard match on '*' and '?'\&. - -\fIN\fR - Newer than\&. Must be followed by the name of a file whose date is compared against files found on the share during a create\&. Only files newer than the file specified are backed up to the tar file\&. Useful only with the \fIc\fR flag\&. - -\fIa\fR - Set archive bit\&. Causes the archive bit to be reset when a file is backed up\&. Useful with the \fIg\fR and \fIc\fR flags\&. - -\fBTar Long File Names\fR - - -\fBsmbclient\fR's tar option now supports long file names both on backup and restore\&. However, the full path name of the file must be less than 1024 bytes\&. Also, when a tar archive is created, \fBsmbclient\fR's tar option places all files in the archive with relative names, not absolute names\&. - - -\fBTar Filenames\fR - - -All file names can be given as DOS path names (with '\\\\' as the component separator) or as UNIX path names (with '/' as the component separator)\&. - - -\fBExamples\fR - - -Restore from tar file \fIbackup\&.tar\fR into myshare on mypc (no password on share)\&. - - -\fBsmbclient //mypc/yshare "" -N -Tx backup.tar \fR - - -Restore everything except \fIusers/docs\fR - - -\fBsmbclient //mypc/myshare "" -N -TXx backup.tar users/docs\fR - - -Create a tar file of the files beneath \fI users/docs\fR\&. - - -\fBsmbclient //mypc/myshare "" -N -Tc backup.tar users/docs \fR - - -Create the same tar file as above, but now use a DOS path name\&. - - -\fBsmbclient //mypc/myshare "" -N -tc backup.tar users\edocs \fR - - -Create a tar file of all the files and directories in the share\&. - - -\fBsmbclient //mypc/myshare "" -N -Tc backup.tar * \fR - - -.TP --D initial directory -Change to initial directory before starting\&. Probably only of any use with the tar -T option\&. - - -.TP --c command string -command string is a semicolon-separated list of commands to be executed instead of prompting from stdin\&. \fI -N\fR is implied by \fI-c\fR\&. - - -This is particularly useful in scripts and for printing stdin to the server, e\&.g\&. \fB-c 'print -'\fR\&. - - -.SH "OPERATIONS" - -.PP -Once the client is running, the user is presented with a prompt : - -.PP -smb:\\> - -.PP -The backslash ("\\\\") indicates the current working directory on the server, and will change if the current working directory is changed\&. - -.PP -The prompt indicates that the client is ready and waiting to carry out a user command\&. Each command is a single word, optionally followed by parameters specific to that command\&. Command and parameters are space-delimited unless these notes specifically state otherwise\&. All commands are case-insensitive\&. Parameters to commands may or may not be case sensitive, depending on the command\&. - -.PP -You can specify file names which have spaces in them by quoting the name with double quotes, for example "a long file name"\&. - -.PP -Parameters shown in square brackets (e\&.g\&., "[parameter]") are optional\&. If not given, the command will use suitable defaults\&. Parameters shown in angle brackets (e\&.g\&., "<parameter>") are required\&. - -.PP -Note that all commands operating on the server are actually performed by issuing a request to the server\&. Thus the behavior may vary from server to server, depending on how the server was implemented\&. - -.PP -The commands available are given here in alphabetical order\&. - -.TP -? [command] -If \fIcommand\fR is specified, the ? command will display a brief informative message about the specified command\&. If no command is specified, a list of available commands will be displayed\&. - - -.TP -! [shell command] -If \fIshell command\fR is specified, the ! command will execute a shell locally and run the specified shell command\&. If no command is specified, a local shell will be run\&. - - -.TP -altname file -The client will request that the server return the "alternate" name (the 8\&.3 name) for a file or directory\&. - - -.TP -cancel jobid0 [jobid1] \&.\&.\&. [jobidN] -The client will request that the server cancel the printjobs identified by the given numeric print job ids\&. - - -.TP -chmod file mode in octal -This command depends on the server supporting the CIFS UNIX extensions and will fail if the server does not\&. The client requests that the server change the UNIX permissions to the given octal mode, in standard UNIX format\&. - - -.TP -chown file uid gid -This command depends on the server supporting the CIFS UNIX extensions and will fail if the server does not\&. The client requests that the server change the UNIX user and group ownership to the given decimal values\&. Note there is currently no way to remotely look up the UNIX uid and gid values for a given name\&. This may be addressed in future versions of the CIFS UNIX extensions\&. - - -.TP -cd [directory name] -If "directory name" is specified, the current working directory on the server will be changed to the directory specified\&. This operation will fail if for any reason the specified directory is inaccessible\&. - - -If no directory name is specified, the current working directory on the server will be reported\&. - - -.TP -del <mask> -The client will request that the server attempt to delete all files matching \fImask\fR from the current working directory on the server\&. - - -.TP -dir <mask> -A list of the files matching \fImask\fR in the current working directory on the server will be retrieved from the server and displayed\&. - - -.TP -exit -Terminate the connection with the server and exit from the program\&. - - -.TP -get <remote file name> [local file name] -Copy the file called \fIremote file name\fR from the server to the machine running the client\&. If specified, name the local copy \fIlocal file name\fR\&. Note that all transfers in \fBsmbclient\fR are binary\&. See also the lowercase command\&. - - -.TP -help [command] -See the ? command above\&. - - -.TP -lcd [directory name] -If \fIdirectory name\fR is specified, the current working directory on the local machine will be changed to the directory specified\&. This operation will fail if for any reason the specified directory is inaccessible\&. - - -If no directory name is specified, the name of the current working directory on the local machine will be reported\&. - - -.TP -link source destination -This command depends on the server supporting the CIFS UNIX extensions and will fail if the server does not\&. The client requests that the server create a hard link between the source and destination files\&. The source file must not exist\&. - - -.TP -lowercase -Toggle lowercasing of filenames for the get and mget commands\&. - - -When lowercasing is toggled ON, local filenames are converted to lowercase when using the get and mget commands\&. This is often useful when copying (say) MSDOS files from a server, because lowercase filenames are the norm on UNIX systems\&. - - -.TP -ls <mask> -See the dir command above\&. - - -.TP -mask <mask> -This command allows the user to set up a mask which will be used during recursive operation of the mget and mput commands\&. - - -The masks specified to the mget and mput commands act as filters for directories rather than files when recursion is toggled ON\&. - - -The mask specified with the mask command is necessary to filter files within those directories\&. For example, if the mask specified in an mget command is "source*" and the mask specified with the mask command is "*\&.c" and recursion is toggled ON, the mget command will retrieve all files matching "*\&.c" in all directories below and including all directories matching "source*" in the current working directory\&. - - -Note that the value for mask defaults to blank (equivalent to "*") and remains so until the mask command is used to change it\&. It retains the most recently specified value indefinitely\&. To avoid unexpected results it would be wise to change the value of mask back to "*" after using the mget or mput commands\&. - - -.TP -md <directory name> -See the mkdir command\&. - - -.TP -mget <mask> -Copy all files matching \fImask\fR from the server to the machine running the client\&. - - -Note that \fImask\fR is interpreted differently during recursive operation and non-recursive operation - refer to the recurse and mask commands for more information\&. Note that all transfers in \fBsmbclient\fR are binary\&. See also the lowercase command\&. - - -.TP -mkdir <directory name> -Create a new directory on the server (user access privileges permitting) with the specified name\&. - - -.TP -mput <mask> -Copy all files matching \fImask\fR in the current working directory on the local machine to the current working directory on the server\&. - - -Note that \fImask\fR is interpreted differently during recursive operation and non-recursive operation - refer to the recurse and mask commands for more information\&. Note that all transfers in \fBsmbclient\fR are binary\&. - - -.TP -print <file name> -Print the specified file from the local machine through a printable service on the server\&. - - -See also the printmode command\&. - - -.TP -printmode <graphics or text> -Set the print mode to suit either binary data (such as graphical information) or text\&. Subsequent print commands will use the currently set print mode\&. - - -.TP -prompt -Toggle prompting for filenames during operation of the mget and mput commands\&. - - -When toggled ON, the user will be prompted to confirm the transfer of each file during these commands\&. When toggled OFF, all specified files will be transferred without prompting\&. - - -.TP -put <local file name> [remote file name] -Copy the file called \fIlocal file name\fR from the machine running the client to the server\&. If specified, name the remote copy \fIremote file name\fR\&. Note that all transfers in \fBsmbclient\fR are binary\&. See also the lowercase command\&. - - -.TP -queue -Displays the print queue, showing the job id, name, size and current status\&. - - -.TP -quit -See the exit command\&. - - -.TP -rd <directory name> -See the rmdir command\&. - - -.TP -recurse -Toggle directory recursion for the commands mget and mput\&. - - -When toggled ON, these commands will process all directories in the source directory (i\&.e\&., the directory they are copying from ) and will recurse into any that match the mask specified to the command\&. Only files that match the mask specified using the mask command will be retrieved\&. See also the mask command\&. - - -When recursion is toggled OFF, only files from the current working directory on the source machine that match the mask specified to the mget or mput commands will be copied, and any mask specified using the mask command will be ignored\&. - - -.TP -rm <mask> -Remove all files matching \fImask\fR from the current working directory on the server\&. - - -.TP -rmdir <directory name> -Remove the specified directory (user access privileges permitting) from the server\&. - - -.TP -setmode <filename> <perm=[+|\\-]rsha> -A version of the DOS attrib command to set file permissions\&. For example: - - -\fBsetmode myfile +r \fR - - -would make myfile read only\&. - - -.TP -symlink source destination -This command depends on the server supporting the CIFS UNIX extensions and will fail if the server does not\&. The client requests that the server create a symbolic hard link between the source and destination files\&. The source file must not exist\&. Note that the server will not create a link to any path that lies outside the currently connected share\&. This is enforced by the Samba server\&. - - -.TP -tar <c|x>[IXbgNa] -Performs a tar operation - see the \fI-T \fR command line option above\&. Behavior may be affected by the tarmode command (see below)\&. Using g (incremental) and N (newer) will affect tarmode settings\&. Note that using the "-" option with tar x may not work - use the command line option instead\&. - - -.TP -blocksize <blocksize> -Blocksize\&. Must be followed by a valid (greater than zero) blocksize\&. Causes tar file to be written out in \fIblocksize\fR*TBLOCK (usually 512 byte) blocks\&. - - -.TP -tarmode <full|inc|reset|noreset> -Changes tar's behavior with regard to archive bits\&. In full mode, tar will back up everything regardless of the archive bit setting (this is the default mode)\&. In incremental mode, tar will only back up files with the archive bit set\&. In reset mode, tar will reset the archive bit on all files it backs up (implies read/write share)\&. - - -.SH "NOTES" - -.PP -Some servers are fussy about the case of supplied usernames, passwords, share names (AKA service names) and machine names\&. If you fail to connect try giving all parameters in uppercase\&. - -.PP -It is often necessary to use the -n option when connecting to some types of servers\&. For example OS/2 LanManager insists on a valid NetBIOS name being used, so you need to supply a valid name that would be known to the server\&. - -.PP -smbclient supports long file names where the server supports the LANMAN2 protocol or above\&. - -.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES" - -.PP -The variable \fBUSER\fR may contain the username of the person using the client\&. This information is used only if the protocol level is high enough to support session-level passwords\&. - -.PP -The variable \fBPASSWD\fR may contain the password of the person using the client\&. This information is used only if the protocol level is high enough to support session-level passwords\&. - -.PP -The variable \fBLIBSMB_PROG\fR may contain the path, executed with system(), which the client should connect to instead of connecting to a server\&. This functionality is primarily intended as a development aid, and works best when using a LMHOSTS file - -.SH "INSTALLATION" - -.PP -The location of the client program is a matter for individual system administrators\&. The following are thus suggestions only\&. - -.PP -It is recommended that the smbclient software be installed in the \fI/usr/local/samba/bin/\fR or \fI /usr/samba/bin/\fR directory, this directory readable by all, writeable only by root\&. The client program itself should be executable by all\&. The client should \fBNOT\fR be setuid or setgid! - -.PP -The client log files should be put in a directory readable and writeable only by the user\&. - -.PP -To test the client, you will need to know the name of a running SMB/CIFS server\&. It is possible to run \fBsmbd\fR(8) as an ordinary user - running that server as a daemon on a user-accessible port (typically any port number over 1024) would provide a suitable test server\&. - -.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" - -.PP -Most diagnostics issued by the client are logged in a specified log file\&. The log file name is specified at compile time, but may be overridden on the command line\&. - -.PP -The number and nature of diagnostics available depends on the debug level used by the client\&. If you have problems, set the debug level to 3 and peruse the log files\&. - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 2\&.2 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbcontrol.1 b/docs/manpages/smbcontrol.1 deleted file mode 100644 index cec003a6726..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/smbcontrol.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,221 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "SMBCONTROL" 1 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -smbcontrol \- send messages to smbd, nmbd or winbindd processes -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBsmbcontrol\fR [-i] [-s] -.fi - -.nf -\fBsmbcontrol\fR [destination] [message-type] [parameter] -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -\fBsmbcontrol\fR is a very small program, which sends messages to a \fBsmbd\fR(8), a \fBnmbd\fR(8), or a \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon running on the system\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.TP --s <configuration file> -The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&. - - -.TP --i -Run interactively\&. Individual commands of the form destination message-type parameters can be entered on STDIN\&. An empty command line or a "q" will quit the program\&. - - -.TP -destination -One of \fInmbd\fR, \fIsmbd\fR or a process ID\&. - - -The \fIsmbd\fR destination causes the message to "broadcast" to all smbd daemons\&. - - -The \fInmbd\fR destination causes the message to be sent to the nmbd daemon specified in the \fInmbd\&.pid\fR file\&. - - -If a single process ID is given, the message is sent to only that process\&. - - -.TP -message-type -Type of message to send\&. See the section \fBMESSAGE-TYPES\fR for details\&. - - -.TP -parameters -any parameters required for the message-type - - -.SH "MESSAGE-TYPES" - -.PP -Available message types are: - -.TP -close-share -Order smbd to close the client connections to the named share\&. Note that this doesn't affect client connections to any other shares\&. This message-type takes an argument of the share name for which client connections will be closed, or the "*" character which will close all currently open shares\&. This may be useful if you made changes to the access controls on the share\&. This message can only be sent to \fBsmbd\fR\&. - - -.TP -debug -Set debug level to the value specified by the parameter\&. This can be sent to any of the destinations\&. - - -.TP -force-election -This message causes the \fBnmbd\fR daemon to force a new browse master election\&. - - -.TP -ping -Send specified number of "ping" messages and wait for the same number of reply "pong" messages\&. This can be sent to any of the destinations\&. - - -.TP -profile -Change profile settings of a daemon, based on the parameter\&. The parameter can be "on" to turn on profile stats collection, "off" to turn off profile stats collection, "count" to enable only collection of count stats (time stats are disabled), and "flush" to zero the current profile stats\&. This can be sent to any smbd or nmbd destinations\&. - - -.TP -debuglevel -Request debuglevel of a certain daemon and write it to stdout\&. This can be sent to any of the destinations\&. - - -.TP -profilelevel -Request profilelevel of a certain daemon and write it to stdout\&. This can be sent to any smbd or nmbd destinations\&. - - -.TP -printnotify -Order smbd to send a printer notify message to any Windows NT clients connected to a printer\&. This message-type takes the following arguments: - - - -.RS - -.TP -queuepause printername -Send a queue pause change notify message to the printer specified\&. - - -.TP -queueresume printername -Send a queue resume change notify message for the printer specified\&. - - -.TP -jobpause printername unixjobid -Send a job pause change notify message for the printer and unix jobid specified\&. - - -.TP -jobresume printername unixjobid -Send a job resume change notify message for the printer and unix jobid specified\&. - - -.TP -jobdelete printername unixjobid -Send a job delete change notify message for the printer and unix jobid specified\&. - - -.RE -Note that this message only sends notification that an event has occured\&. It doesn't actually cause the event to happen\&. - - -This message can only be sent to \fBsmbd\fR\&. - - -.TP -samsync -Order smbd to synchronise sam database from PDC (being BDC)\&. Can only be sent to \fBsmbd\fR\&. - -Not working at the moment - - -.TP -samrepl -Send sam replication message, with specified serial\&. Can only be sent to \fBsmbd\fR\&. Should not be used manually\&. - - -.TP -dmalloc-mark -Set a mark for dmalloc\&. Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd\&. Only available if samba is built with dmalloc support\&. - - -.TP -dmalloc-log-changed -Dump the pointers that have changed since the mark set by dmalloc-mark\&. Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd\&. Only available if samba is built with dmalloc support\&. - - -.TP -shutdown -Shut down specified daemon\&. Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd\&. - - -.TP -pool-usage -Print a human-readable description of all talloc(pool) memory usage by the specified daemon/process\&. Available for both smbd and nmbd\&. - - -.TP -drvupgrade -Force clients of printers using specified driver to update their local version of the driver\&. Can only be sent to smbd\&. - - -.TP -reload-config -Force daemon to reload smb\&.conf configuration file\&. Can be sent to \fBsmbd\fR, \fBnmbd\fR, or \fBwinbindd\fR\&. - - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -\fBnmbd\fR(8) and \fBsmbd\fR(8)\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbcquotas.1 b/docs/manpages/smbcquotas.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 5a3510810a3..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/smbcquotas.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,199 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "SMBCQUOTAS" 1 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -smbcquotas \- Set or get QUOTAs of NTFS 5 shares -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBsmbcquotas\fR {//server/share} [-u user] [-L] [-F] [-S QUOTA_SET_COMMAND] [-n] [-t] - [-v] [-d debuglevel] [-s configfile] [-l logfilebase] [-V] [-U username] - [-N] [-k] [-A] -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -The \fBsmbcquotas\fR program manipulates NT Quotas on SMB file shares\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.PP -The following options are available to the \fBsmbcquotas\fR program\&. - -.TP --u user -Specifies the user of whom the quotas are get or set\&. By default the current user's username will be used\&. - - -.TP --L -Lists all quota records of the share\&. - - -.TP --F -Show the share quota status and default limits\&. - - -.TP --S QUOTA_SET_COMMAND -This command set/modify quotas for a user or on the share, depending on the QUOTA_SET_COMMAND parameter witch is described later - - -.TP --n -This option displays all QUOTA information in numeric format\&. The default is to convert SIDs to names and QUOTA limits to a readable string format\&. - - -.TP --t -Don't actually do anything, only validate the correctness of the arguments\&. - - -.TP --v -Be verbose\&. - - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.TP --V -Prints the program version number\&. - - -.TP --s <configuration file> -The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&. - - -.TP --d|--debug=debuglevel -\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&. - - -The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day-to-day running - it generates a small amount of information about operations carried out\&. - - -Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&. - - -Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. - - -.TP --l|--logfile=logbasename -File name for log/debug files\&. The extension \fB"\&.client"\fR will be appended\&. The log file is never removed by the client\&. - - -.TP --N -If specified, this parameter suppresses the normal password prompt from the client to the user\&. This is useful when accessing a service that does not require a password\&. - - -Unless a password is specified on the command line or this parameter is specified, the client will request a password\&. - - -.TP --k -Try to authenticate with kerberos\&. Only useful in an Active Directory environment\&. - - -.TP --A|--authfile=filename -This option allows you to specify a file from which to read the username and password used in the connection\&. The format of the file is - - -.nf - -username = <value> -password = <value> -domain = <value> -.fi - - -Make certain that the permissions on the file restrict access from unwanted users\&. - - -.TP --U|--user=username[%password] -Sets the SMB username or username and password\&. - - -If %password is not specified, the user will be prompted\&. The client will first check the \fBUSER\fR environment variable, then the \fBLOGNAME\fR variable and if either exists, the string is uppercased\&. If these environmental variables are not found, the username \fBGUEST\fR is used\&. - - -A third option is to use a credentials file which contains the plaintext of the username and password\&. This option is mainly provided for scripts where the admin does not wish to pass the credentials on the command line or via environment variables\&. If this method is used, make certain that the permissions on the file restrict access from unwanted users\&. See the \fI-A\fR for more details\&. - - -Be cautious about including passwords in scripts\&. Also, on many systems the command line of a running process may be seen via the \fBps\fR command\&. To be safe always allow \fBrpcclient\fR to prompt for a password and type it in directly\&. - - -.SH "QUOTA_SET_COMAND" - -.PP -The format of an ACL is one or more ACL entries separated by either commas or newlines\&. An ACL entry is one of the following: - -.PP -for user setting quotas for the specified by -u or the current username: - -.PP -\fB UQLIM:<username><softlimit><hardlimit> \fR - -.PP -for setting the share quota defaults limits: - -.PP -\fB FSQLIM:<softlimit><hardlimit> \fR - -.PP -for changing the share quota settings: - -.PP -\fB FSQFLAGS:QUOTA_ENABLED/DENY_DISK/LOG_SOFTLIMIT/LOG_HARD_LIMIT \fR - -.SH "EXIT STATUS" - -.PP -The \fBsmbcquotas\fR program sets the exit status depending on the success or otherwise of the operations performed\&. The exit status may be one of the following values\&. - -.PP -If the operation succeeded, smbcquotas returns an exit status of 0\&. If \fBsmbcquotas\fR couldn't connect to the specified server, or when there was an error getting or setting the quota(s), an exit status of 1 is returned\&. If there was an error parsing any command line arguments, an exit status of 2 is returned\&. - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -\fBsmbcquotas\fR was written by Stefan Metzmacher\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbd.8 b/docs/manpages/smbd.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 1c2c75bf4d6..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/smbd.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,230 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "SMBD" 8 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -smbd \- server to provide SMB/CIFS services to clients -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBsmbd\fR [-D] [-F] [-S] [-i] [-h] [-V] [-b] [-d <debug level>] [-l <log directory>] - [-p <port number>] [-O <socket option>] [-s <configuration file>] -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This program is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -\fBsmbd\fR is the server daemon that provides filesharing and printing services to Windows clients\&. The server provides filespace and printer services to clients using the SMB (or CIFS) protocol\&. This is compatible with the LanManager protocol, and can service LanManager clients\&. These include MSCLIENT 3\&.0 for DOS, Windows for Workgroups, Windows 95/98/ME, Windows NT, Windows 2000, OS/2, DAVE for Macintosh, and smbfs for Linux\&. - -.PP -An extensive description of the services that the server can provide is given in the man page for the configuration file controlling the attributes of those services (see \fBsmb.conf\fR(5)\&. This man page will not describe the services, but will concentrate on the administrative aspects of running the server\&. - -.PP -Please note that there are significant security implications to running this server, and the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) manual page should be regarded as mandatory reading before proceeding with installation\&. - -.PP -A session is created whenever a client requests one\&. Each client gets a copy of the server for each session\&. This copy then services all connections made by the client during that session\&. When all connections from its client are closed, the copy of the server for that client terminates\&. - -.PP -The configuration file, and any files that it includes, are automatically reloaded every minute, if they change\&. You can force a reload by sending a SIGHUP to the server\&. Reloading the configuration file will not affect connections to any service that is already established\&. Either the user will have to disconnect from the service, or \fBsmbd\fR killed and restarted\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP --D -If specified, this parameter causes the server to operate as a daemon\&. That is, it detaches itself and runs in the background, fielding requests on the appropriate port\&. Operating the server as a daemon is the recommended way of running \fBsmbd\fR for servers that provide more than casual use file and print services\&. This switch is assumed if \fBsmbd \fR is executed on the command line of a shell\&. - - -.TP --F -If specified, this parameter causes the main \fBsmbd\fR process to not daemonize, i\&.e\&. double-fork and disassociate with the terminal\&. Child processes are still created as normal to service each connection request, but the main process does not exit\&. This operation mode is suitable for running \fBsmbd\fR under process supervisors such as \fBsupervise\fR and \fBsvscan\fR from Daniel J\&. Bernstein's \fBdaemontools\fR package, or the AIX process monitor\&. - - -.TP --S -If specified, this parameter causes \fBsmbd\fR to log to standard output rather than a file\&. - - -.TP --i -If this parameter is specified it causes the server to run "interactively", not as a daemon, even if the server is executed on the command line of a shell\&. Setting this parameter negates the implicit deamon mode when run from the command line\&. \fBsmbd\fR also logs to standard output, as if the \fB-S\fR parameter had been given\&. - - -.TP --V -Prints the program version number\&. - - -.TP --s <configuration file> -The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&. - - -.TP --d|--debug=debuglevel -\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&. - - -The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day-to-day running - it generates a small amount of information about operations carried out\&. - - -Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&. - - -Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. - - -.TP --l|--logfile=logbasename -File name for log/debug files\&. The extension \fB"\&.client"\fR will be appended\&. The log file is never removed by the client\&. - - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.TP --b -Prints information about how Samba was built\&. - - -.TP --l <log directory> -If specified, \fIlog directory\fR specifies a log directory into which the "log\&.smbd" log file will be created for informational and debug messages from the running server\&. The log file generated is never removed by the server although its size may be controlled by the \fImax log size\fR option in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file\&. \fBBeware:\fR If the directory specified does not exist, \fBsmbd\fR will log to the default debug log location defined at compile time\&. - - -The default log directory is specified at compile time\&. - - -.TP --p <port number> -\fIport number\fR is a positive integer value\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is 139\&. - - -This number is the port number that will be used when making connections to the server from client software\&. The standard (well-known) port number for the SMB over TCP is 139, hence the default\&. If you wish to run the server as an ordinary user rather than as root, most systems will require you to use a port number greater than 1024 - ask your system administrator for help if you are in this situation\&. - - -In order for the server to be useful by most clients, should you configure it on a port other than 139, you will require port redirection services on port 139, details of which are outlined in rfc1002\&.txt section 4\&.3\&.5\&. - - -This parameter is not normally specified except in the above situation\&. - - -.SH "FILES" - -.TP -\fI/etc/inetd\&.conf\fR -If the server is to be run by the \fBinetd\fR meta-daemon, this file must contain suitable startup information for the meta-daemon\&. - - -.TP -\fI/etc/rc\fR -or whatever initialization script your system uses)\&. - - -If running the server as a daemon at startup, this file will need to contain an appropriate startup sequence for the server\&. - - -.TP -\fI/etc/services\fR -If running the server via the meta-daemon \fBinetd\fR, this file must contain a mapping of service name (e\&.g\&., netbios-ssn) to service port (e\&.g\&., 139) and protocol type (e\&.g\&., tcp)\&. - - -.TP -\fI/usr/local/samba/lib/smb\&.conf\fR -This is the default location of the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) server configuration file\&. Other common places that systems install this file are \fI/usr/samba/lib/smb\&.conf\fR and \fI/etc/samba/smb\&.conf\fR\&. - - -This file describes all the services the server is to make available to clients\&. See \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) for more information\&. - - -.SH "LIMITATIONS" - -.PP -On some systems \fBsmbd\fR cannot change uid back to root after a setuid() call\&. Such systems are called trapdoor uid systems\&. If you have such a system, you will be unable to connect from a client (such as a PC) as two different users at once\&. Attempts to connect the second user will result in access denied or similar\&. - -.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES" - -.TP -\fBPRINTER\fR -If no printer name is specified to printable services, most systems will use the value of this variable (or \fBlp\fR if this variable is not defined) as the name of the printer to use\&. This is not specific to the server, however\&. - - -.SH "PAM INTERACTION" - -.PP -Samba uses PAM for authentication (when presented with a plaintext password), for account checking (is this account disabled?) and for session management\&. The degree too which samba supports PAM is restricted by the limitations of the SMB protocol and the \fIobey pam restrictions\fR \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) paramater\&. When this is set, the following restrictions apply: - -.TP 3 -\(bu -\fBAccount Validation\fR: All accesses to a samba server are checked against PAM to see if the account is vaild, not disabled and is permitted to login at this time\&. This also applies to encrypted logins\&. - -.TP -\(bu -\fBSession Management\fR: When not using share level secuirty, users must pass PAM's session checks before access is granted\&. Note however, that this is bypassed in share level secuirty\&. Note also that some older pam configuration files may need a line added for session support\&. - -.LP - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" - -.PP -Most diagnostics issued by the server are logged in a specified log file\&. The log file name is specified at compile time, but may be overridden on the command line\&. - -.PP -The number and nature of diagnostics available depends on the debug level used by the server\&. If you have problems, set the debug level to 3 and peruse the log files\&. - -.PP -Most messages are reasonably self-explanatory\&. Unfortunately, at the time this man page was created, there are too many diagnostics available in the source code to warrant describing each and every diagnostic\&. At this stage your best bet is still to grep the source code and inspect the conditions that gave rise to the diagnostics you are seeing\&. - -.SH "SIGNALS" - -.PP -Sending the \fBsmbd\fR a SIGHUP will cause it to reload its \fIsmb\&.conf\fR configuration file within a short period of time\&. - -.PP -To shut down a user's \fBsmbd\fR process it is recommended that \fBSIGKILL (-9)\fR \fBNOT\fR be used, except as a last resort, as this may leave the shared memory area in an inconsistent state\&. The safe way to terminate an \fBsmbd\fR is to send it a SIGTERM (-15) signal and wait for it to die on its own\&. - -.PP -The debug log level of \fBsmbd\fR may be raised or lowered using \fBsmbcontrol\fR(1) program (SIGUSR[1|2] signals are no longer used since Samba 2\&.2)\&. This is to allow transient problems to be diagnosed, whilst still running at a normally low log level\&. - -.PP -Note that as the signal handlers send a debug write, they are not re-entrant in \fBsmbd\fR\&. This you should wait until\fBsmbd\fR is in a state of waiting for an incoming SMB before issuing them\&. It is possible to make the signal handlers safe by un-blocking the signals before the select call and re-blocking them after, however this would affect performance\&. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -\fBhosts_access\fR(5), \fBinetd\fR(8), \fBnmbd\fR(8), \fBsmb.conf\fR(5), \fBsmbclient\fR(1), \fBtestparm\fR(1), \fBtestprns\fR(1), and the Internet RFC's\fIrfc1001\&.txt\fR, \fIrfc1002\&.txt\fR\&. In addition the CIFS (formerly SMB) specification is available as a link from the Web page http://samba\&.org/cifs/\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbmnt.8 b/docs/manpages/smbmnt.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 45515c593de..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/smbmnt.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,91 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "SMBMNT" 8 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -smbmnt \- helper utility for mounting SMB filesystems -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBsmbmnt\fR {mount-point} [-s <share>] [-r] [-u <uid>] [-g <gid>] [-f <mask>] [-d <mask>] [-o <options>] [-h] - -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -\fBsmbmnt\fR is a helper application used by the smbmount program to do the actual mounting of SMB shares\&.\fBsmbmnt\fR can be installed setuid root if you want normal users to be able to mount their SMB shares\&. - -.PP -A setuid smbmnt will only allow mounts on directories owned by the user, and that the user has write permission on\&. - -.PP -The \fBsmbmnt\fR program is normally invoked by \fBsmbmount\fR(8)\&. It should not be invoked directly by users\&. - -.PP -smbmount searches the normal PATH for smbmnt\&. You must ensure that the smbmnt version in your path matches the smbmount used\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP --r -mount the filesystem read-only - - -.TP --u uid -specify the uid that the files will be owned by - - -.TP --g gid -specify the gid that the files will be owned by - - -.TP --f mask -specify the octal file mask applied - - -.TP --d mask -specify the octal directory mask applied - - -.TP --o options -list of options that are passed as-is to smbfs, if this command is run on a 2\&.4 or higher Linux kernel\&. - - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Michael H\&. Warfield and others\&. - -.PP -The current maintainer of smbfs and the userspace tools \fBsmbmount\fR, \fBsmbumount\fR, and \fBsmbmnt\fR is Urban Widmark\&. The SAMBA Mailing list is the preferred place to ask questions regarding these programs\&. - -.PP -The conversion of this manpage for Samba 2\&.2 was performed by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbmount.8 b/docs/manpages/smbmount.8 deleted file mode 100644 index fdf49c0e97a..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/smbmount.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,219 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "SMBMOUNT" 8 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -smbmount \- mount an smbfs filesystem -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBsmbmount\fR {service} {mount-point} [-o options] -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -\fBsmbmount\fR mounts a Linux SMB filesystem\&. It is usually invoked as \fBmount.smbfs\fR by the \fBmount\fR(8) command when using the "-t smbfs" option\&. This command only works in Linux, and the kernel must support the smbfs filesystem\&. - -.PP -Options to \fBsmbmount\fR are specified as a comma-separated list of key=value pairs\&. It is possible to send options other than those listed here, assuming that smbfs supports them\&. If you get mount failures, check your kernel log for errors on unknown options\&. - -.PP -\fBsmbmount\fR is a daemon\&. After mounting it keeps running until the mounted smbfs is umounted\&. It will log things that happen when in daemon mode using the "machine name" smbmount, so typically this output will end up in \fIlog\&.smbmount\fR\&. The \fB smbmount\fR process may also be called mount\&.smbfs\&. - -.RS -.Sh "Note" - -.PP - \fBsmbmount\fR calls \fBsmbmnt\fR(8) to do the actual mount\&. You must make sure that \fBsmbmnt\fR is in the path so that it can be found\&. - -.RE - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP -username=<arg> -specifies the username to connect as\&. If this is not given, then the environment variable \fB USER\fR is used\&. This option can also take the form "user%password" or "user/workgroup" or "user/workgroup%password" to allow the password and workgroup to be specified as part of the username\&. - - -.TP -password=<arg> -specifies the SMB password\&. If this option is not given then the environment variable \fBPASSWD\fR is used\&. If it can find no password \fBsmbmount\fR will prompt for a passeword, unless the guest option is given\&. - - -Note that passwords which contain the argument delimiter character (i\&.e\&. a comma ',') will failed to be parsed correctly on the command line\&. However, the same password defined in the PASSWD environment variable or a credentials file (see below) will be read correctly\&. - - -.TP -credentials=<filename> -specifies a file that contains a username and/or password\&. -The format of the file is: -.nf - -username = <value> -password = <value> -.fi - - -This is preferred over having passwords in plaintext in a shared file, such as \fI/etc/fstab\fR\&. Be sure to protect any credentials file properly\&. - - -.TP -krb -Use kerberos (Active Directory)\&. - - -.TP -netbiosname=<arg> -sets the source NetBIOS name\&. It defaults to the local hostname\&. - - -.TP -uid=<arg> -sets the uid that will own all files on the mounted filesystem\&. It may be specified as either a username or a numeric uid\&. - - -.TP -gid=<arg> -sets the gid that will own all files on the mounted filesystem\&. It may be specified as either a groupname or a numeric gid\&. - - -.TP -port=<arg> -sets the remote SMB port number\&. The default is 139\&. - - -.TP -fmask=<arg> -sets the file mask\&. This determines the permissions that remote files have in the local filesystem\&. This is not a umask, but the actual permissions for the files\&. The default is based on the current umask\&. - - -.TP -dmask=<arg> -Sets the directory mask\&. This determines the permissions that remote directories have in the local filesystem\&. This is not a umask, but the actual permissions for the directories\&. The default is based on the current umask\&. - - -.TP -debug=<arg> -Sets the debug level\&. This is useful for tracking down SMB connection problems\&. A suggested value to start with is 4\&. If set too high there will be a lot of output, possibly hiding the useful output\&. - - -.TP -ip=<arg> -Sets the destination host or IP address\&. - - -.TP -workgroup=<arg> -Sets the workgroup on the destination - - -.TP -sockopt=<arg> -Sets the TCP socket options\&. See the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) \fIsocket options\fR option\&. - - -.TP -scope=<arg> -Sets the NetBIOS scope - - -.TP -guest -Don't prompt for a password - - -.TP -ro -mount read-only - - -.TP -rw -mount read-write - - -.TP -iocharset=<arg> -sets the charset used by the Linux side for codepage to charset translations (NLS)\&. Argument should be the name of a charset, like iso8859-1\&. (Note: only kernel 2\&.4\&.0 or later) - - -.TP -codepage=<arg> -sets the codepage the server uses\&. See the iocharset option\&. Example value cp850\&. (Note: only kernel 2\&.4\&.0 or later) - - -.TP -ttl=<arg> -sets how long a directory listing is cached in milliseconds (also affects visibility of file size and date changes)\&. A higher value means that changes on the server take longer to be noticed but it can give better performance on large directories, especially over long distances\&. Default is 1000ms but something like 10000ms (10 seconds) is probably more reasonable in many cases\&. (Note: only kernel 2\&.4\&.2 or later) - - -.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES" - -.PP -The variable \fBUSER\fR may contain the username of the person using the client\&. This information is used only if the protocol level is high enough to support session-level passwords\&. The variable can be used to set both username and password by using the format username%password\&. - -.PP -The variable \fBPASSWD\fR may contain the password of the person using the client\&. This information is used only if the protocol level is high enough to support session-level passwords\&. - -.PP -The variable \fBPASSWD_FILE\fR may contain the pathname of a file to read the password from\&. A single line of input is read and used as the password\&. - -.SH "BUGS" - -.PP -Passwords and other options containing , can not be handled\&. For passwords an alternative way of passing them is in a credentials file or in the PASSWD environment\&. - -.PP -The credentials file does not handle usernames or passwords with leading space\&. - -.PP -One smbfs bug is important enough to mention here, even if it is a bit misplaced: - -.TP 3 -\(bu -Mounts sometimes stop working\&. This is usually caused by smbmount terminating\&. Since smbfs needs smbmount to reconnect when the server disconnects, the mount will eventually go dead\&. An umount/mount normally fixes this\&. At least 2 ways to trigger this bug are known\&. - -.LP - -.PP -Note that the typical response to a bug report is suggestion to try the latest version first\&. So please try doing that first, and always include which versions you use of relevant software when reporting bugs (minimum: samba, kernel, distribution) - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -Documentation/filesystems/smbfs\&.txt in the linux kernel source tree may contain additional options and information\&. - -.PP -FreeBSD also has a smbfs, but it is not related to smbmount - -.PP -For Solaris, HP-UX and others you may want to look at \fBsmbsh\fR(1) or at other solutions, such as Sharity or perhaps replacing the SMB server with a NFS server\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Michael H\&. Warfield and others\&. - -.PP -The current maintainer of smbfs and the userspace tools \fBsmbmount\fR, \fBsmbumount\fR, and \fBsmbmnt\fR is Urban Widmark\&. The SAMBA Mailing list is the preferred place to ask questions regarding these programs\&. - -.PP -The conversion of this manpage for Samba 2\&.2 was performed by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbpasswd.5 b/docs/manpages/smbpasswd.5 deleted file mode 100644 index 75645d4b6a8..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/smbpasswd.5 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,111 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "SMBPASSWD" 5 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -smbpasswd \- The Samba encrypted password file -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.PP -\fIsmbpasswd\fR - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -smbpasswd is the Samba encrypted password file\&. It contains the username, Unix user id and the SMB hashed passwords of the user, as well as account flag information and the time the password was last changed\&. This file format has been evolving with Samba and has had several different formats in the past\&. - -.SH "FILE FORMAT" - -.PP -The format of the smbpasswd file used by Samba 2\&.2 is very similar to the familiar Unix \fIpasswd(5)\fR file\&. It is an ASCII file containing one line for each user\&. Each field ithin each line is separated from the next by a colon\&. Any entry beginning with '#' is ignored\&. The smbpasswd file contains the following information for each user: - -.TP -name -This is the user name\&. It must be a name that already exists in the standard UNIX passwd file\&. - - -.TP -uid -This is the UNIX uid\&. It must match the uid field for the same user entry in the standard UNIX passwd file\&. If this does not match then Samba will refuse to recognize this smbpasswd file entry as being valid for a user\&. - - -.TP -Lanman Password Hash -This is the LANMAN hash of the user's password, encoded as 32 hex digits\&. The LANMAN hash is created by DES encrypting a well known string with the user's password as the DES key\&. This is the same password used by Windows 95/98 machines\&. Note that this password hash is regarded as weak as it is vulnerable to dictionary attacks and if two users choose the same password this entry will be identical (i\&.e\&. the password is not "salted" as the UNIX password is)\&. If the user has a null password this field will contain the characters "NO PASSWORD" as the start of the hex string\&. If the hex string is equal to 32 'X' characters then the user's account is marked as \fBdisabled\fR and the user will not be able to log onto the Samba server\&. - - -\fBWARNING !!\fR Note that, due to the challenge-response nature of the SMB/CIFS authentication protocol, anyone with a knowledge of this password hash will be able to impersonate the user on the network\&. For this reason these hashes are known as \fBplain text equivalents\fR and must \fBNOT\fR be made available to anyone but the root user\&. To protect these passwords the smbpasswd file is placed in a directory with read and traverse access only to the root user and the smbpasswd file itself must be set to be read/write only by root, with no other access\&. - - -.TP -NT Password Hash -This is the Windows NT hash of the user's password, encoded as 32 hex digits\&. The Windows NT hash is created by taking the user's password as represented in 16-bit, little-endian UNICODE and then applying the MD4 (internet rfc1321) hashing algorithm to it\&. - - -This password hash is considered more secure than the LANMAN Password Hash as it preserves the case of the password and uses a much higher quality hashing algorithm\&. However, it is still the case that if two users choose the same password this entry will be identical (i\&.e\&. the password is not "salted" as the UNIX password is)\&. - - -\fBWARNING !!\fR\&. Note that, due to the challenge-response nature of the SMB/CIFS authentication protocol, anyone with a knowledge of this password hash will be able to impersonate the user on the network\&. For this reason these hashes are known as \fBplain text equivalents\fR and must \fBNOT\fR be made available to anyone but the root user\&. To protect these passwords the smbpasswd file is placed in a directory with read and traverse access only to the root user and the smbpasswd file itself must be set to be read/write only by root, with no other access\&. - - -.TP -Account Flags -This section contains flags that describe the attributes of the users account\&. In the Samba 2\&.2 release this field is bracketed by '[' and ']' characters and is always 13 characters in length (including the '[' and ']' characters)\&. The contents of this field may be any of the following characters: - - -\fBU\fR - This means this is a "User" account, i\&.e\&. an ordinary user\&. Only User and Workstation Trust accounts are currently supported in the smbpasswd file\&. - -\fBN\fR - This means the account has no password (the passwords in the fields LANMAN Password Hash and NT Password Hash are ignored)\&. Note that this will only allow users to log on with no password if the \fI null passwords\fR parameter is set in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) config file\&. - -\fBD\fR - This means the account is disabled and no SMB/CIFS logins will be allowed for this user\&. - -\fBW\fR - This means this account is a "Workstation Trust" account\&. This kind of account is used in the Samba PDC code stream to allow Windows NT Workstations and Servers to join a Domain hosted by a Samba PDC\&. - -Other flags may be added as the code is extended in future\&. The rest of this field space is filled in with spaces\&. - - -.TP -Last Change Time -This field consists of the time the account was last modified\&. It consists of the characters 'LCT-' (standing for "Last Change Time") followed by a numeric encoding of the UNIX time in seconds since the epoch (1970) that the last change was made\&. - - -.PP -All other colon separated fields are ignored at this time\&. - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -\fBsmbpasswd\fR(8), \fBSamba\fR(7), and the Internet RFC1321 for details on the MD4 algorithm\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbpasswd.8 b/docs/manpages/smbpasswd.8 deleted file mode 100644 index e0c8ca51090..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/smbpasswd.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,219 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "SMBPASSWD" 8 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -smbpasswd \- change a user's SMB password -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBsmbpasswd\fR [-a] [-x] [-d] [-e] [-D debuglevel] [-n] [-r <remote machine>] [-R <name resolve order>] [-m] [-U username[%password]] [-h] [-s] [-w pass] [-i] [-L] [username] - -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -The smbpasswd program has several different functions, depending on whether it is run by the \fBroot\fR user or not\&. When run as a normal user it allows the user to change the password used for their SMB sessions on any machines that store SMB passwords\&. - -.PP -By default (when run with no arguments) it will attempt to change the current user's SMB password on the local machine\&. This is similar to the way the \fBpasswd(1)\fR program works\&. \fB smbpasswd\fR differs from how the passwd program works however in that it is not \fBsetuid root\fR but works in a client-server mode and communicates with a locally running \fBsmbd\fR(8)\&. As a consequence in order for this to succeed the smbd daemon must be running on the local machine\&. On a UNIX machine the encrypted SMB passwords are usually stored in the \fBsmbpasswd\fR(5) file\&. - -.PP -When run by an ordinary user with no options, smbpasswd will prompt them for their old SMB password and then ask them for their new password twice, to ensure that the new password was typed correctly\&. No passwords will be echoed on the screen whilst being typed\&. If you have a blank SMB password (specified by the string "NO PASSWORD" in the smbpasswd file) then just press the <Enter> key when asked for your old password\&. - -.PP -smbpasswd can also be used by a normal user to change their SMB password on remote machines, such as Windows NT Primary Domain Controllers\&. See the (\fI-r\fR) and \fI-U\fR options below\&. - -.PP -When run by root, smbpasswd allows new users to be added and deleted in the smbpasswd file, as well as allows changes to the attributes of the user in this file to be made\&. When run by root, \fB smbpasswd\fR accesses the local smbpasswd file directly, thus enabling changes to be made even if smbd is not running\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP --a -This option specifies that the username following should be added to the local smbpasswd file, with the new password typed (type <Enter> for the old password)\&. This option is ignored if the username following already exists in the smbpasswd file and it is treated like a regular change password command\&. Note that the default passdb backends require the user to already exist in the system password file (usually \fI/etc/passwd\fR), else the request to add the user will fail\&. - - -This option is only available when running smbpasswd as root\&. - - -.TP --x -This option specifies that the username following should be deleted from the local smbpasswd file\&. - - -This option is only available when running smbpasswd as root\&. - - -.TP --d -This option specifies that the username following should be \fBdisabled\fR in the local smbpasswd file\&. This is done by writing a \fB'D'\fR flag into the account control space in the smbpasswd file\&. Once this is done all attempts to authenticate via SMB using this username will fail\&. - - -If the smbpasswd file is in the 'old' format (pre-Samba 2\&.0 format) there is no space in the user's password entry to write this information and the command will FAIL\&. See \fBsmbpasswd\fR(5) for details on the 'old' and new password file formats\&. - - -This option is only available when running smbpasswd as root\&. - - -.TP --e -This option specifies that the username following should be \fBenabled\fR in the local smbpasswd file, if the account was previously disabled\&. If the account was not disabled this option has no effect\&. Once the account is enabled then the user will be able to authenticate via SMB once again\&. - - -If the smbpasswd file is in the 'old' format, then \fB smbpasswd\fR will FAIL to enable the account\&. See \fBsmbpasswd\fR(5) for details on the 'old' and new password file formats\&. - - -This option is only available when running smbpasswd as root\&. - - -.TP --D debuglevel -\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&. - - -The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of smbpasswd\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. - - -Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&. - - -.TP --n -This option specifies that the username following should have their password set to null (i\&.e\&. a blank password) in the local smbpasswd file\&. This is done by writing the string "NO PASSWORD" as the first part of the first password stored in the smbpasswd file\&. - - -Note that to allow users to logon to a Samba server once the password has been set to "NO PASSWORD" in the smbpasswd file the administrator must set the following parameter in the [global] section of the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file : - - -\fBnull passwords = yes\fR - - -This option is only available when running smbpasswd as root\&. - - -.TP --r remote machine name -This option allows a user to specify what machine they wish to change their password on\&. Without this parameter smbpasswd defaults to the local host\&. The \fIremote machine name\fR is the NetBIOS name of the SMB/CIFS server to contact to attempt the password change\&. This name is resolved into an IP address using the standard name resolution mechanism in all programs of the Samba suite\&. See the \fI-R name resolve order\fR parameter for details on changing this resolving mechanism\&. - - -The username whose password is changed is that of the current UNIX logged on user\&. See the \fI-U username\fR parameter for details on changing the password for a different username\&. - - -Note that if changing a Windows NT Domain password the remote machine specified must be the Primary Domain Controller for the domain (Backup Domain Controllers only have a read-only copy of the user account database and will not allow the password change)\&. - - -\fBNote\fR that Windows 95/98 do not have a real password database so it is not possible to change passwords specifying a Win95/98 machine as remote machine target\&. - - -.TP --R name resolve order -This option allows the user of smbpasswd to determine what name resolution services to use when looking up the NetBIOS name of the host being connected to\&. - - -The options are :"lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast"\&. They cause names to be resolved as follows: - - -\fBlmhosts\fR: Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file\&. If the line in lmhosts has no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see the \fBlmhosts\fR(5) for details) then any name type matches for lookup\&. - -\fBhost\fR: Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, using the system \fI/etc/hosts \fR, NIS, or DNS lookups\&. This method of name resolution is operating system depended for instance on IRIX or Solaris this may be controlled by the \fI/etc/nsswitch\&.conf\fR file)\&. Note that this method is only used if the NetBIOS name type being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type, otherwise it is ignored\&. - -\fBwins\fR: Query a name with the IP address listed in the \fIwins server\fR parameter\&. If no WINS server has been specified this method will be ignored\&. - -\fBbcast\fR: Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces listed in the \fIinterfaces\fR parameter\&. This is the least reliable of the name resolution methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally connected subnet\&. - -The default order is \fBlmhosts, host, wins, bcast\fR and without this parameter or any entry in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file the name resolution methods will be attempted in this order\&. - - -.TP --m -This option tells smbpasswd that the account being changed is a MACHINE account\&. Currently this is used when Samba is being used as an NT Primary Domain Controller\&. - - -This option is only available when running smbpasswd as root\&. - - -.TP --U username -This option may only be used in conjunction with the \fI-r\fR option\&. When changing a password on a remote machine it allows the user to specify the user name on that machine whose password will be changed\&. It is present to allow users who have different user names on different systems to change these passwords\&. - - -.TP --h -This option prints the help string for \fB smbpasswd\fR, selecting the correct one for running as root or as an ordinary user\&. - - -.TP --s -This option causes smbpasswd to be silent (i\&.e\&. not issue prompts) and to read its old and new passwords from standard input, rather than from \fI/dev/tty\fR (like the \fBpasswd(1)\fR program does)\&. This option is to aid people writing scripts to drive smbpasswd - - -.TP --w password -This parameter is only available if Samba has been configured to use the experimental \fB--with-ldapsam\fR option\&. The \fI-w\fR switch is used to specify the password to be used with the \fIldap admin dn\fR\&. Note that the password is stored in the \fIsecrets\&.tdb\fR and is keyed off of the admin's DN\&. This means that if the value of \fIldap admin dn\fR ever changes, the password will need to be manually updated as well\&. - - -.TP --i -This option tells smbpasswd that the account being changed is an interdomain trust account\&. Currently this is used when Samba is being used as an NT Primary Domain Controller\&. The account contains the info about another trusted domain\&. - - -This option is only available when running smbpasswd as root\&. - - -.TP --L -Run in local mode\&. - - -.TP -username -This specifies the username for all of the \fBroot only\fR options to operate on\&. Only root can specify this parameter as only root has the permission needed to modify attributes directly in the local smbpasswd file\&. - - -.SH "NOTES" - -.PP -Since \fBsmbpasswd\fR works in client-server mode communicating with a local smbd for a non-root user then the smbd daemon must be running for this to work\&. A common problem is to add a restriction to the hosts that may access the \fB smbd\fR running on the local machine by specifying either \fIallow hosts\fR or \fIdeny hosts\fR entry in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file and neglecting to allow "localhost" access to the smbd\&. - -.PP -In addition, the smbpasswd command is only useful if Samba has been set up to use encrypted passwords\&. - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -\fBsmbpasswd\fR(5), \fBSamba\fR(7)\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbsh.1 b/docs/manpages/smbsh.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 47903ed1044..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/smbsh.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,141 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "SMBSH" 1 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -smbsh \- Allows access to remote SMB shares using UNIX commands -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBsmbsh\fR [-W workgroup] [-U username] [-P prefix] [-R <name resolve order>] [-d <debug level>] [-l logfile] [-L libdir] - -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -\fBsmbsh\fR allows you to access an NT filesystem using UNIX commands such as \fBls\fR, \fB egrep\fR, and \fBrcp\fR\&. You must use a shell that is dynamically linked in order for \fBsmbsh\fR to work correctly\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP --W WORKGROUP -Override the default workgroup specified in the workgroup parameter of the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file for this session\&. This may be needed to connect to some servers\&. - - -.TP --U username[%pass] -Sets the SMB username or username and password\&. If this option is not specified, the user will be prompted for both the username and the password\&. If %pass is not specified, the user will be prompted for the password\&. - - -.TP --P prefix -This option allows the user to set the directory prefix for SMB access\&. The default value if this option is not specified is \fBsmb\fR\&. - - -.TP --s <configuration file> -The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&. - - -.TP --d|--debug=debuglevel -\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&. - - -The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day-to-day running - it generates a small amount of information about operations carried out\&. - - -Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&. - - -Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. - - -.TP --R <name resolve order> -This option is used to determine what naming services and in what order to resolve host names to IP addresses\&. The option takes a space-separated string of different name resolution options\&. - - -The options are: "lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast"\&. They cause names to be resolved as follows : - - -\fBlmhosts\fR: Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file\&. If the line in lmhosts has no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see the \fBlmhosts\fR(5) for details) then any name type matches for lookup\&. - -\fBhost\fR: Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, using the system \fI/etc/hosts\fR, NIS, or DNS lookups\&. This method of name resolution is operating system dependent, for instance on IRIX or Solaris this may be controlled by the \fI/etc/nsswitch\&.conf \fR file)\&. Note that this method is only used if the NetBIOS name type being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type, otherwise it is ignored\&. - -\fBwins\fR: Query a name with the IP address listed in the \fIwins server\fR parameter\&. If no WINS server has been specified this method will be ignored\&. - -\fBbcast\fR: Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces listed in the \fIinterfaces\fR parameter\&. This is the least reliable of the name resolution methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally connected subnet\&. - -If this parameter is not set then the name resolve order defined in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file parameter (\fIname resolve order\fR) will be used\&. - - -The default order is lmhosts, host, wins, bcast\&. Without this parameter or any entry in the \fIname resolve order\fR parameter of the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file, the name resolution methods will be attempted in this order\&. - - -.TP --L libdir -This parameter specifies the location of the shared libraries used by \fBsmbsh\fR\&. The default value is specified at compile time\&. - - -.SH "EXAMPLES" - -.PP -To use the \fBsmbsh\fR command, execute \fB smbsh\fR from the prompt and enter the username and password that authenticates you to the machine running the Windows NT operating system\&. -.nf - -system% \fBsmbsh\fR -Username: \fBuser\fR -Password: \fBXXXXXXX\fR -.fi - - -.PP -Any dynamically linked command you execute from this shell will access the \fI/smb\fR directory using the smb protocol\&. For example, the command \fBls /smb \fR will show a list of workgroups\&. The command\fBls /smb/MYGROUP \fR will show all the machines in the workgroup MYGROUP\&. The command\fBls /smb/MYGROUP/<machine-name>\fR will show the share names for that machine\&. You could then, for example, use the \fB cd\fR command to change directories, \fBvi\fR to edit files, and \fBrcp\fR to copy files\&. - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "BUGS" - -.PP -\fBsmbsh\fR works by intercepting the standard libc calls with the dynamically loaded versions in \fI smbwrapper\&.o\fR\&. Not all calls have been "wrapped", so some programs may not function correctly under \fBsmbsh \fR\&. - -.PP -Programs which are not dynamically linked cannot make use of \fBsmbsh\fR's functionality\&. Most versions of UNIX have a \fBfile\fR command that will describe how a program was linked\&. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -\fBsmbd\fR(8), \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbspool.8 b/docs/manpages/smbspool.8 deleted file mode 100644 index a6413547b8d..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/smbspool.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,115 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "SMBSPOOL" 8 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -smbspool \- send a print file to an SMB printer -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBsmbspool\fR {job} {user} {title} {copies} {options} [filename] -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -smbspool is a very small print spooling program that sends a print file to an SMB printer\&. The command-line arguments are position-dependent for compatibility with the Common UNIX Printing System, but you can use smbspool with any printing system or from a program or script\&. - -.PP -\fBDEVICE URI\fR - -.PP -smbspool specifies the destination using a Uniform Resource Identifier ("URI") with a method of "smb"\&. This string can take a number of forms: - -.TP 3 -\(bu -smb://server/printer - -.TP -\(bu -smb://workgroup/server/printer - -.TP -\(bu -smb://username:password@server/printer - -.TP -\(bu -smb://username:password@workgroup/server/printer - -.LP - -.PP -smbspool tries to get the URI from argv[0]\&. If argv[0] contains the name of the program then it looks in the \fB DEVICE_URI\fR environment variable\&. - -.PP -Programs using the \fBexec(2)\fR functions can pass the URI in argv[0], while shell scripts must set the\fBDEVICE_URI\fR environment variable prior to running smbspool\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP 3 -\(bu -The job argument (argv[1]) contains the job ID number and is presently not used by smbspool\&. - -.TP -\(bu -The user argument (argv[2]) contains the print user's name and is presently not used by smbspool\&. - -.TP -\(bu -The title argument (argv[3]) contains the job title string and is passed as the remote file name when sending the print job\&. - -.TP -\(bu -The copies argument (argv[4]) contains the number of copies to be printed of the named file\&. If no filename is provided then this argument is not used by smbspool\&. - -.TP -\(bu -The options argument (argv[5]) contains the print options in a single string and is currently not used by smbspool\&. - -.TP -\(bu -The filename argument (argv[6]) contains the name of the file to print\&. If this argument is not specified then the print file is read from the standard input\&. - -.LP - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -\fBsmbd\fR(8) and \fBSamba\fR(7)\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -\fBsmbspool\fR was written by Michael Sweet at Easy Software Products\&. - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbstatus.1 b/docs/manpages/smbstatus.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 44f0bae2325..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/smbstatus.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,131 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "SMBSTATUS" 1 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -smbstatus \- report on current Samba connections -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBsmbstatus\fR [-P] [-b] [-d <debug level>] [-v] [-L] [-B] [-p] [-S] [-s <configuration - file>] [-u <username>] -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -\fBsmbstatus\fR is a very simple program to list the current Samba connections\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP --P|--profile -If samba has been compiled with the profiling option, print only the contents of the profiling shared memory area\&. - - -.TP --b|--brief -gives brief output\&. - - -.TP --V -Prints the program version number\&. - - -.TP --s <configuration file> -The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&. - - -.TP --d|--debug=debuglevel -\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&. - - -The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day-to-day running - it generates a small amount of information about operations carried out\&. - - -Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&. - - -Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. - - -.TP --l|--logfile=logbasename -File name for log/debug files\&. The extension \fB"\&.client"\fR will be appended\&. The log file is never removed by the client\&. - - -.TP --v|--verbose -gives verbose output\&. - - -.TP --L|--locks -causes smbstatus to only list locks\&. - - -.TP --B|--byterange -causes smbstatus to include byte range locks\&. - - -.TP --p|--processes -print a list of \fBsmbd\fR(8) processes and exit\&. Useful for scripting\&. - - -.TP --S|--shares -causes smbstatus to only list shares\&. - - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.TP --u|--user=<username> -selects information relevant to \fIusername\fR only\&. - - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -\fBsmbd\fR(8) and \fBsmb.conf\fR(5)\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbtar.1 b/docs/manpages/smbtar.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 00d913bdfae..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/smbtar.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "SMBTAR" 1 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -smbtar \- shell script for backing up SMB/CIFS shares directly to UNIX tape drives -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBsmbtar\fR [-r] [-i] [-a] [-v] {-s server} [-p password] [-x services] [-X] [-N filename] - [-b blocksize] [-d directory] [-l loglevel] [-u user] [-t tape] {filenames} - -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -\fBsmbtar\fR is a very small shell script on top of \fBsmbclient\fR(1) which dumps SMB shares directly to tape\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP --s server -The SMB/CIFS server that the share resides upon\&. - - -.TP --x service -The share name on the server to connect to\&. The default is "backup"\&. - - -.TP --X -Exclude mode\&. Exclude filenames\&.\&.\&. from tar create or restore\&. - - -.TP --d directory -Change to initial \fIdirectory \fR before restoring / backing up files\&. - - -.TP --v -Verbose mode\&. - - -.TP --p password -The password to use to access a share\&. Default: none - - -.TP --u user -The user id to connect as\&. Default: UNIX login name\&. - - -.TP --a -Reset DOS archive bit mode to indicate file has been archived\&. - - -.TP --t tape -Tape device\&. May be regular file or tape device\&. Default: \fI$TAPE\fR environmental variable; if not set, a file called \fItar\&.out \fR\&. - - -.TP --b blocksize -Blocking factor\&. Defaults to 20\&. See \fBtar(1)\fR for a fuller explanation\&. - - -.TP --N filename -Backup only files newer than filename\&. Could be used (for example) on a log file to implement incremental backups\&. - - -.TP --i -Incremental mode; tar files are only backed up if they have the archive bit set\&. The archive bit is reset after each file is read\&. - - -.TP --r -Restore\&. Files are restored to the share from the tar file\&. - - -.TP --l log level -Log (debug) level\&. Corresponds to the \fI-d\fR flag of \fBsmbclient\fR(1)\&. - - -.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES" - -.PP -The \fI$TAPE\fR variable specifies the default tape device to write to\&. May be overridden with the -t option\&. - -.SH "BUGS" - -.PP -The \fBsmbtar\fR script has different options from ordinary tar and from smbclient's tar command\&. - -.SH "CAVEATS" - -.PP -Sites that are more careful about security may not like the way the script handles PC passwords\&. Backup and restore work on entire shares; should work on file lists\&. smbtar works best with GNU tar and may not work well with other versions\&. - -.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" - -.PP -See the \fBDIAGNOSTICS\fR section for the \fBsmbclient\fR(1) command\&. - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -\fBsmbd\fR(8), \fBsmbclient\fR(1), \fBsmb.conf\fR(5)\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -Ricky Poulten wrote the tar extension and this man page\&. The \fBsmbtar\fR script was heavily rewritten and improved by Martin Kraemer\&. Many thanks to everyone who suggested extensions, improvements, bug fixes, etc\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbtree.1 b/docs/manpages/smbtree.1 deleted file mode 100644 index a76c679c21d..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/smbtree.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,143 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "SMBTREE" 1 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -smbtree \- A text based smb network browser -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBsmbtree\fR [-b] [-D] [-S] -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -\fBsmbtree\fR is a smb browser program in text mode\&. It is similar to the "Network Neighborhood" found on Windows computers\&. It prints a tree with all the known domains, the servers in those domains and the shares on the servers\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP --b -Query network nodes by sending requests as broadcasts instead of querying the (domain) master browser\&. - - -.TP --D -Only print a list of all the domains known on broadcast or by the master browser - - -.TP --S -Only print a list of all the domains and servers responding on broadcast or known by the master browser\&. - - -.TP --V -Prints the program version number\&. - - -.TP --s <configuration file> -The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&. - - -.TP --d|--debug=debuglevel -\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&. - - -The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day-to-day running - it generates a small amount of information about operations carried out\&. - - -Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&. - - -Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. - - -.TP --l|--logfile=logbasename -File name for log/debug files\&. The extension \fB"\&.client"\fR will be appended\&. The log file is never removed by the client\&. - - -.TP --N -If specified, this parameter suppresses the normal password prompt from the client to the user\&. This is useful when accessing a service that does not require a password\&. - - -Unless a password is specified on the command line or this parameter is specified, the client will request a password\&. - - -.TP --k -Try to authenticate with kerberos\&. Only useful in an Active Directory environment\&. - - -.TP --A|--authfile=filename -This option allows you to specify a file from which to read the username and password used in the connection\&. The format of the file is - - -.nf - -username = <value> -password = <value> -domain = <value> -.fi - - -Make certain that the permissions on the file restrict access from unwanted users\&. - - -.TP --U|--user=username[%password] -Sets the SMB username or username and password\&. - - -If %password is not specified, the user will be prompted\&. The client will first check the \fBUSER\fR environment variable, then the \fBLOGNAME\fR variable and if either exists, the string is uppercased\&. If these environmental variables are not found, the username \fBGUEST\fR is used\&. - - -A third option is to use a credentials file which contains the plaintext of the username and password\&. This option is mainly provided for scripts where the admin does not wish to pass the credentials on the command line or via environment variables\&. If this method is used, make certain that the permissions on the file restrict access from unwanted users\&. See the \fI-A\fR for more details\&. - - -Be cautious about including passwords in scripts\&. Also, on many systems the command line of a running process may be seen via the \fBps\fR command\&. To be safe always allow \fBrpcclient\fR to prompt for a password and type it in directly\&. - - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The smbtree man page was written by Jelmer Vernooij\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbumount.8 b/docs/manpages/smbumount.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 922cf5db849..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/smbumount.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "SMBUMOUNT" 8 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -smbumount \- smbfs umount for normal users -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBsmbumount\fR {mount-point} -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -With this program, normal users can unmount smb-filesystems, provided that it is suid root\&. \fBsmbumount\fR has been written to give normal Linux users more control over their resources\&. It is safe to install this program suid root, because only the user who has mounted a filesystem is allowed to unmount it again\&. For root it is not necessary to use smbumount\&. The normal umount program works perfectly well, but it would certainly be problematic to make umount setuid root\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP -mount-point -The directory to unmount\&. - - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -\fBsmbmount\fR(8) - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Michael H\&. Warfield and others\&. - -.PP -The current maintainer of smbfs and the userspace tools \fBsmbmount\fR, \fBsmbumount\fR, and \fBsmbmnt\fR is Urban Widmark\&. The SAMBA Mailing list is the preferred place to ask questions regarding these programs\&. - -.PP -The conversion of this manpage for Samba 2\&.2 was performed by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/swat.8 b/docs/manpages/swat.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 99e8de03796..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/swat.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,184 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "SWAT" 8 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -swat \- Samba Web Administration Tool -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBswat\fR [-s <smb config file>] [-a] -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -\fBswat\fR allows a Samba administrator to configure the complex \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file via a Web browser\&. In addition, a \fBswat\fR configuration page has help links to all the configurable options in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file allowing an administrator to easily look up the effects of any change\&. - -.PP -\fBswat\fR is run from \fBinetd\fR - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP --s smb configuration file -The default configuration file path is determined at compile time\&. The file specified contains the configuration details required by the \fBsmbd\fR(8) server\&. This is the file that \fBswat\fR will modify\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. - - -.TP --a -This option disables authentication and puts \fBswat\fR in demo mode\&. In that mode anyone will be able to modify the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. - - -\fBWARNING: Do NOT enable this option on a production server\&. \fR - - -.TP --V -Prints the program version number\&. - - -.TP --s <configuration file> -The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&. - - -.TP --d|--debug=debuglevel -\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&. - - -The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day-to-day running - it generates a small amount of information about operations carried out\&. - - -Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&. - - -Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. - - -.TP --l|--logfile=logbasename -File name for log/debug files\&. The extension \fB"\&.client"\fR will be appended\&. The log file is never removed by the client\&. - - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.SH "INSTALLATION" - -.PP -Swat is included as binary package with most distributions\&. The package manager in this case takes care of the installation and configuration\&. This section is only for those who have compiled swat from scratch\&. - -.PP -After you compile SWAT you need to run \fBmake install \fR to install the \fBswat\fR binary and the various help files and images\&. A default install would put these in: - -.TP 3 -\(bu -/usr/local/samba/bin/swat - -.TP -\(bu -/usr/local/samba/swat/images/* - -.TP -\(bu -/usr/local/samba/swat/help/* - -.LP - -.SS "Inetd Installation" - -.PP -You need to edit your \fI/etc/inetd\&.conf \fR and \fI/etc/services\fR to enable SWAT to be launched via \fBinetd\fR\&. - -.PP -In \fI/etc/services\fR you need to add a line like this: - -.PP -\fBswat 901/tcp\fR - -.PP -Note for NIS/YP and LDAP users - you may need to rebuild the NIS service maps rather than alter your local \fI /etc/services\fR file\&. - -.PP -the choice of port number isn't really important except that it should be less than 1024 and not currently used (using a number above 1024 presents an obscure security hole depending on the implementation details of your\fBinetd\fR daemon)\&. - -.PP -In \fI/etc/inetd\&.conf\fR you should add a line like this: - -.PP -\fBswat stream tcp nowait.400 root /usr/local/samba/bin/swat swat\fR - -.PP -One you have edited \fI/etc/services\fR and \fI/etc/inetd\&.conf\fR you need to send a HUP signal to inetd\&. To do this use \fBkill -1 PID \fR where PID is the process ID of the inetd daemon\&. - -.SH "LAUNCHING" - -.PP -To launch SWAT just run your favorite web browser and point it at "http://localhost:901/"\&. - -.PP -Note that you can attach to SWAT from any IP connected machine but connecting from a remote machine leaves your connection open to password sniffing as passwords will be sent in the clear over the wire\&. - -.SH "FILES" - -.TP -\fI/etc/inetd\&.conf\fR -This file must contain suitable startup information for the meta-daemon\&. - - -.TP -\fI/etc/services\fR -This file must contain a mapping of service name (e\&.g\&., swat) to service port (e\&.g\&., 901) and protocol type (e\&.g\&., tcp)\&. - - -.TP -\fI/usr/local/samba/lib/smb\&.conf\fR -This is the default location of the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) server configuration file that swat edits\&. Other common places that systems install this file are \fI /usr/samba/lib/smb\&.conf\fR and \fI/etc/smb\&.conf \fR\&. This file describes all the services the server is to make available to clients\&. - - -.SH "WARNINGS" - -.PP -\fBswat\fR will rewrite your \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file\&. It will rearrange the entries and delete all comments, \fIinclude=\fR and \fIcopy= \fR options\&. If you have a carefully crafted \fI smb\&.conf\fR then back it up or don't use swat! - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -\fBinetd(5)\fR, \fBsmbd\fR(8), \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/tdbbackup.8 b/docs/manpages/tdbbackup.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 42be45c6a9f..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/tdbbackup.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,100 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "TDBBACKUP" 8 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -tdbbackup \- tool for backing up and for validating the integrity of samba .tdb files -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBtdbbackup\fR [-s suffix] [-v] [-h] -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(1) suite\&. - -.PP -\fBtdbbackup\fR is a tool that may be used to backup samba \&.tdb files\&. This tool may also be used to verify the integrity of the \&.tdb files prior to samba startup, in which case, if it find file damage and it finds a prior backup it will restore the backup file\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP --h -Get help information\&. - - -.TP --s suffix -The \fB-s\fR option allows the adminisistrator to specify a file backup extension\&. This way it is possible to keep a history of tdb backup files by using a new suffix for each backup\&. - - -.TP --v -The \fB-v\fR will check the database for damages (currupt data) which if detected causes the backup to be restored\&. - - -.SH "COMMANDS" - -.PP -\fBGENERAL INFORMATION\fR - -.PP -The \fBtdbbackup\fR utility should be run as soon as samba has shut down\&. Do NOT run this command on a live database\&. Typical usage for the command will be: - -.PP -tdbbackup [-s suffix] *\&.tdb - -.PP -Before restarting samba the following command may be run to validate \&.tdb files: - -.PP -tdbbackup -v [-s suffix] *\&.tdb - -.PP -Samba \&.tdb files are stored in various locations, be sure to run backup all \&.tdb file on the system\&. Imporatant files includes: - -.TP 3 -\(bu -\fBsecrets.tdb\fR - usual location is in the /usr/local/samba/private directory, or on some systems in /etc/samba\&. - -.TP -\(bu -\fBpassdb.tdb\fR - usual location is in the /usr/local/samba/private directory, or on some systems in /etc/samba\&. - -.TP -\(bu -\fB*.tdb\fR located in the /usr/local/samba/var directory or on some systems in the /var/cache or /var/lib/samba directories\&. - -.LP - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The tdbbackup man page was written by John H Terpstra\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/testparm.1 b/docs/manpages/testparm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4207c2fe9a5..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/testparm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,123 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "TESTPARM" 1 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -testparm \- check an smb.conf configuration file for internal correctness -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBtestparm\fR [-s] [-h] [-v] [-L <servername>] [-t <encoding>] {config filename} [hostname - hostIP] -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -\fBtestparm\fR is a very simple test program to check an \fBsmbd\fR(8) configuration file for internal correctness\&. If this program reports no problems, you can use the configuration file with confidence that \fBsmbd \fR will successfully load the configuration file\&. - -.PP -Note that this is \fBNOT\fR a guarantee that the services specified in the configuration file will be available or will operate as expected\&. - -.PP -If the optional host name and host IP address are specified on the command line, this test program will run through the service entries reporting whether the specified host has access to each service\&. - -.PP -If \fBtestparm\fR finds an error in the \fI smb\&.conf\fR file it returns an exit code of 1 to the calling program, else it returns an exit code of 0\&. This allows shell scripts to test the output from \fBtestparm\fR\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP --s -Without this option, \fBtestparm\fR will prompt for a carriage return after printing the service names and before dumping the service definitions\&. - - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.TP --V -Prints the program version number\&. - - -.TP --L servername -Sets the value of the %L macro to \fIservername\fR\&. This is useful for testing include files specified with the %L macro\&. - - -.TP --v -If this option is specified, testparm will also output all options that were not used in \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) and are thus set to their defaults\&. - - -.TP --t encoding -Output data in specified encoding\&. - - -.TP -configfilename -This is the name of the configuration file to check\&. If this parameter is not present then the default \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file will be checked\&. - - -.TP -hostname -If this parameter and the following are specified, then \fBtestparm\fR will examine the \fIhosts allow\fR and \fIhosts deny\fR parameters in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file to determine if the hostname with this IP address would be allowed access to the \fBsmbd\fR server\&. If this parameter is supplied, the hostIP parameter must also be supplied\&. - - -.TP -hostIP -This is the IP address of the host specified in the previous parameter\&. This address must be supplied if the hostname parameter is supplied\&. - - -.SH "FILES" - -.TP -\fBsmb.conf\fR(5) -This is usually the name of the configuration file used by \fBsmbd\fR(8)\&. - - -.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" - -.PP -The program will issue a message saying whether the configuration file loaded OK or not\&. This message may be preceded by errors and warnings if the file did not load\&. If the file was loaded OK, the program then dumps all known service details to stdout\&. - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -\fBsmb.conf\fR(5), \fBsmbd\fR(8) - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/testprns.1 b/docs/manpages/testprns.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9f98ea1d59a..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/testprns.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,96 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "TESTPRNS" 1 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -testprns \- check printer name for validity with smbd -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBtestprns\fR {printername} [printcapname] -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -\fBtestprns\fR is a very simple test program to determine whether a given printer name is valid for use in a service to be provided by \fBsmbd\fR(8)\&. - -.PP -"Valid" in this context means "can be found in the printcap specified"\&. This program is very stupid - so stupid in fact that it would be wisest to always specify the printcap file to use\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP -printername -The printer name to validate\&. - - -Printer names are taken from the first field in each record in the printcap file, single printer names and sets of aliases separated by vertical bars ("|") are recognized\&. Note that no validation or checking of the printcap syntax is done beyond that required to extract the printer name\&. It may be that the print spooling system is more forgiving or less forgiving than \fBtestprns\fR\&. However, if \fBtestprns\fR finds the printer then \fBsmbd\fR(8) should do so as well\&. - - -.TP -printcapname -This is the name of the printcap file within which to search for the given printer name\&. - - -If no printcap name is specified \fBtestprns \fR will attempt to scan the printcap file name specified at compile time\&. - - -.SH "FILES" - -.TP -\fI/etc/printcap\fR -This is usually the default printcap file to scan\&. See \fIprintcap (5)\fR\&. - - -.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" - -.PP -If a printer is found to be valid, the message "Printer name <printername> is valid" will be displayed\&. - -.PP -If a printer is found to be invalid, the message "Printer name <printername> is not valid" will be displayed\&. - -.PP -All messages that would normally be logged during operation of the Samba daemons are logged by this program to the file \fItest\&.log\fR in the current directory\&. The program runs at debuglevel 3, so quite extensive logging information is written\&. The log should be checked carefully for errors and warnings\&. - -.PP -Other messages are self-explanatory\&. - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -\fIprintcap(5)\fR,\fBsmbd\fR(8), \fBsmbclient\fR(1) - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/vfstest.1 b/docs/manpages/vfstest.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 20566ee143d..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/vfstest.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,271 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "VFSTEST" 1 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -vfstest \- tool for testing samba VFS modules -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBvfstest\fR [-d debuglevel] [-c command] [-l logfile] [-h] -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -\fBvfstest\fR is a small command line utility that has the ability to test dso samba VFS modules\&. It gives the user the ability to call the various VFS functions manually and supports cascaded VFS modules\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP --c|--command=command -Execute the specified (colon-separated) commands\&. See below for the commands that are available\&. - - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.TP --l|--logfile=logbasename -File name for log/debug files\&. The extension \fB'\&.client'\fR will be appended\&. The log file is never removed by the client\&. - - -.TP --V -Prints the program version number\&. - - -.TP --s <configuration file> -The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&. - - -.TP --d|--debug=debuglevel -\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&. - - -The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day-to-day running - it generates a small amount of information about operations carried out\&. - - -Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&. - - -Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. - - -.TP --l|--logfile=logbasename -File name for log/debug files\&. The extension \fB"\&.client"\fR will be appended\&. The log file is never removed by the client\&. - - -.SH "COMMANDS" - -.PP -\fBVFS COMMANDS\fR - -.TP 3 -\(bu -\fBload <module.so>\fR - Load specified VFS module - -.TP -\(bu -\fBpopulate <char> <size>\fR - Populate a data buffer with the specified data - -.TP -\(bu -\fBshowdata [<offset> <len>]\fR - Show data currently in data buffer - -.TP -\(bu -\fBconnect\fR - VFS connect() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBdisconnect\fR - VFS disconnect() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBdisk_free\fR - VFS disk_free() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBopendir\fR - VFS opendir() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBreaddir\fR - VFS readdir() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBmkdir\fR - VFS mkdir() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBrmdir\fR - VFS rmdir() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBclosedir\fR - VFS closedir() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBopen\fR - VFS open() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBclose\fR - VFS close() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBread\fR - VFS read() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBwrite\fR - VFS write() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBlseek\fR - VFS lseek() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBrename\fR - VFS rename() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBfsync\fR - VFS fsync() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBstat\fR - VFS stat() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBfstat\fR - VFS fstat() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBlstat\fR - VFS lstat() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBunlink\fR - VFS unlink() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBchmod\fR - VFS chmod() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBfchmod\fR - VFS fchmod() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBchown\fR - VFS chown() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBfchown\fR - VFS fchown() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBchdir\fR - VFS chdir() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBgetwd\fR - VFS getwd() - -.TP -\(bu -\fButime\fR - VFS utime() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBftruncate\fR - VFS ftruncate() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBlock\fR - VFS lock() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBsymlink\fR - VFS symlink() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBreadlink\fR - VFS readlink() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBlink\fR - VFS link() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBmknod\fR - VFS mknod() - -.TP -\(bu -\fBrealpath\fR - VFS realpath() - -.LP - -.PP -\fBGENERAL COMMANDS\fR - -.TP 3 -\(bu -\fBconf <smb.conf>\fR - Load a different configuration file - -.TP -\(bu -\fBhelp [<command>]\fR - Get list of commands or info about specified command - -.TP -\(bu -\fBdebuglevel <level>\fR - Set debug level - -.TP -\(bu -\fBfreemem\fR - Free memory currently in use - -.TP -\(bu -\fBexit\fR - Exit vfstest - -.LP - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -The vfstest man page was written by Jelmer Vernooij\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/wbinfo.1 b/docs/manpages/wbinfo.1 deleted file mode 100644 index f740448b589..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/wbinfo.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,203 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "WBINFO" 1 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -wbinfo \- Query information from winbind daemon -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBwbinfo\fR [-a user%password] [-c username] [-C groupname] [--domain domain] [-I ip] [-s sid] [-u] [-U uid] [-g] [--get-auth-user] [-G gid] [-m] [-n name] [-N netbios-name] [-o user:group] [-O user:group] [-p] [-r user] [--set-auth-user user%password] [--sequence] [-S sid] [-t] [-x username] [-X groupname] [-Y sid] - -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -The \fBwbinfo\fR program queries and returns information created and used by the \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon\&. - -.PP -The \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon must be configured and running for the \fBwbinfo\fR program to be able to return information\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP --a username%password -Attempt to authenticate a user via winbindd\&. This checks both authenticaion methods and reports its results\&. - - -.TP --c user -Create a local winbind user\&. - - -.TP --C group -Create a local winbindd group\&. - - -.TP ---domain name -This parameter sets the domain on which any specified operations will performed\&. If special domain name '\&.' is used to represent the current domain to which winbindd belongs\&. Currently only the \fB--sequence\fR, \fB-u\fR, and \fB-g\fR options honor this parameter\&. - - -.TP --g -This option will list all groups available in the Windows NT domain for which the \fBSamba\fR(7) daemon is operating in\&. Groups in all trusted domains will also be listed\&. Note that this operation does not assign group ids to any groups that have not already been seen by \fBwinbindd\fR(8)\&. - - -.TP ---get-auth-user -Print username and password used by winbindd during session setup to a domain controller\&. Username and password can be set using '-A'\&. Only available for root\&. - - -.TP --G gid -Try to convert a UNIX group id to a Windows NT SID\&. If the gid specified does not refer to one within the idmap gid range then the operation will fail\&. - - -.TP --I ip -The \fI-I\fR option queries \fBwinbindd\fR(8) to send a node status request to get the NetBIOS name associated with the IP address specified by the \fIip\fR parameter\&. - - -.TP --m -Produce a list of domains trusted by the Windows NT server \fBwinbindd\fR(8) contacts when resolving names\&. This list does not include the Windows NT domain the server is a Primary Domain Controller for\&. - - -.TP --n name -The \fI-n\fR option queries \fBwinbindd\fR(8) for the SID associated with the name specified\&. Domain names can be specified before the user name by using the winbind separator character\&. For example CWDOM1/Administrator refers to the Administrator user in the domain CWDOM1\&. If no domain is specified then the domain used is the one specified in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) \fIworkgroup \fR parameter\&. - - -.TP --N name -The \fI-N\fR option queries \fBwinbindd\fR(8) to query the WINS server for the IP address associated with the NetBIOS name specified by the \fIname\fR parameter\&. - - -.TP --o user:group -Add a winbindd local group as a secondary group for the specified winbindd local user\&. - - -.TP --O user:group -Remove a winbindd local group as a secondary group for the specified winbindd local user\&. - - -.TP --p -Check whether winbindd is still alive\&. Prints out either 'succeeded' or 'failed'\&. - - -.TP --r username -Try to obtain the list of UNIX group ids to which the user belongs\&. This only works for users defined on a Domain Controller\&. - - -.TP --s sid -Use \fI-s\fR to resolve a SID to a name\&. This is the inverse of the \fI-n \fR option above\&. SIDs must be specified as ASCII strings in the traditional Microsoft format\&. For example, S-1-5-21-1455342024-3071081365-2475485837-500\&. - - -.TP ---set-auth-user username%password -Store username and password used by winbindd during session setup to a domain controller\&. This enables winbindd to operate in a Windows 2000 domain with Restrict Anonymous turned on (a\&.k\&.a\&. Permissions compatiable with Windows 2000 servers only)\&. - - -.TP ---sequence -Show sequence numbers of all known domains - - -.TP --S sid -Convert a SID to a UNIX user id\&. If the SID does not correspond to a UNIX user mapped by \fBwinbindd\fR(8) then the operation will fail\&. - - -.TP --t -Verify that the workstation trust account created when the Samba server is added to the Windows NT domain is working\&. - - -.TP --u -This option will list all users available in the Windows NT domain for which the \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon is operating in\&. Users in all trusted domains will also be listed\&. Note that this operation does not assign user ids to any users that have not already been seen by \fBwinbindd\fR(8) \&. - - -.TP --U uid -Try to convert a UNIX user id to a Windows NT SID\&. If the uid specified does not refer to one within the idmap uid range then the operation will fail\&. - - -.TP --x user -Delete an existing local winbind user\&. - - -.TP --X group -Delete an existing local winbindd group\&. - - -.TP --Y sid -Convert a SID to a UNIX group id\&. If the SID does not correspond to a UNIX group mapped by \fBwinbindd\fR(8) then the operation will fail\&. - - -.TP --V -Prints the program version number\&. - - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.SH "EXIT STATUS" - -.PP -The wbinfo program returns 0 if the operation succeeded, or 1 if the operation failed\&. If the \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon is not working \fBwbinfo\fR will always return failure\&. - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -\fBwinbindd\fR(8) - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -\fBwbinfo\fR and \fBwinbindd\fR were written by Tim Potter\&. - -.PP -The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - diff --git a/docs/manpages/winbindd.8 b/docs/manpages/winbindd.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 71e014cd4de..00000000000 --- a/docs/manpages/winbindd.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,341 +0,0 @@ -.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "WINBINDD" 8 "" "" "" -.SH NAME -winbindd \- Name Service Switch daemon for resolving names from NT servers -.SH "SYNOPSIS" - -.nf -\fBwinbindd\fR [-F] [-S] [-i] [-Y] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-n] -.fi - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -.PP -This program is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&. - -.PP -\fBwinbindd\fR is a daemon that provides a service for the Name Service Switch capability that is present in most modern C libraries\&. The Name Service Switch allows user and system information to be obtained from different databases services such as NIS or DNS\&. The exact behaviour can be configured throught the \fI/etc/nsswitch\&.conf\fR file\&. Users and groups are allocated as they are resolved to a range of user and group ids specified by the administrator of the Samba system\&. - -.PP -The service provided by \fBwinbindd\fR is called `winbind' and can be used to resolve user and group information from a Windows NT server\&. The service can also provide authentication services via an associated PAM module\&. - -.PP -The \fIpam_winbind\fR module in the 2\&.2\&.2 release only supports the \fIauth\fR and \fIaccount\fR module-types\&. The latter simply performs a getpwnam() to verify that the system can obtain a uid for the user\&. If the \fIlibnss_winbind\fR library has been correctly installed, this should always succeed\&. - -.PP -The following nsswitch databases are implemented by the winbindd service: - -.TP -hosts -User information traditionally stored in the \fIhosts(5)\fR file and used by \fBgethostbyname(3)\fR functions\&. Names are resolved through the WINS server or by broadcast\&. - - -.TP -passwd -User information traditionally stored in the \fIpasswd(5)\fR file and used by \fBgetpwent(3)\fR functions\&. - - -.TP -group -Group information traditionally stored in the \fIgroup(5)\fR file and used by \fBgetgrent(3)\fR functions\&. - - -.PP -For example, the following simple configuration in the\fI/etc/nsswitch\&.conf\fR file can be used to initially resolve user and group information from \fI/etc/passwd \fR and \fI/etc/group\fR and then from the Windows NT server\&. -.nf - -passwd: files winbind -group: files winbind -.fi - - -.PP -The following simple configuration in the\fI/etc/nsswitch\&.conf\fR file can be used to initially resolve hostnames from \fI/etc/hosts\fR and then from the WINS server\&. - -.SH "OPTIONS" - -.TP --F -If specified, this parameter causes the main \fBwinbindd\fR process to not daemonize, i\&.e\&. double-fork and disassociate with the terminal\&. Child processes are still created as normal to service each connection request, but the main process does not exit\&. This operation mode is suitable for running \fBwinbindd\fR under process supervisors such as \fBsupervise\fR and \fBsvscan\fR from Daniel J\&. Bernstein's \fBdaemontools\fR package, or the AIX process monitor\&. - - -.TP --S -If specified, this parameter causes \fBwinbindd\fR to log to standard output rather than a file\&. - - -.TP --V -Prints the program version number\&. - - -.TP --s <configuration file> -The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&. - - -.TP --d|--debug=debuglevel -\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&. - - -The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day-to-day running - it generates a small amount of information about operations carried out\&. - - -Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&. - - -Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. - - -.TP --l|--logfile=logbasename -File name for log/debug files\&. The extension \fB"\&.client"\fR will be appended\&. The log file is never removed by the client\&. - - -.TP --h|--help -Print a summary of command line options\&. - - -.TP --i -Tells \fBwinbindd\fR to not become a daemon and detach from the current terminal\&. This option is used by developers when interactive debugging of \fBwinbindd\fR is required\&. \fBwinbindd\fR also logs to standard output, as if the \fB-S\fR parameter had been given\&. - - -.TP --n -Disable caching\&. This means winbindd will always have to wait for a response from the domain controller before it can respond to a client and this thus makes things slower\&. The results will however be more accurate, since results from the cache might not be up-to-date\&. This might also temporarily hang winbindd if the DC doesn't respond\&. - - -.TP --Y -Single daemon mode\&. This means winbindd will run as a single process (the mode of operation in Samba 2\&.2)\&. Winbindd's default behavior is to launch a child process that is responsible for updating expired cache entries\&. - - -.SH "NAME AND ID RESOLUTION" - -.PP -Users and groups on a Windows NT server are assigned a relative id (rid) which is unique for the domain when the user or group is created\&. To convert the Windows NT user or group into a unix user or group, a mapping between rids and unix user and group ids is required\&. This is one of the jobs that \fB winbindd\fR performs\&. - -.PP -As winbindd users and groups are resolved from a server, user and group ids are allocated from a specified range\&. This is done on a first come, first served basis, although all existing users and groups will be mapped as soon as a client performs a user or group enumeration command\&. The allocated unix ids are stored in a database file under the Samba lock directory and will be remembered\&. - -.PP -WARNING: The rid to unix id database is the only location where the user and group mappings are stored by winbindd\&. If this file is deleted or corrupted, there is no way for winbindd to determine which user and group ids correspond to Windows NT user and group rids\&. - -.SH "CONFIGURATION" - -.PP -Configuration of the \fBwinbindd\fR daemon is done through configuration parameters in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file\&. All parameters should be specified in the [global] section of smb\&.conf\&. - -.TP 3 -\(bu -\fIwinbind separator\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIidmap uid\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIidmap gid\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwinbind cache time\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwinbind enum users\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwinbind enum groups\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fItemplate homedir\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fItemplate shell\fR - -.TP -\(bu -\fIwinbind use default domain\fR - -.LP - -.SH "EXAMPLE SETUP" - -.PP -To setup winbindd for user and group lookups plus authentication from a domain controller use something like the following setup\&. This was tested on a RedHat 6\&.2 Linux box\&. - -.PP -In \fI/etc/nsswitch\&.conf\fR put the following: -.nf - -passwd: files winbind -group: files winbind -.fi - - -.PP -In \fI/etc/pam\&.d/*\fR replace the \fI auth\fR lines with something like this: -.nf - -auth required /lib/security/pam_securetty\&.so -auth required /lib/security/pam_nologin\&.so -auth sufficient /lib/security/pam_winbind\&.so -auth required /lib/security/pam_pwdb\&.so use_first_pass shadow nullok -.fi - - -.PP -Note in particular the use of the \fIsufficient \fR keyword and the \fIuse_first_pass\fR keyword\&. - -.PP -Now replace the account lines with this: - -.PP -\fBaccount required /lib/security/pam_winbind.so \fR - -.PP -The next step is to join the domain\&. To do that use the\fBnet\fR program like this: - -.PP -\fBnet join -S PDC -U Administrator\fR - -.PP -The username after the \fI-U\fR can be any Domain user that has administrator privileges on the machine\&. Substitute the name or IP of your PDC for "PDC"\&. - -.PP -Next copy \fIlibnss_winbind\&.so\fR to\fI/lib\fR and \fIpam_winbind\&.so \fR to \fI/lib/security\fR\&. A symbolic link needs to be made from \fI/lib/libnss_winbind\&.so\fR to\fI/lib/libnss_winbind\&.so\&.2\fR\&. If you are using an older version of glibc then the target of the link should be\fI/lib/libnss_winbind\&.so\&.1\fR\&. - -.PP -Finally, setup a \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) containing directives like the following: -.nf - -[global] - winbind separator = + - winbind cache time = 10 - template shell = /bin/bash - template homedir = /home/%D/%U - idmap uid = 10000-20000 - idmap gid = 10000-20000 - workgroup = DOMAIN - security = domain - password server = * -.fi - - -.PP -Now start winbindd and you should find that your user and group database is expanded to include your NT users and groups, and that you can login to your unix box as a domain user, using the DOMAIN+user syntax for the username\&. You may wish to use the commands \fBgetent passwd\fR and \fBgetent group \fR to confirm the correct operation of winbindd\&. - -.SH "NOTES" - -.PP -The following notes are useful when configuring and running \fBwinbindd\fR: - -.PP -\fBnmbd\fR(8) must be running on the local machine for \fBwinbindd\fR to work\&. \fBwinbindd\fR queries the list of trusted domains for the Windows NT server on startup and when a SIGHUP is received\&. Thus, for a running \fB winbindd\fR to become aware of new trust relationships between servers, it must be sent a SIGHUP signal\&. - -.PP -PAM is really easy to misconfigure\&. Make sure you know what you are doing when modifying PAM configuration files\&. It is possible to set up PAM such that you can no longer log into your system\&. - -.PP -If more than one UNIX machine is running \fBwinbindd\fR, then in general the user and groups ids allocated by winbindd will not be the same\&. The user and group ids will only be valid for the local machine\&. - -.PP -If the the Windows NT RID to UNIX user and group id mapping file is damaged or destroyed then the mappings will be lost\&. - -.SH "SIGNALS" - -.PP -The following signals can be used to manipulate the\fBwinbindd\fR daemon\&. - -.TP -SIGHUP -Reload the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file and apply any parameter changes to the running version of winbindd\&. This signal also clears any cached user and group information\&. The list of other domains trusted by winbindd is also reloaded\&. - - -.TP -SIGUSR2 -The SIGUSR2 signal will cause \fB winbindd\fR to write status information to the winbind log file including information about the number of user and group ids allocated by \fBwinbindd\fR\&. - - -Log files are stored in the filename specified by the log file parameter\&. - - -.SH "FILES" - -.TP -\fI/etc/nsswitch\&.conf(5)\fR -Name service switch configuration file\&. - - -.TP -/tmp/\&.winbindd/pipe -The UNIX pipe over which clients communicate with the \fBwinbindd\fR program\&. For security reasons, the winbind client will only attempt to connect to the winbindd daemon if both the \fI/tmp/\&.winbindd\fR directory and \fI/tmp/\&.winbindd/pipe\fR file are owned by root\&. - - -.TP -$LOCKDIR/winbindd_privilaged/pipe -The UNIX pipe over which 'privilaged' clients communicate with the \fBwinbindd\fR program\&. For security reasons, access to some winbindd functions - like those needed by the \fBntlm_auth\fR utility - is restricted\&. By default, only users in the 'root' group will get this access, however the administrator may change the group permissions on $LOCKDIR/winbindd_privilaged to allow programs like 'squid' to use ntlm_auth\&. Note that the winbind client will only attempt to connect to the winbindd daemon if both the \fI$LOCKDIR/winbindd_privilaged\fR directory and \fI$LOCKDIR/winbindd_privilaged/pipe\fR file are owned by root\&. - - -.TP -/lib/libnss_winbind\&.so\&.X -Implementation of name service switch library\&. - - -.TP -$LOCKDIR/winbindd_idmap\&.tdb -Storage for the Windows NT rid to UNIX user/group id mapping\&. The lock directory is specified when Samba is initially compiled using the \fI--with-lockdir\fR option\&. This directory is by default \fI/usr/local/samba/var/locks \fR\&. - - -.TP -$LOCKDIR/winbindd_cache\&.tdb -Storage for cached user and group information\&. - - -.SH "VERSION" - -.PP -This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" - -.PP -\fInsswitch\&.conf(5)\fR, \fBSamba\fR(7), \fBwbinfo\fR(8), \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) - -.SH "AUTHOR" - -.PP -The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. - -.PP -\fBwbinfo\fR and \fBwinbindd\fR were written by Tim Potter\&. - -.PP -The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&. - |